Idea Transcript
Distribution and Power - International version
Distribution and Power
International version
TECHNICAL MANUAL World Headquarters and International Department 87045 LIMOGES CEDEX FRANCE ☎ : 33 5 55 06 87 87 Fax : 33 5 55 06 74 55
Welcome to the first edition of the Protection and Power Guide from Legrand, which will make life easier for you, day in and day out. This document serves as both a memorandum and a practical guide, combining comprehensive information which is both technical (performance, equipment operation, etc) and practical (instructions for use, advantages, etc) to guide you when making your selections, with the best of Legrand solutions. A powerful specification tool, it integrates a complete approach which is as exhaustive as possible concerning the functions and constraints of installations, and helps you always make the optimum choice in complete confidence. A guide to our commitment, it illustrates Legrand’s willingness to be at your side, offering the best product offer with the best services: XL PRO2, training, technical support, etc, in order to develop and deepen our relationship.
1
Contents
2
››› Technical part PROTECTION DEVICES general
4
DMX-E air circuit breakers
18
DPX moulded case circuit breakers
36
DX modular circuit breakers
74
ASSOCIATION of protective devices
82
VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS
102
ISOLATION
130
DISTRIBUTION
134
XL3 enclosures
154
››› Offer part DMX-E
171
DPX
176
ISOLATING SWITCHES
200
LR RCDS
216
MODULAR DIN-RAIL EQUIPMENT
221
VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTOR
238
DISTRIBUTION
240
XL3
248
3
Protection devices: general DMX-E ACBs, DPX MCCBs and DX MCBs: in a fully integrated protection range
4
TECHNICAL PART
The choice of a protection device must provide the best possible continuity while also taking into account two compulsory objectives: protecting people and protecting installations. On the other hand the choice of a switching device (isolation, functional breaking, emergency breaking) does not have this automatic protection role as its main objective. People must be protected against indirect contact according to the earthing system and the characteristics of the installation (such as length of lines). The purpose of protecting cables is to limit the effects of overloads and short circuits. The concept of discrimination relates to the aspects of discrimination between protective devices. Protection devices protect installations and people: these are the circuit-breakers and fuses. DX, DPX and DMX-E circuit-breakers perform both a breaking and a protection function. Switching devices are used to control the various circuits in an installation: these are the isolating switches, contactors and even other devices (such as thermostats, latching relays, etc) if the switching only has a functional role. Protection devices for people and installation protection
Product standards Installation standards It is important to distinguish between product standards and installation standards. Product standards concern devices and are the responsibility of manufacturers, whereas installation standards relate to installations: ensuring their correct operation, safety and durability. It is the duty of installers to apply them but, in addition, they must also guarantee the overall performance level of the installation (from the main LV distribution board to the socket) relying on the quality of products and the guarantees that only a major manufacturer can provide.
FOR MORE INFORMATION See the on-line catalogue: instructions, technical data sheets, etc.
5
Protection devices: general (continued) LEGRAND CIRCUIT BREAKERS: DMX-E, DPX & DX A circuit breaker is both a control device which can make, withstand and switch currents whose intensity is at most equal to its nominal current (In), and a protection device which can automatically break overcurrents which may occur as a result of faults in installations. Legrand circuit breakers are divided into three main categories: DMX-E ACBs, DPX MCCBs (moulded cases), and DX MCBs (modular). The choice of the characteristics of a circuit breaker depends on the size of the installation.
THE TECHNOLOGIES USED Overcurrents are detected by three different technologies: - thermal for overloads, - magnetic for short-circuits, - electronic for both. Thermal and magnetic releases, which are usually combined (thermal magnetic MCBs), use a tried and tested, cost effective technology, but provide less flexibility of adjustment and fewer features than electronic releases.
Thermal release
Legrand circuit breakers also perform the following functions: - Manual or automatic control of a circuit - Isolation with positive contact indication and visible contact indication for plug-in and draw-out devices and for DPX-IS - Emergency breaking - Residual current protection
This consists of a bimetallic strip which bends when heated beyond the normal operating values, thus releasing the lock which holds the main contacts. The reaction time of a bimetallic strip is in inverse proportion to the intensity of the current. As a result of its thermal inertia, each reclosing of the faulty circuit reduces its reaction time. DPX MCCBs and ACBs can be used to set the trip current Ir between certain limits (0.4 to 1 x In depending on the model).
Magnetic release This consists of a magnetic loop whose effect releases the lock which holds the main contacts, thus triggering a break if there is a high overcurrent. The response time is very short (a few hundredths of a second). DPX MCCBs have a magnetic setting Im (up to 10 x Ir), which can be used to set the release value to the protection conditions of the installation (fault current and indirect contact). Moreover, this setting can be used to find the best discrimination conditions between the devices.
6
A coil, placed on each conductor, constantly measures the current in each conductor. This information is processed by an electronic module which controls the tripping of the CB when the values of the settings are exceeded. The curve of the release shows three zones of operation. Electronic releases are available on DPX and DMX-E breakers.
TECHNICAL PART
The electronic release
Typical tripping curves t
- “Long time delay” operating zone This is similar to the characteristic of a thermal release. It protects conductors against overloads. - “Short time delay” operating zone This provides protection against lower intensity short-circuits, generally at the end of the line. The trip threshold can usually be adjusted. The period of the delay may be increased by thresholds up to one second, mainly used to ensure discrimination with devices placed downstream. - “Instantaneous” operating zone This provides protection against high intensity short-circuits. It is factory set at a fixed value depending on the model.
Thermal release zone
Magnetic release zone
I
Thermal-magnetic release
t
Long delay operating zone
Short delay operating zone
Instantaneous operating zone
I
Electronic release
FOR MORE INFORMATION Other electronic protection units on request
7
Protection devices: general (continued) The electric arc The current is broken in the circuit breaker arc chamber, which is designed to control the electric arc produced when the contacts open (rather like electrodes). The arc energy can become considerable, up to 100 kilojoules and 20,000 °C, and can cause the contacts to be eroded by vaporising the metal. It is therefore a good idea to extinguish the arc as quickly as possible, to limit its effects. The magnetic field produced by the arc (which is a conductor) is used to move it into an “arc chamber” and extend it until it has been extinguished. The circuit breaker mechanisms must combine very quick contact opening (limiting erosion) and high contact pressure (opposition to the electrodynamic forces).
8
I Prospective Isc Limited Isc
U
Energy limiting
t
Arc U Mains U Restored voltage t
Rated operating voltage Ue (in V) This is the voltage(s) at which the circuit breaker can be used. The value indicated is usually the maximum value. At lower voltages, certain characteristics may differ, or even be improved, such as the breaking capacity.
TECHNICAL PART
BREAKER CHARACTERISTICS Following the test, the circuit breaker must continue to offer a guaranteed minimum level of safety (isolation, dielectric strength). In standard IEC 60898, the device breaking capacity is tested in the same way but is called Icn. After the test, the circuit breaker must retain its dielectric properties and able to trip in accordance with the specifications in the standard.
Rated insulation voltage Ui (in V) This value acts as a reference for the device insulation performance. High voltage tests (Impulse, industrial frequency) are determined on this basis.
Impulse voltage Uimp (in kV) This value characterises the ability of the device to withstand transient overvoltages due to lightning, for example.
Nominal current In (in A) This is the maximum current value the circuit breaker can withstand on a permanent basis. This value is always given for an ambient temperature around the device of 40 °C in accordance with standard IEC 60947-2, and 30 °C in accordance with standard IEC 60898. If the device is used at a higher temperature, it may be necessary to reduce the rated current.
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu (in kA)
Breaking capacity Modular circuit breakers are often identified with two breaking capacities. This distinction results from standards using different test conditions. • 10000 : standard IEC 60898 for household or analogue applications where unqualified people can close a circuit with a persistent fault several times. The breaking capacity (in Amps) then appears in a box, with no mention of the unit. • 10 kA: standard IEC 60947-2 for all applications where the maintenance personnel are suitably qualified. The breaking capacity then appears along with its unit (kA).
This is the maximum short-circuit current value that a circuit breaker can break at a given voltage and phase shift (cos ϕ). The tests are executed according to the sequence O - t - CO; O represents a break operation, t an interval of time and CO a make operation followed by an automatic break operation.
9
Protection devices: general (continued) BREAKER CHARACTERISTICS (continued) Standard breaking capacity Ics This is the value expressed as a percentage of Icu, from the following values: 25% (category A only), 50%, 75% or 100%. The circuit breaker must be capable of operating normally after breaking the Ics current several times using the sequence O-CO-CO. Standard IEC 60898 gives the minimum values to be attained according to the device Icn.
Short time withstand current Icw (in kA) This is the value of the short-circuit current that a category B circuit breaker (see below) is capable of withstanding for a defined period without altering its characteristics. This value is intended to enable discrimination between devices. The relevant circuit breaker can remain closed while the fault is eliminated by the downstream device as long as the energy I2t does not exceed Icw2 (1 s). This value is one of the most characteristic values of a switch.
By convention the value Icw is given for a time t = 1 s. For a different duration t, this should be indicated, for example Icw0.2. It is then necessary to check that the thermal stress I2t, generated until the downstream device breaks, is actually less than Icw2t.
10
Rated short-circuit making capacity Icm (kA peak) This is the maximum current intensity a device can make at its rated voltage according to the conditions of the standard. Devices without a protection function, such as switches, must be able to withstand short-circuit currents with a value and duration resulting from the action of the associated protection device.
Utilization category IEC 60947-2 designates circuit breakers as belonging to one of two categories: - category A for circuit breakers which do not have a time delay before tripping on a short-circuit - category B for circuit breakers which have a time delay. This can be adjusted in order to perform time discrimination for a short-circuit value less than Icw. The value of Icw must be at least equal to the larger of the two values, 12 In or 5 kA, for circuit breakers with a rated current of 2,500 A at most, and 30 kA thereafter.
TECHNICAL PART
Product standards There are two product standards for circuit breakers: standard IEC 60898 and standard IEC 60947.
››› Standard IEC 60898 In practice, this standard is referred to for domestic and residential installations, small commercial installations and all situations where people are unqualified. It applies up to 125 A, 25,000 A breaking capacity and 440 V. Thermal tripping occurs between 1.05 and 1.3 x In. It determines operating ranges B, C and D for the magnetic trip zone.
››› Standard IEC 60947-2 The standard used in industry, this assumes that maintenance workers are qualified. It does not determine the operating range: all characteristics (Ir, Im, t, etc) can be adjusted. For Ir = In, tripping resulting from overloads should occur between 1.13 and 1.45 x In. Products complying with standard IEC 60898 can also be used in industrial installations to the extent that their characteristics allow. Legrand DX circuit breakers comply with the following standards.
››› Standard IEC 61009-1 This applies to circuit breakers with a residual current function.
››› Standard IEC 61008-1 This applies switches with residual current fonction.
11
Protection devices: general (continued) LIMITING In the event of a short-circuit, without any protection, the current flowing through the installation would be the prospective short-circuit current. When a short-circuit current crosses a circuit breaker, this has the capacity, to a greater or lesser extent, to allow only part of this current to flow. The short-circuit is then limited in amplitude and duration. The purpose of limiting is to reduce: - thermal stress - electrodynamic forces - effects of electromagnetic induction In addition, it makes discrimination and association easier. The limiting power of devices is represented in the form of limiting curves.
Prospective short-circuit current limiting
Current limiting curves These give the maximum peak current values (in  peak), limited by the devices according to the value of the prospective short-circuit current. The limited current values are used to determine the size of the busbars and to check the withstand of conductors and devices.
Current limiting curve
Peak Isc (Â)
Limited peak Isc
Un
lim
ite
e dp
ak
Isc
Prospective rms Isc Isc
Prospective Isc at the device terminals
Prospective peak Isc Prospective Isc
Prospective rms Isc Limited peak Isc
Limited Isc
t
12
Device breaking capacity
TECHNICAL PART
Thermal stress limiting curves
Limiting class for modular circuit breakers A2s)
These give the image of the energy (in that the device allows to flow depending on the prospective short-circuit current. They can be used to check the thermal stress withstand of cables protected by the device.
Thermal stress limiting curve
I2t (A2s) Thermal stress curve permitted by the cable
Appendix ZA of standard IEC 60898 defines the thermal stress limiting classes for ratings of 32 A or less. The limiting classes are used to assign hierarchical priority to thermal stress limit capacities. Example for a 6 kA type C circuit breaker from 20 to 32 A: - class 1: unlimited thermal stress - class 2: thermal stress limited to 160,000 A2s maximum - class 3: thermal stress limited to 55,000 A2s maximum All Legrand circuit breakers rated up to 32 A or less are class 3.
Device breaking capacity Icc (A) Thermal trip zone
Magnetic trip zone
13
Protection devices: general (continued) RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES The residual current device continuously measures the difference between the value of the outward current and the value of the return current on the circuit it is protecting. If this difference is other than zero, it means that there is a leak or insulation fault. When this value reaches the level at which the residual current device has been set, the circuit power supply is broken automatically.
COMPOSITION AND OPERATION OF RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES An electromagnetic residual current device consists primarily of a core and a current-sensing relay.
Current-sensing relay The current-sensing relay consists of a magnetised coil which, as long as no fault current is present, holds a vane in the closed position. This vane is fixed on a shaft and is subject to the force from a spring. As long as the coil is not excited by a current, the permanent magnet opposes a force holding the vane which is greater than the force of the spring. If the coil is excited, the induced magnetic flux opposes the permanent magnetisation. The force generated by the spring then drives the movement of the vane which controls the contact opening mechanism.
Magnetic core The magnetic core works like a transformer. The primary measures all the currents on the circuit being monitored, the secondary powers the current-sensing relay. If there is a leakage or fault current, the vectorial sum of the currents is not zero and results in a residual current. Above the preset threshold I∆n, the current-sensing relay controls opening of the main contacts of the associated breaking device (switch or circuit breaker).
RCBO phase + neutral
Currentsensing relay
14
Magnetic core
Residual current principle N
L
2
1
TECHNICAL PART
Operating principle
Without a fault
N
2
With fault present
L
N
1
2
2=1+
L
1
1 2=0
2=
1
1+
2=
d
Id
The value of the outward current (phase) is the same as the value of the return current (neutral). If there is no residual current, no magnetic flux is created in the core. The current-sensing relay coil is not excited. The contacts remain closed. The device works normally.
The value of the outward current (phase) is different from the value of the return current (neutral). The residual current causes magnetic flux in the core, which generates a current that will excite the current-sensing relay.
15
Protection devices: general (continued) RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES (continued) SELECTING RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES The choice of a residual current device depends on the required level of protection (I∆n sensitivity), on the nature of the associated breaking device (circuit breaker or switch) and the specific conditions of use (delayed, discriminating, immune). > Residual current device with overcurrent protection This both breaks the circuit and protects against overcurrents (overloads and short-circuits).
with 4 modules only up to 32 A
for modular circuit breakers
It exists in several forms: - modular monobloc - add-on module for modular device - associable add-on module (mounted on side or underneath) for DPX - residual current relay with separate core
› Side-mounted add-on module Cat. No. 260 36 associated with a DPX 250 ER 16
> Residual current circuit breaker
> Residual current circuit breaker
› Four-pole monobloc RCBOs
› Add-on module
Residual current devices are equipped with a “test” button. This simulates a fault current. A test should be performed once a month.
This is used to break the circuit in the event of a residual current fault but does not provide protection against overcurrents. A protection device, such as a circuit breaker or fuse, must therefore be associated with it, which will also protect the switch (see page 75).
Residual current relays with separate core
These add a residual current function to DPX and DMX-E circuit breakers and switches equipped with trip coils.
• Hpi version (high level of immunity)
There are two types of residual current device:
This is a variant of type A with reinforced immunity to transient phenomena. It is therefore particularly suitable for installations producing electrical interference. Its minimal sensitivity to permanent leakage currents makes it more specifically suitable for installations supplying computers and avoids the need for multiple divisions of circuits. This enables the number of residual current protection devices to be reduced.
Type AC Used for standard applications without DC components present.
TECHNICAL PART
Specific conditions of use
Hpi
Type A Used when the loads distort the signal (the current is not a perfect sine wave or has a DC component); they are recommended for the protection of electronic equipment, computers, or fluorescent lighting devices etc.
The residual current trip thresholds are usually guaranteed for a low temperature down to – 5 °C. For some versions, especially “Hpi”, they are guaranteed down to – 25 °C. A special mark indicates this.
-25
Each type of residual current device can be obtained in: • “Standard” version Tripping is deemed to be instantaneous. • “S” version (discriminating or delayed) Tripping is delayed to enable discrimination with other downstream residual current devices.
Discrimination between residual current devices See page 101
17
DMX-E air circuit breakers
DMX-E circuit breakers and isolating switches provide protection or control at the head of low voltage distribution installations up to 4000 A.
Find the complete offer on page 171
18
The technology of the “air” circuit breaker has improved considerably: in fact breaking does not really take place in the open air anymore, but in sophisticated arcing chambers, and the equipment has become a great deal smaller. At the same time, their specific characteristics (electrical and mechanical strength, breaking capacity, maintainability, optional accessories, etc) have also been developed. The new Legrand DMX-E
TECHNICAL PART
DMX-E AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS units have evolved in line with these general developments. They are used to protect the most powerful installations (up to 4000 A). Their ease of installation and clarity of layout have been particularly carefully studied. All devices in the DMX-E range are mounted behind the same front panel and have same depth and height.
A 4000 A system within your reach DMX-E
INTEGRATION
• Fixed or draw-out • Circuit breaker with MP2G integrated electronic protection unit.
• Clear, easy mounting • All DMX-E have the same front panel, and are the same depth and height.
CONNECTION AND IDENTIFICATION OF AUXILIARIES • • • •
On front panel terminal block 32 connection points available Identification on front panel Accessories attached via front panel for extremely easy installation.
OPTION • MP3 electronic protection unit with advanced functions.
CONTROL AND SIGNALLING AUXILIARIES • Shunt release • Under voltage release • Motor operator
• Closing release • Signalling contacts • Locking options
19
DMX-E air circuit breakers (continued) THE DMX-E RANGE FOR MORE INFORMATION The designation of DMX-E corresponds to its breaking capacity at 415 VA. So the DMX-E55 offers a breaking capacity (Icu at 415 VA) of 55 kA, DMX-E 65, DMX-E 80 & DMX-E 100 a breaking capacity of 65 kA, 80 kA & 100 kA.
One catalogue number = one complete product • All breakers are delivered as standard with: -
MP2G electronic trip unit Auxiliary contacts 4NO+4NC Rear connection Auxiliary terminal block Padlocking shroud for ON and OFF buttons Lifting hooks Panel door seal
• For draw-out, the following features are delivered as standard as well: - Safety shutters - Racking handle - Terminal adaptor
20
See the on-line catalogue: instructions, technical data sheets, etc.
DMX circuit breakers and isolating swiches are available in three sizes of device: - DMX-E 55 & DMX-E 65 up to 1600 A with a breaking capacity of 55 kA & 65 kA - DMX-E 65 (2000 & 2500 A) & DMX-E 80 (All ratings) - DMX-E 65 (3200 & 4000 A) & DMX-E 100 (All ratings). All DMX, both circuit breakers and switches, are available in 3P and 4P arrangement and in fixed and draw-out version. In comparison with the fixed version, the draw-out version has additional locking facilities, optimum safety when work is being carried out on them (padlocking and physical separation of the installation) or on the installation and is easily interchangeable for maintenance purpose (no disconnection to be carried out).
ELECTRONIC TRIP UNITS In addition to the integration capabilities of these circuit breakers, their easy mounting and connection, strength and the maximum continuity of operation they provide, they also have modern protection units which enable very precise setting of protection conditions while maintaining total discrimination with downstream breakers.
t lr Tr ls Ts lp
lg Tg
MP2G electronic protection unit
I
DMX-E circuit breakers are equipped with the MP2G electronic protection unit as standard.
Manual Reset % load indication Overload protection settings (current & time) Short-circuit protection settings (current & time)
Power On indication Fault indications
Instantaneous setting Ground fault protection settings (current & time)
TECHNICAL PART
Protection unit
The settings are adjusted using rotary selector switches: - Overload protection: Ir from 0.4 to 1.0 x In (10 steps) - Overload protection operation time: Tr up to 30 s (10 steps) - Short-circuit protection: Is from 0.6 to 10.0 x In (10 steps) - Short-circuit protection operation time: Ts up to 400 ms (5 steps) - Very high short-circuit Instantaneous protection: Ip from 1.5 to 12.0 x Ir (10 steps) - Neutral protection (0% - 50% - 100%) - Ground fault protection: Ig from 0.2 to 0.6 x Ir with a time delay Tg up to 10 s. This feature can be disabled when not needed.
Thermal reflexivity & neutral protection setting Protection unit testing
Features of MP2G: - Overload, short-circuit and ground fault -
protection with adjustable current and time Very high current protection Neutral protection (0 % - 50 % - 100 %) Switchable thermal reflexivity Segregated fault signals True RMS measurement
21
DMX-E air circuit breakers (continued) DMX-E tripping curve
10 000
0.4
0.8 0.9
0.5
1.0
0.6 0.7
1000
100
30s
30s
Trip Time (s)
0.5s
10 0.2
0.3 0.4 0.5
1.5 0.6
1.0
4.0 6.0
2.0 0.5s
8.0
1
10.0
1.0
9.0 0.4
Ir
0.1
0.1 0.1
Tr
1.5
2.0
5.0
3.0
Ig
4.0
6.0
Is
8.0
10.0 12.0
Ig Ip
0.01 0.05
0.1
1
2.4
Current Multiples (x In)
22
6
10
50
Parameters
Overload
Short-circuit Instantaneous Ground fault
Settings
Ir
Ir = In x …
0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.75 - 0.8 - 0.85 - 0.9 - 0.95 - 1
Tr
Time delay in s at 6 x Ir
0.5 - 1 - 2 - 4 - 6 - 8 - 12 - 18 - 24 - 30
Neutral protection Is
IN = Ir x …
0 % - 50 % - 100 %
Is = In x …
0.6 - 1 - 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 6 - 8 - 9 - 10
Time delay in ms at 10 x In - I2t Off
20 - 100 - 200 - 300 - 400
Ts
Time delay in ms at 10 x In - I2t On
20 - 100 - 200 - 300 - 400
Ip
Ip = Ir x …
1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 - 12 - Max.
Ig
Ig = Ir x …
0.2 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6
Time delay in s - I2t Off
0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 1 - Off
Time delay in s - I2t On
0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.4
Tg
TECHNICAL PART
MP2G characterics
Thermal memory
On/Off
Discrimination with downstream breakers See page 90
DMX-E 2500 A 4P Draw-out version
FOR MORE INFORMATION Other electronic protection units on request
23
DMX-E air circuit breakers (continued) CONTROL ACCESSORIES Closing release
Shunt release
Operation counter
Contact indicating readiness to close
24
Shunt releases
Undervoltage releases
Shunt releases are devices used for the remote instantaneous opening of the device. These devices are available in AC and DC versions, with various supply voltages. They are simply clipped on to the front panel of the device. No tool is required. Nominal voltage: 24, 30, 110, 220, 250 V=, 110, 220, 240, 380, 415 VA 50/60 Hz Maximum power consumption: 650 VA Operating voltage limit: 70% - 110%
Undervoltage releases are devices which are generally controlled by a NC type contact. They trigger instantaneous opening of the circuit breaker if their supply voltage drops below a certain threshold and in particular if the control contact opens. These releases are equipped with an energy saving device for limiting their consumption in spite of continuous supply. They are simply clipped on to the front panel of the device. No tool is required. Nominal voltage: 24, 30, 110, 220, 250 V=, 110, 220, 240, 380, 415 VA 50/60 Hz Maximum power consumption: 650 VA – 0.5 s Operating voltage limit: 85% - 110%
Motor operators
These releases are equipped with an electronic device which delays their operation for 3 seconds. They are designed to be used in unstable supplies, where the supply voltage of the release may be subject to variations or micro-breaks, to avoid unwanted opening of the circuit breaker. They are also equipped with a power saving device for limiting their consumption. They are simply clipped on to the front panel of the device. No tool is required. Nominal voltage: 48, 110 V=, 110, 220, 240, 380, 415 VA 50/60 Hz Maximum power consumption: 650 VA – 0.5 s Operating voltage limit: 85% - 110%
Motor operators, which are available in different voltages, are used for remotely charging the closing springs of the circuit breaker. Combined with an opening release (shunt trip or undervoltage release) and a closing release, they can thus be used for remotely controlling the circuit breaker. They are easy to mount, with three screws. Nominal voltage: 24, 30, 48, 60, 110, 125, 250 V=, 110, 220, 240, 380, 415 VA 50/60 Hz Maximum power consumption: 300 VA Operating voltage limit: 85% - 110%
TECHNICAL PART
Time delayed undervoltage releases
Number of control auxiliaries for DMX-E
Closing releases These coils are used to remotely control the closing of the circuit breaker (the circuit breaker being dependent on the prior loading of the springs). They are controlled by an N/O type contact. They are simply clipped on to the front panel of the device. No tool is required. Nominal voltage: 24, 30, 110, 220, 250 V=, 110, 220, 240, 380, 415 VA 50/60 Hz Maximum power consumption: 650 VA Operating voltage limit: 85% - 110%
Closing release
Shunt release
1
Undervoltage release or delayed undervoltage release
1
Closing release
1
Motor operator 25
DMX-E air circuit breakers (continued) SIGNALLING ACCESSORIES Signalling contacts All DMX-E are equipped as standard with 8 auxiliary contacts (4NO+4NC).
“Ready to Close” contact
A fault signal contact can be added to indicate a fault trip (Cat.No 626317). This contact remains closed until the device is reset. They are simply clipped on to the front panel of the device. No tool is required.
• This switch changes state when:
Shunt release action and undervoltage release action signal contact (Cat.Nos 626315 & 626316) can also be added to provide indication of tripping due to the shunt release or undervoltage release respectively. This contact remains closed until the device is reset. Finally, DMX-E devices can be equipped with a “Ready to close” contact (Cat.No 626318).
Position indicating contacts An additional block of 8 changeover contacts (Cat.No 626311) can be fitted on the draw-out versions to indicate the position of the device in its base (connected / test / isolated).
-
All arc chambers are secured Undervoltage release is energised Closing spring is charged Racking shutter is closed Shunt release is un-energised Breaker or switch is in Off condition
SAFETY AND PADLOCKING ACCESSORIES The DMX-E circuit breakers and switches draw-out types are delivered as standard with safety padlocking shutters preventing access to live terminals. They have a number of other safety devices. - Using padlocks: - ON/OFF buttons - Racking shutter - Access to the protection unit settings - By key-operated lock: - Main contacts open - Isolated position (2 different locks possible) - By cable interlocking, for supply inversion (see next page)
26
The DMX-E devices can be equipped with an operation counter (Cat.No 26324). Its counts the total number of operations (cycles). For draw-out breakers or switches, a misinsertion device can be used to prevent the insertion of a draw-out breaker into an incompatible base.
SUPPLY INVERTERS TECHNICAL PART
MECHANICAL ACCESSORIES
The cable mechanical interlock is used to interlock breakers according to the desired control scheme. It can interlock 2 or 3 devices, which may not be of the same type (3P, 4P, fixed, draw-out, mixed) in a vertical or horizontal configuration. The interlock units are mounted on the right-hand side of the device. See possible mounting arrangement p.28
Fixed to draw-out conversion A fixed breaker can easily be converted into a draw-out breaker. It just requires an empty base and a set of rear terminals.
FOR MORE INFORMATION See the on-line catalogue: instructions, technical data sheets, etc.
Base for draw-out device 27
DMX-E air circuit breakers (continued)
Possible mounting arrangements
Association possible Association impossible
Type of Interlock
Typical circuit
Interlocks possible
G
Schematic diagram Cable length : 2 meters, min. Radius at cable bend : 70 mm
A B
Two Incomers
O O A
B
I O O I
A B C
G
O O O Three Incomers
A
B
I O O
C
O I O O O I
A B C G
Two Incomers One Standby
O O O I O O
A
B
C
O I O I I O O O I
Two Incomers One Bus Coupler
A
C B
A O I O I O I I
O - Breaker Open
28
B O O I O I I O
C O O O I I O I I - Breaker Closed
Correctly sized connections are essential for the reliability of installations and in particular for high power equipment. DMX-E devices and switches have generously sized connection plates. Fixed devices are delivered with fixed rear horizontal connections while draw-out types are delivered
TECHNICAL PART
CONNECTION with adjustable rear terminals (except 2000 and 2500 A). Terminals accept aluminium cables and bars. It is recommended to place the first busbar support at a maximum distance of 100 mm from the back of the breaker.
■ Connection Fixed version 3 P/4 P
Draw-out version rear terminals 3 P/4 P A
Ø 12.9
B
A
Ø 12.9
B Ø 12.9
Ø 12.9 17.5
D
C
15
C
19
65
40
F
38
E
38
D
41
15
17.5
G
Holes (on both sides) for Earthing connections by M10
83.5
16
83.5
F
16
E G
Up to 1600 A Fixed
From 2000 to 2500 A
Draw-out
Fixed
From 3200 to 4000 A
Draw-out
Fixed
Draw-out
3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P
3P
4P 65
A
65
65
65
65
98
98
98
98
65
65
65
B
40
40
27
27
28
28
27
27
40
40
27
27
C
105
105
105
105
105
105
105
105
105
105
105
105
D
122
122
129
129
122
122
129
129
122
122
129
129
E
73.5
73.5
73.5
73.5
90
90
90
90
73.5
73.5
73.5
73.5
F
100
100
100
100
133.3
133.3
133.3
133.3
100
100
100
100
G
347
447
347
447
447
581
447
581
647
847
647
847
Connections: a few recommendations! Connections provide the electrical connection of equipment and are also responsible for a considerable proportion of their heat dissipation. Connections must never be under-sized. Plates or terminals must be used over a maximum area. Heat dissipation is encouraged by arranging the bars vertically. If an uneven number of bars is connected, place the higher number of bars on the upper part of the terminal. Avoid bars running side by side: this causes poor heat dissipation and vibrations. Place spacers between the bars to maintain a distance between them which is at least equivalent to their thickness.
29
DMX-E air circuit breakers (continued) TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
››› DMX-E breakers According to IEC 60947-2 DMX-E 55
Rated current at 40 °C
DMX-E 80
DMX-E 100
800 1600
800 1600
2000 2500
2000 2500
3200 4000
2000 4000
800 1600
800 1600
2000 2500
2000 2500
3200 4000
2000 4000
A
In
Rated insulation voltage
V
Ui
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage
kV
Uimp
12
12
12
12
12
12
Rated operational voltage
V
Ue
690
690
690
690
690
690
55
65
65
80
80
100
50
55
55
70
65
85
42
50
50
55
55
75
100% Icu
100% Icu
100% Icu
100% Icu
100% Icu
100% Icu
55
65
65
80
80
100
Neutral protection
0/50/100% 0/50/100% 0/50/100% 0/50/100% 0/50/100% 0/50/100%
Ultimate breaking capacity
400/415 VA 50/60 Hz
Service breaking capacity
400/415 VA 50/60 Hz
Short time withstand current
0.5 s
50
50
55
65
65
70
3s
23
26
35
35
42
50
Short circuit making capacity
400/415 VA 50/60 Hz
121
143
143
176
176
220
105
121
121
154
154
187
88
105
105
121
121
165
500/550 VA 50/60 Hz
kA
Ics
500/550 VA 50/60 Hz 660/690 VA 50/60 Hz 1s
500/550 VA 50/60 Hz
kA
kA
660/690 VA 50/60 Hz
Opening time
ms
Closing time
ms
Fixed device Dim. Draw-out device
Frame size
Icu
660/690 VA 50/60 Hz
Suitable for isolation
30
DMX-E 65
Icw
Icm
40 60 yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
447
647
647
581
847
847
Width 3P
mm
347
347
447
Width 4P
mm
447
447
581
Depth
mm
335
Height
mm
430
Width 3P
mm
347
347
447
447
647
647
Width 4P
mm
447
447
581
581
847
847
Depth
mm
Height
mm
II
III
III
421 433 I
I
II
TECHNICAL PART
››› DMX-EI isolating switches According IEC 60947-3 DMX-EI
Rated current at 40° C
A
400 1600
2000 2500
3200 4000
In
400 1600
2000 2500
3200 4000
Rated insulation voltage
V
Ui
1000
1000
1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage
kV
Uimp
12
12
12
Rated operational voltage
V
Ue
690
690
690
143
176
220
kA
Icm
121
154
187
105
121
165
143
176
220
121
154
187
105
121
165
yes
yes
yes
Short time withstand current
0,5 s
Short circuit making capacity
400/415 VA 50/60 Hz
1s 3s 500/550 VA 50/60 Hz
kA
660/690 VA 50/60 Hz
Suitable for isolation
Fixed device Dim. Draw-out device
Frame size
Icm
Width 3P
mm
347
447
647
Width 4P
mm
447
581
847
Depth
mm
335
Height
mm
430
Width 3P
mm
347
447
647
Width 4P
mm
447
581
847
Depth
mm
Height
mm
421 433 I
II
III
31
DMX-E air circuit breakers (continued) DIMENSIONS
››› DMX-E up to 1 600 A ■ Dimensions Fixed version 3P
4P
430
7
430
7
A
335
A
A
6
112
347
25
Panel Door
435
A
6
112
447
355
25
355
Draw-out version 3P
4P 7
7 Panel Door 433
433
Panel Door
16 isolated 49.5
A
250 347
25.5 47.5
A
62.4
A Fixing holes suitable for M10
32
Panel Door
250 280 421
35 test
16 isolated
A
25.5 49.5
100
A
250
447
A
47.5 62.4
250 280 421
35 test
TECHNICAL PART
DIMENSIONS
››› DMX-E up to 2 000 to 2 500 A ■ Dimensions Fixed version 3P
4P 7
430
430
7
A
435
A
6
A
112
447
25
Panel Door
569
A
6
112
581
355
25
355
Draw-out version 3P
4P 7
7 Panel Door 433
433
Panel Door
16 isolated
A
25.5 49.5
Panel Door
100
A
250
A
47.5
447
62.4
250 280 421
35 test
16 isolated
A
25.5 49.5
100 581
A
250
A
47.5 62.4
250 280 421
35 test
A Fixing holes suitable for M10
33
DMX-E air circuit breakers (continued) DIMENSIONS
››› DMX-E up to 3 200 to 4 000 A ■ Dimensions Fixed version 3P
4P 7
430
430
7
A
635
A
A
6
112
647
25
Panel Door
835
A
6
847
355
355
Draw-out version 3P
433
433
4P
A
A
49.5
A
100
A
250
47.5
49.5
A
200
7
25.5 A
62.4
250 280 421
7
Panel Door
Panel Door
16 isolated
16 isolated
35 test
A Fixing holes suitable for M10
34
100
847
647
5
112
25.5 A
5 62.4
250 280 421
35 test
A
250
47.5
25
Panel Door
OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 AS+, ASN1, N2
Ref. No.
: : : : : :
LOAD C2
101
U/V Release
Auxiliary Contacts 2NO + 2NC
Closing Release
Shunt Release
Ready to Close
U/V Fault Signal
Shunt trip signal
Common Fault
Electrical Position
Additional Electrical Position Indication
4
3
5
6
7
4m
6m
1m
8e
9
.2
24
.2
44
URM CS2 CT1
201
211
301 CT2 CI1 CI2
411
CS1
401
PI
311
CFM
CMN
SRM
131
121
RTC
111
AX
C2
AX
A2
.4
UR
42
.4 .2
34
AX
32
AX
D2
.4
EC
22
.2
3
14
2 .4
MP2GT / 2.5GT
12
EC2
Auxiliary Contacts 2NO + 2NC
1 AS-
OP4
N2
N1
.1
.3
.1
.3
.2
.1
412
414
402
404
312
314
302
304
212
214
202
204
ISO
TST
132 SER
134
122
124
112
114
102
C1 C 104
C1
A1
43
41
33
31
D1
23
21
.1
13
.3
11
EC1
.1
.3
AS+
OP3
OP2
OP1
N R Y B
Electric Charging Device
Protection& Control Unit
Main Circuit
››› MP2GT / 2.5GT P&C UNIT TECHNICAL PART
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
CR SR SRW
Overload Fault Indication Short-Circuit / Instantaneous Fault Indication Earth Fault Indication Common Terminal Auxiliary Supply External Neutral CT
35
DPX moulded case circuit breakers The DPX range is characterised by its innovative design and excellent performance. DPXs offer optimum solutions for the protection needs of commercial and industrial installations.
Find the complete offer on page 176
36
TECHNICAL PART
THE RANGE Circuit breakers are available in thermal magnetic and electronic versions with nominal currents from 16 to 1600 A and breaking capacities from 16 to 100 kA. The main characteristics of DPX circuit breakers are their optimised dimensions, their ease of installation, use and accessorisation, and their undisputed reliability.
Thermal magnetic DPXs Circuit breakers equipped with thermal magnetic releases are used to set the thermal intervention thresholds for protection against overloads and the magnetic intervention thresholds for protection against short-circuits. The magnetic threshold setting option is available on all devices from the DPX 250 upwards. This threshold is fixed on equipment for DIN rail mounting (DPX 125, DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER). Thermal magnetic DPXs are available from 16 to 1250 A with breaking capacities from 16 to 100 kA.
DPX 125
DPX: non-standard products Legrand make special products on request based on the DPX standard range, in particular: - Circuit-breakers for power distribution companies: designed to the most stringent specifications to ensure that the conditions of use are met - Magnetic-only circuit-breakers - 2-pole circuit-breakers (3-pole case) - Ambient temperature higher or lower than 40°C - Etc
DPX 250 ER with side-mounted add-on earth lockage module
FOR MORE INFORMATION For all other requests, please consult your Legrand sales office
37
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
THE RANGE (continued) Electronic DPXs DPXs equipped with microprocessor-based electronic releases offer the option, depending on the version, of setting precisely both the time and current intervention thresholds for overloads, short-circuits and also for ground faults. Electronic DPXs are available from 40 to 1600 A with breaking capacities from 36 to 100 kA.
Electronic releases are available in 3 versions: - S1: adjustment of Ir and Im - S2: adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im and Tm - Sg: adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im Tm, Ig and Tg
DPX-H 630 - Electronic release Sg
Identification of the type - Yellow DPX-H
Electrical performance and standard references
Characteristics - Cat No. - Breaking capacity - Nominal current (rating) - Standard
Marker holders
Indicator lamps - Green: normal operation - Continuous red: I ≤ 0,9 Ir - Flashing red: I ≥ 1,05 Ir
Adjustment of the neutral (0-0.5-1) Trip indicator lamps
Test socket Test button Setting the releases
38
Sealing of settings
TECHNICAL PART DPX 250 electronic release
DPX 630 electronic release
DPX 1600 electronic 1
Depending on the model, DPX electronic devices provide additional innovative functions. - Thermal memory: in the context of “long delay” protection, the release memorises the image of the temperature rise produced by an overload. This “thermal memory” is refreshed regularly if no other over-load occurs. However, if there are successive overloads, the effects are cumulative and the operating time of the device will be proportionally reduced. Protection of the cable is thus maintained. - Setting the neutral current on the front panel (0%, 50%, 100% of the phase current). - Logical discrimination: a special link between two devices can be used to assign an additional 50 ms delay to the device installed upstream in order to give the downstream device time to break the circuit. - Load-shedding function: when a device is crossed by a current greater than 105% of Ir, it is possible, using the output contacts, to shed the non-priority circuits. The load shedding information is cancelled when the device load returns to less than 85% of Ir. - Signalling the device load via LEDs on the front panel (green: normal ; red continuous: I = 0.9 × Ir ; red flashing: I = 1.05 × Ir). - Connector on front panel for wiring the electronic test device Cat. No. 261 99. - Self-protection if there is a microprocessor problem. - Device for detection of significant earth faults, with adjustment of the current Ig from 0.2 to 1 × In, and the time Tg from 0.1 to 1 second.
39
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
CHARACTERISTICS
Type of case
DPX 125 DPX E 16 kA
Type of MCCB Number of poles Nominal rating (A)
DPX 125 DPX E 16 kA
DPX 25 kA
DPX 160 DPX 36 kA
1P
3P - 3P + 5N - 4P
16-125
16-125
DPX 25 kA
DPX 36 kA
DPX 250 ER DPX 50 kA
3P - 3P + 5N - 4P 63-160
DPX 25 kA
DPX 36 kA
DPX 50 kA
3P - 3P + 5N - 4P
40-60
25-250
Electrical characteristics conforming to CEI 60947-2 Nominal frequency
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Rated operating voltage Ue (V)
230 VA
500 VA - 250 V=
500 VA - 250 V=
500 VA - 250 V=
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
290 VA
500 VA
500 VA
500 VA
6
6
6
6
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) Category of use
A
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu (kA)
16
A
A
A
22
35
40
40
50
65
40
50
65
400 VA
16
25
36
25
36
50
25
36
50
440 VA
10
18
20
20
25
30
20
25
30
480/500 VA
8
12
14
10
12
15
10
12
15
45
230 VA
600 VA 690 VA 16
25
30
25
36
45
25
36
Service breaking capacity Ics (% Icu)
50
100
50
75
100
75
50
100
75
50
Rating closing capacity on short circuit Icm (400 V)
32
32
52.5
75.6
52.5
75.6
105
52.5
75.6
105
250 V=
Rating short-time withstand current Icw (kA) Endurance (o.c. cycle)
mechanical
8500
7000
7000
7000
electrical
8500
1000
1000
1000
•
•
Isolation capability External accessories Earth leakage modules
underneath
•
•
•
side by side
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Remote control Fixed type
•
Plug-in type Draw-out type Rotary handle Supply inverter Dimension and weight Dimensions L x H x D (mm)
Weight (kg)
40
1-pole
25x120x74
3-pole
75.6 x 120 x 74
90 x 150 x74
90 x 76 x 74
4-pole
101 x 120 x 74
120 x 150 x 74
120 x 176 x 74
3-pole
1
1.2
1.6
4-pole
1.2
1.6
2.1
DPX H
DPX 250
DPX L
DPX 36 kA
DPX H
DPX 630 ELEC. DPX L
3P - 4P
3P - 3P + 5N - 4P
40-250
40-250
DPX 36 kA
DPX H
DPX 630
DPX L
3P - 4P 200-630
DPX 50 kA
DPX H
DPX 1250 DPX L
DPX 50 kA
3P - 3P + 5N - 4P
400-630
200-630
320-630
DPX H
DPX 1600 ELEC. DPX L
DPX
DPX H
3P - 4P
3P - 4P
800-1250
800-1600
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
690 VA
690 VA - 250 V=
690 VA
690 VA - 250 V=
690 VA - 250 V=
690 VA
690 VA
690 VA
690 VA
690 VA
690 VA
8
8
8
8
8
A
A
A (160-400 A) - B (630 A)
A
B
60
100
170
60
100
170
60
100
170
60
100
170
80
100
170
80
100
36
70
100
36
70
100
36
70
100
36
70
100
50
70
100
50
70
30
60
70
30
60
70
30
60
70
30
60
70
45
65
80
45
65
25
40
45
25
40
45
25
40
45
25
40
45
35
45
55
35
45
20
25
28
20
25
28
20
25
28
20
25
28
25
35
40
25
35
16
20
22
16
20
22
16
20
22
16
20
22
25
25
30
20
25
36
40
40
36
40
40
50
50
50
100
75
50
100
75
50
100
75
50
100
75
50
100
75
50
100
75
75.6
154
220
75.6
154
220
75.6
154
220
75.6
154
220
105
154
220
105
154
3
15 ≤ 1250 < 20
5
7000
7000
4000
1000
1000
1000
TECHNICAL PART
DPX 250 ELEC. DPX 36 kA
4000 •
• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
105 x 200 x 105
105 x 200 x 105
140 x 260 x 105
140 x 260 x 105
210 x 320 x 140
210 x 320 x 140
140 x 200 x 105
140 x 200 x 105
183 x 260 x 105
140 x 260 x 105
280 x 320 x 140
280 x 320 x 140
2.5
2.5
5.3 ≤ 400 < 5.8
5.5
18
18
3.7
3.7
6.8 ≤ 400 < 7.4
6.4
23.4
23.4
41
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
TRIPPING CURVES Tripping curve for a DPX thermal-magnetic trip
Tripping curve for a DPX electronic trip adjustable Ir, Im, Tr and Tm (S2)
10 000
10000
t (s)
t (s) Thermal realease zone when cold
1 000
Tr = 30 s 20 % 1000
Tr = 20 s 20 % Tr = 10 s 20 %
100
Tr = 5 s 20 %
100
10
Thermal realease zone when hot (in steady state)
10
I2t = K
1
1
Im
Adjustable magnetic realease zone
In: 1 600 A In: 1 250 A
0.1
Im
0.1
In: 630 A
Tm 0.01 0.01
0.001
1
2
3 4 5
10
20
30
50
I/Ir
100
0.001
If
0.2
1
2
3 4 5
I/Ir
I: actual current Ir: thermal overload protection (Ir setting = x In) Im: magnetic protection against short-circuits: (Im setting = x In) Since the curve abscissa expresses the I/Ir ratio, modifying the Ir setting does not change the graphic representation of thermal tripping. Conversely, the magnetic setting can be read directly (3.5 to 10 in this example).
42
10
5
7 10
30
70
I/In
I: actual current Ir: long delay protection against overloads (adjustable: Ir = x In, 0.4 to 1 x In) Tr: long delay protection operation time (adjustment: 5 to 30 s), values given at 6 x Ir Im: short delay protection against short-circuits (adjustable: Im = x Ir, 1.5 to 10 x Ir in the example) Tm: short delay protection operation time (adjustable: 0 to 0.3 s) I2t constant (adjustment via Tm) see discrimination chapter p. 90 If: fixed threshold instantaneous protection (5 to 20 kA depending on the model)
TECHNICAL PART
››› Example of reading and adjusting a tripping curve Rated current Ib = 500 A Ik3 max = 25 kA at the circuit breaker point of installation —> Electronic DPX 630, rating 630 A (Cat. No. 256 03/07) —> Long delay adjustment (overloads) Ir = 0.8 x In, ie. Ir = 504 A
10 000 t (s) 1 000
100
10
1
In: 630 A In: 400 A In: 250 A
0,1
In: 160 A 0,01
If
0.001 0.2
1
2
3 4 5 I/Ir
10
5
7 10 30 I/In
70
Scenario 1: high Ik min. end of line
Scenario 2: low Ik min. end of line
Ik minimum (at end of line) = 20 kA —> short delay adjustment (short-circuit) to its maximum value ie. Im = 10 × Ir, ie. Im = 5040 A Reading the curves: If I < 504 A —> no tripping If 504 < I < 5 kA —> tripping between 1 and 200 s (long delay protection) If I > 5 kA —> tripping in 0.01 s (instantaneous protection at fixed threshold)
Ik minimum (at end of line) = 4 kA —> short delay adjustment (short-circuit) Im = 5 × Ir, ie. 2520 A Reading the curves: If I < 504 A —> no tripping If 504 < I < 2520 A —> tripping between 10 and 200 s (long delay protection) If 2520 A < I < 5 kA —> tripping < 0.1 s (short delay protection) If I > 5 kA —> tripping 0.01 s —> (instantaneous protection at fixed threshold)
43
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
CONNECTION ACCESSORIES
Connecting the DPX
Connection
Version
DPX 125
DPX 160
Front terminals Cage terminals
Mounted
Mounted
DPX 250 ER
DPX 250
DPX 630
DPX 1250/1600
Mounted
Mounted
Mounted
Mounted
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
High capacity cage terminals Front terminals extended Fixed
Spreaders Threaded rear terminals
•
•
•
Flat rear terminals Short flat rear terminals
•
Long flat rear terminals
Plug-in
Draw-out
•
Front terminals
•
•
•
•
•
Threaded rear terminals
•
•
•
•
•
Flat rear terminals
•
•
Front terminals
•
•
•
Threaded rear terminals
•
•
•
Reversible supply All DPXs can be supplied by either the upper or lower terminals without any derating of their performance.
44
Connection terminals and accessories
Terminal shields
TECHNICAL PART
Mounting, control and connection accessories
Spreaders
Remote control
Rotary handle
Base for plug-in version and “débro-lift” mechanism for draw-out version
Rear terminals
Flat rear terminals
Earth leakage modules 45
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES Current shunt trip
Auxiliary contacts and alarm contacts
Used to open the device remotely. It is always connected in series with an NO control type contact.
These can be used to transfer remotely information about the circuit breaker status. Auxiliary contacts indicate whether the device is open or closed, whereas alarm contacts indicate that the device is in the “tripped” position following intervention by the protection unit, a shunt trip, an undervoltage release, by the residual current device or following unplugging.
Undervoltage release With or without a time delay, this causes the device to open during a significant reduction in or absence of control voltage. Undervoltage releases can be equipped with a time-lag module to avoid false tripping of the device when the release power supply voltage is not stable. The releases are mounted to the left of the control switch handle under the device cover.
These contacts are mounted on the right of the control switch handle under the device cover. Electrical auxiliaries are mounted on the front panel of the device, in reserved insulated compartments, without affecting the internal mechanism. The cables exit either via the device side or rear opening. For plug-in and draw-out versions, the auxiliaries are connected on special connectors (Cat. No. 098 19/6 contacts and 263 99/8 contacts).
Electrical controls Used to control circuit breaker making and breaking remotely. They are installed on the side of DIN rail mounting devices or on the front for the rest of the DPX range. Electrical controls can be equipped with locking devices.
46
TECHNICAL PART
Mounting auxiliaries on DPX
Auxiliary contact or fault signal
Trips
Maximum number of auxiliaries per DPX Device
Auxiliary contact
Fault signal
Trip
DPX 125
1
1
1
DPX 160
1
1
1
DPX 250 ER
1
1
1
DPX 250
2
1
1
DPX 630
2
2
1
DPX 1600
3
1
1
47
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
PLUG-IN AND DRAW-OUT VERSIONS With the advantage of both plug-in and draw-out versions, DPXs - notwithstanding their ability to “make safe” installations and devices - represent a significant development in the actual functions of this type of device.
DPX250 plug-in version, mounted on its base with rear terminals
DPX 1600 draw-out
DPX mounting versions
48
+ Downstr. RCD
On its own
+ Downstr. RCD
On its own
+ Downstr. RCD
On its own
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Front terminals
•
•
•
•
•
Rear terminals
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rear terminals
•
Front terminals
•
Rear terminals
•
+ Side RCD
•
•
Front terminals
On its own
•
•
+ Side RCD
+ Side RCD
DPX 1250 1600
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
+ Downstr. RCD
DPX 630
On its own
Draw-out
DPX 250
•
On its own Plug-in
DPX 250 ER
•
•
On rail Fixed
DPX 160 + Downstr. RCD
DPX 125
Mounting
Plug-in versions
MCCB
Tulip contacts
Plug-in devices can, in simple situations, be used for isolation and making safe, but they are primarily used for their interchangeability, which makes maintenance much easier. They are sometimes designated by the letter D as “Disconnectable parts”.
TECHNICAL PART
Plug-in (or disconnectable) devices can be inserted or removed without powering down the relevant circuit. Connection and disconnection are only possible when the device is open; otherwise, disconnection causes mechanical breaking of the device.
Mounting base
DPX 250 ER
DPX 250
DPX 630
49
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
PLUG-IN AND DRAW-OUT VERSIONS (continued) Draw-out versions Draw-out devices which in addition to the advantages of plug-in devices (interchangeability and visible break isolation) can be used, due to the associated “debro-lift“ mechanism, to control connection and disconnection, to enable tests and measurements on the auxiliairy circuits while isolating the main circuits, to display the status of these circuits, and finally by means of different systems (padlocks, locks, etc) to lock the device for padlocking operations. Draw-out devices can be designated by the letter W as “Withdrawable parts”.
MCCB
DPX 630
DPX 1600
50
Tulip contacts
Mounting base + “débro-lift”
“Debro-lift” mechanism Very simple to install (two screws), the “debro-lift” mechanism is fixed on the support bases common to the devices. The connection/disconnection operation is then performed mechanically by a crank mechanism. The mechanism determines three positions identified by different coloured indicators: • “connected”, main circuits and auxiliary circuits connected, red indicator • “test”, main circuits isolated and auxiliary circuits connected, yellow indicator • “drawn-out”, main circuits and auxiliary circuits isolated, green indicator
Base and “debro-lift” mechanism for DPX 630
Indicator signalling the different positions of the mechanism
TECHNICAL PART
CONNECTION CAPACITIES Numerous accessories are available to meet all the various connection requirements. In addition to direct connection on a plate, they include terminals, distribution terminals, connection extension rods, spreader strips, rear terminals with screws or flat connectors, etc. The tables below give the connection capacities for the various accessories selected.
DPX 125 Maximum capacities for each pole Connection
Busbars
Conductors
Copper terminals standard
Mode
Cage terminals (included with DPX)
rigid
flexible
12
70
70
6 x 35
6 x 25
048 67 Distribution terminal 263 00/01 Rear terminals with screws
Cross-section (mm2)
Width (mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
compact
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
Aluminium terminals standard
compact
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
95-8
15
120-8
DPX 160 Maximum capacities for each pole Connection
Busbars
Conductors
Copper terminals standard
Mode
Width (mm)
Direct on plate
18
262 18 Cage terminal
13
262 17 Connection extension rod
rigid
95
flexible
048 67 Distribution terminal
18
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
Aluminium terminals standard
compact
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
50-6
50-8
70-10
185-10
70
20
262 19 Large-capacity terminal
263 00/01 Rear terminals with screws
Cross-section (mm2)
compact
120
95
6 x 35
6 x 25
120-8
185-10
120-10
51
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued) CONNECTION CAPACITIES (continued) DPX 250 ER Maximum capacities for each pole Connection
Busbars
Conductors
Copper terminals
Aluminium terminals
standard
compact
standard
compact
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
Cross-section (mm2)
Mode
Width (mm)
rigid
flexible
20
120-10
70-8
Direct on plate
18
185
150
262 88 Cage terminal
32
185-12
300-10
240-12
300-10
25
120-10
185-10
150-12
185-10
262 90/91 Spreaders
262 31 Adaptors
185-12
240-12
265 10/11 Rear terminals with screws
95-8
185-10
Plug-in version Front terminals
Rear terminals with screws Draw-out version Rear terminals
52
95-12
185-10
TECHNICAL PART
DPX 250 Maximum capacities for each pole Connection
Busbars
Conductors
Aluminium terminals
Copper terminals
standard
compact
standard
compact
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
95-8
185-10
32
185-12
300-10
240-12
300-10
Ig 25
120-10
185-10
150-12
185-10
25
150-12
300-10
240-12
300-10
263 31/32 Rear terminals with screws
25
185-12
265 57/28 Rear terminals with flat connectors
25
95-10
185-10
150-12
185-10
Plug-in version Front terminals
20
95-10
185-10
95-12
185-10
20
2 x 95-8
2 x 185-10
Cross-section (mm2)
Mode
Direct on plate
262 35 Cage terminal
Width (mm)
rigid
flexible
25
18
185
185-10
150
262 33/34 Spreaders
262 31 Adaptors
262 32 Connection extension rod
240-12
2 x 185-10
XL-Part base Plug-in version
Plug-in and draw-out version Rear terminals
Supplied with rear terminals with screws
53
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued) CONNECTION CAPACITIES (continued) DPX 630 Maximum capacities for each pole Connection
Busbars
Conductors
Copper terminals
Aluminium terminals
standard
compact
standard
compact
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
150-12
300-10
240-12
300-10
50
2 x 185-12
2 x 300-10
2 x 240-16
2 x 300-10
32
2 x 150-12
2 x 300-10
2 x 240-12
2 x 300-10
262 47 Connection extension rod
32
2 x 150-12
2 x 300-10
2 x 240-12
2 x 300-10
263 50/51 Rear terminals with screws
32
2 x 300-16
263 52/53 Rear terminals with flat connectors
40
2 x 185-12
2 x 300-10
2 x 240-12
2 x 300-10
Plug-in or draw-out version Front terminals
25
150-12
300-10
240-12
300-10
25
1 x 150-12
2 x 300-10
2 x 240-12
2 x 300-10
Cross-section (mm2)
Mode
Width (mm)
rigid
flexible
32 Direct on plate
262 50 Cage terminal
25
262 51 Terminal for 2 conductors
300
240
2 x 240
2 x 185
262 48/49 Spreaders 262 46 Adaptors 400A
2 x 300-16
XL-Part base Plug-in version
Plug-in or draw-out version Rear terminals
54
Supplied with rear terminals with flat connectors or screws
TECHNICAL PART
DPX 1600 Maximum capacities for each pole Connection
Busbars
Conductors
Copper terminals
Aluminium terminals
standard
compact
standard
compact
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
Cross-section (mm2)
Mode
Direct on plate
Width (mm)
300-14
300-16
80
4 x 300-14
4 x 300-16
4 x 300-14
50
2 x 300-14
2 x 300-16
2 x 300-14
50
2 x 300-14
2 x 300-16
2 x 300-14
50
3 x 300-14
3 x 300-16
3 x 300-14
50
4 x 120-12 2 x 300-14
2 x 300-14
4 x 150-10
50
2 x 185-12
262 70 Terminal for 4 conductors
262 67 ( 1250 A) 262 68 Connection extension rod
263 80/82 Short rear terminals
263 81/83 Long rear terminals
flexible
50
262 69 Terminal for 2 conductors
262 73/74 Spreaders
rigid
2 x 240
2 x 185
4 x 240
4 x 185
4 x 185-10
Draw-out version Front terminals
2 x 240-12
Draw-out version Rear terminals
55
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
SUPPLY INVERTERS Supply inverters can be created with DPX 160, DPX 250, DPX 630 and DPX 1600 devices, using breakers or switches in fixed or draw-out versions, available in 3 different versions: - Manual: the mounting plate, equipped with a mechanical interlock device, prevents the simultaneous closing of the two devices it supports. A device can only close if the other device is open. - Remote control: the devices are equipped with motor-driven control and their operation can therefore be controlled remotely. - Automatic: an electronic control unit (230 VA or 24 V=) drives the inverter.
56
Trip-free switches are circuit-breakers without protection release. Their size and overall dimensions are the same and they can be equipped with all internal and external accessories and all remote control devices. The DPX-I can be opened via shunt releases or undervoltage releases and can be fitted with earth leakage modules. These devices conform to standard IEC 60947-3, category of use AC 23 A
The same devices and the same accessories as for circuit-breakers
DPX-I 125
DPX-I 160
DPX-I 250 ER
DPX-I 250
DPX-I 630
DPX-I 1 600
50/60 Hz
500
500
500
690
690
690
dc
250
250
250
250
250
250
500
500
500
690
690
690
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
6
6
6
8
8
8
Rated closing capacity on short-circuit Icm (kA)
3
3.6
4.3
4.3
13
40
1,7
2,1
3
3
7,6
20
mechanical
8 500
7 000
7 000
7 000
4 000
2 500
electrical
1 500
1 000
1000
1 000
1 000
500
125
160
250
250
630
1600
125 (500 V)
160 (500 V)
250 (500 V)
250
630
1600
125
160
250
250
630
-
Rated operating voltage Ue (V) Rated insulation voltage Ui (V
TECHNICAL PART
SWITCH VERSIONS
±)
Short-time resistive current Icw (kA) Endurance (o.c cycle)
400 V
t=1s
Conventional thermal current (A)
±) DC 23 A (250 V±) AC 23 A (690 V
Other switch ranges See Isolation chapter p.131
57
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
RESIDUAL CURRENT VERSIONS All DPX circuit-breakers up to 630 A can be fitted with earth leakage modules without modifying their technical characteristics and with the same options for accessories.
Mounting There are two versions of the earth leakage module up to 250 ER with the same technical characteristics but a different method of mounting: - mounted side by side - mounted underneath They are available in 5 ratings depending on the rating of the circuit-breaker: - 63 A for the DPX 125 from 16 to 63 A - 125 A for the DPX 125 from 100 to 125 A - 160 A for the DPX 250 ER - 250 A for the DPX 250 ER - 250 A for the DPX 250 - 400 A for the DPX 630 - 630 A for the DPX 630 Installation of earth leakage modules is a purely mechanical task and neither device needs to be dismantled. If earth leakage modules are mounted on the underneath, the electrical connection is direct. If they are mounted side by side, the conductors have to be connected.
Residual current relays with separate core These add a residual current function to DPX and DMX-E circuit breakers and switches equipped with trip coils.
58
General characteristics - Earth leakage module with electronic release - Type A - Time delay and sensitivity can be adjusted: - I∆n = 30 mA - 300 mA - 1 A - 3 A - t = instantaneous - 0.3 s - 1 s - 3 s - If the sensitivity is set to 30 mA, the time delay is automatically cancelled.
Electronic modules power supply N
L1 L2 L3
reset
isolator switch
electronics
N
L1 L2 L3
test
use This earth leakage module is adjustable - in sensitivity: 0 - 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A - in time delay: 0 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s. The power supply is taken directly between the three phases, only two of which are necessary to ensure operation of the release
Description of residual current devices See chapter p.14
Underneath
Side by side
Underneath
Side by side
Underneath
125
125
250 ER
250 ER
250
up to 630
electronic
electronic
electronic
electronic
electronic
electronic
63-125
63-125
160-250
160-250
160-250
400 and 630
3-4
4
3-4
4
4-3
4-3
width
101
101
120
120
140
183
depth
74
74
74
74
105
105
height
120
90
150
108
108
152
500
500
500
500
500
500
230-500
230-500
230-500
230-500
230-500
230-500
0.03-0.3-1-3
0.03-0.3-1-3
0.03-0.3-1-3
0.03-0.3-1-3
0.03-0.3-1-3
0.03-0.3-1-3
0- 0.3-1-3
0- 0.3-1-3
0- 0.3-1-3
0- 0.3-1-3
0- 0.3-1-3
0- 0.3-1-3
Operation in presence of DC components
•
•
•
•
•
•
DIN rail mounting
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Type Release Nominal current In (A) Number of poles
Dimensions (mm)
Nominal voltage Ue V± (50-60 Hz) Operating voltage V± (50-60 Hz) Residual current I∆n (A) Time delay threshold ∆t(s)
fixed, front terminals
•
TECHNICAL PART
Side by side
Mounted
• •
•
Versions fixed, rear terminals Cable terminals
supplied with DPX
• •
•
on request
•
For 3-pole and 4-pole DPX › DPX 630, use RCD kits
59
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS High temperatures A circuit breaker is set to operate at In at an ambient temperature of 40 °C for DPX circuit breakers (standard IEC 60947-2) When the ambient temperature inside the enclosure where the DPX units are installed is higher than this value, the rated current should be reduced in order to avoid false tripping. The minimum value of the rated current corresponds to the minimum setting of the Ir/In trip unit (0.7 for DPX 125 - 0.64 for DPX 160 - 0.8 for DPX 400 - 0.4 for DPX 630 - 0.4 for DPX 1600). Plug-in and draw-out versions: Apply a reduction coefficient of 0.85 to the maximum found value of the rated current. Version with earth leakage module: Apply a reduction coefficient of 0.9 to the maximum found value of the rated current. Apply a coefficient of 0.7 if the two versions are simultaneous. For DPXs rated at temperatures other than 40 °C, please contact your local sales office.
Rated current for DPXs depending on the thermal setting (Ir) as a function of the temperature in the enclosure Thermal magnetic MCCB
DPX 125
DPX 160
DPX 250 ER
DPX 250
DPX 630
DPX 1600
40°C
50°C
60°C
70°C
Ir min. Ir max. Ir min. Ir max. Ir min. Ir max. Ir min. Ir max.
25 A
17
25
16
24
16
23
15
22
40 A
28
40
27
38
26
37
25
36 55
63 A
44
63
42
60
40
58
38
100 A
70
100
67
96
64
92
61
88
125 A
87
125
84
120
80
115
76
110
25 A
16
25
14
23
13
20
12
18
40 A
25
40
23
36
20
32
18
28
63 A
40
63
36
57
32
50
28
43
100 A
63
100
58
91
52
82
48
73
160 A
100
160
93
145
83
130
73
115
100 A
64
100
58
91
52
82
47
73
160 A
102
160
93
145
83
130
74
115
250 A
160
250
147
230
134
210
122
190
100 A
63
100
58
91
52
82
48
73
160 A
100
160
93
145
83
130
73
115
250 A
160
250
147
230
130
210
115
190
400 A
160
400
160
400
150
380
500 A
400
500
380
480
360
450
340
420
630 A
250
630
240
599
227
567
800 A
630
800
600
760
570
720
540
680
1000 A
800
1000
760
950
720
900
680
850
1250 A
1000
1250
950
1190
900
1125
850
1080
Electronic MCCB
Rated current
40°C
DPX 250
250 A
250
250
238
400 A
400
400
380
630 A
630
600
567
800 A
800
760
760
1250 A
1250
1188
1125
1600 A
1600
1520
1440
DPX 630
DPX 1600
60
Rated current
50°C
60°C
400 Hz power supply
For DPXs, the correction factors given in the table opposite are to be applied when adjusting the thermal and the magnetic.
Device type
DPX 125
DPX 160
DPX 250 ER
DPX 250
DC power supply DPX 630
Thermal-magnetic DPXs can also be used up to an operating voltage of 500 VDC (three poles in series). Their magnetic thresholds are then increased by 50% (see table below)
DPX 1600
Nominal rating
Thermal setting
Magnetic setting
Correction factor
In at 400 Hz
Correction factor
Im at 400 Hz
16 A
1
16
2
1000
25 A
1
25
2
1250
40 A
1
40
2
1800
63 A
0.95
60
2
1900
100 A
0.9
90
2
2500
125 A
0.9
112
2
2500
16 A
1
25
2
800
40 A
1
40
2
800
63 A
0.95
60
2
1250
100 A
0.95
95
2
2000
160 A
0,9
145
2
3200
100 A
0.95
95
2
2000
160 A
0.9
145
2
3200
250 A
0.85
210
2
5000
40 A
1
40
2
280 to 800
63 A
0.95
60
2
440 to 1250
100 A
0.95
95
2
700 to 2000
160 A
0.9
145
2
1120 to 3200
250 A
0.85
210
2
1800 to 5000
400 A
0.8
320
1
2000 to 4000
630 A
0.6
380
1
3200 to 6300
800 A
0.6
480
1
4000 to 8000
1250 A
0.6
750
1
3800 to 7500
Breaking capacity Icu (kA)
TECHNICAL PART
Correction factors to be applied when setting thermalmagnetic trip DPXs, for use at 400 Hz
The stated characteristics for the devices assume a frequency of 50/60 Hz. They should be corrected for use at 400 Hz.
Protection thresholds
Rated current
2 poles in series 110 -125 V
2 poles in series 250 V
3 poles in series 500 V
Thermal
Magnetic
DPX 125-E
16-125 A
20
16
16
100%
150%
DPX 125 (25 kA)
16-125 A
30
25
25
100%
150%
DPX 125 (36 kA)
16-125 A
36
30
30
100%
150%
DPX 250 ER
25-250 A
30
25
25
100%
150%
DPX 250 ER (36 kA)
25-250 A
40
36
36
100%
150%
DPX 250 ER (50 kA)
25-250 A
50
36
36
100%
150%
DPX 250
25-250 A
40
36
36
100%
150%
DPX 250-H
25-250 A
45
90
40
100%
150%
DPX 250-L
25-250 A
50
45
45
100%
150%
DPX 630
250-630 A
40
36
36
100%
150%
DPX 630-H
250-630 A
45
40
40
100%
150%
DPX 630-L
250-630 A
50
45
45
100%
150%
61
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
DIMENSIONS
››› DPX 125 ■ Dimensions Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage module mounted side by side
Fixed version, front terminals
101
97 8 74
50.8
45
10
32.25
193
193 45
M4
25.4
25.4
8
32
210
45
120
101
45
8
37.8
12
101
12
120
97 74
101
75.6
25.4
Fixed version, rear terminals with earth leakage module mounted side by side
Fixed version, rear terminals
8
97 74
101
25.4
25.4
32.25
25.4
45
25.4
191
210
25.4
39
10
81
M8 M4
25.4
25.4
25.4
81
M8
10
39
M4
62
8
45
101
97 74
45
101
101
45
120
75.6
Ø 4.3 or M4
TECHNICAL PART
Terminal shields
Direct rotary handle on DPX
260
Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage module mounted underneath(1)
80
11.2
103
12.7
M4
20
DPX 125 + earth leakage module mounted side by side
40.2
170
80
A
A DPX 125
48
74
8
20
60
75.5 25.4
Vari-depth handle on door 35
75.5
10
45
103
120
12.7 12.7 113.7
2/4
74
80
37.8
101 25.4
282 max. 72 min.
11.25
101
74
8
25.4
97
103 62.75
202
M4
8
(1) Dimensions of 3-pole earth leakage modules are the same as 4-pole earth leakage modules
63
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
DIMENSIONS (continued)
››› DPX 160 ■ Dimensions Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage module mounted side by side
Fixed version, front terminals 97 74
120
90
45
120 30
8
23
97
8
30
45
23
14
Fixed version, rear terminals 90
M4
30 30 45
23 74
8
Fixed version, rear terminals with earth leakage module mounted side by side
97
120
115
18 max.
247
265
M4 30
150
45
45
150
45
150
9
8
150 48
95
115
45
161
55.5
265 247
8
241
74
30 30 30
158
30 30
55
X
45
45
45
150
Y
30 30 30
74
120
97
45
8
M4
64
48
95
M10
8
Direct rotary handle on DPX M4 8
30 240 120
120 30 ==
8
38.5
80
1.5 max.
45
15 75.5
60
=
132 86
95 150
X
60 48 35
97 74 8
=
M4
74
115 11.25
Y
TECHNICAL PART
Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage module mounted underneath(1)
30
45 15
135 Y
Vari-depth handle on door
M4 8
74
282 max. 72 min.
35 2/4
A
38.5
80
30
115 11.25
Terminal shields
A DPX 160
278
DPX 160 + earth leakage module mounted side by side
393
15 75.5
(1) Dimensions of 3-pole earth leakage modules are the same as 4-pole earth leakage modules
65
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
DIMENSIONS (continued)
››› DPX 250 ER ■ Dimensions Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage module mounted underneath
Fixed version, front terminals
160 A Y
240
120 30 ==
120
95
M4
Ø max. 18
30 30 30 45
176 X 1.6 18
74
11.5 60
53.5
38.5
45
145 115
176
20 max.
18
69
90
10 max.
8
120 30 30 30
97
30
45 15
135 Y
250 A 270 150
15 30
115 38.5 20 max. 30 30
30 45
66
30
30
176
30
215.5
30
145
30
69
30
53.5
30
10 max.
8 18
Direct rotary handle on DPX and vari-depth handle on door
Ø 18 max.
282 max. 72 min. 30
11.5
45
8
74
35 2/4
60 48
115
38.5
45 62.7
1.6 74 97
80
M4 45 45
10 max.
52.8 67.8 83.3
18
8
35
62.7
M4 267 298
91.5 107.7
237
30 30 30 20 max. 45
M4
11.25
120 30 30 30
TECHNICAL PART
Fixed version with earth leakage module mounted side by side Front terminals Rear terminals
15
1.5 max.
75.5
11.5
74 97
Terminal shields
M4
A 115 76.5
97 74
A DPX 250 ER
296
DPX 250 ER + earth leakage module
418
67
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
DIMENSIONS (continued)
››› DPX 250 ■ Dimensions
Plug-in version, front terminals
Fixed version, front terminals 140 70 17.5
•
36
32.5
4 min.
4
4 min.
52.5
25 35 35
90 66.5
200
245.5
94
10
M5
341.5
170
173.5
94
200
186.5
20
11
17
140
105
105
33
105 100 35
27
35 35 35
138.5
Ø9
Fixed version with earth leakage module mounted side by side(1) Front terminals Rear terminals 138.5 105
140 24 52.5
138.5 105
36
153
Plug-in version, rear terminals 105 100 35
186.5 153 4 min.
140
66.5
90
173.5
94 173.5
200
281.5 10
308
278
94
100
35 35 35
4 min.
10
11
35 35
35
17.5 70
68
M5
27
35 35
52.5 35 35 35
153
TECHNICAL PART
Terminal shields
Draw-out version, front terminals 140 (4 P)
187 34
45.5 32.5
105 (3 P) 5
20
52.35 34
34
A
192.75
124.5
144.75
DPX 250 + earth leakage module mounted side by side
438
313
353.5
X 449.5
66.5 90 94
330
Direct rotary handle on DPX and vari-depth handle on door
24.75
155
99.5
A DPX 250
Ø9
40
100
265 max. 93 min. 58
71.5
35
35
50
35
25
2.5 max.
34
2/4
Y
94
Draw-out version, rear terminals Rear terminal with threaded rod 35
187
173.5
108.75
90
66.5 94
M12
35
35 35 M12 47.5
93.5
24.75
35
93.5 47.5
34 45.5
155 99.5
34
Flat rear terminals 187
35 19
34 45.5
10
37
81 26 173.5
35 35 19 26
35 Ø9 10
81
108.75
90
66.5 94
24.75
155 99.5
Ø9
35
37
34
69
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
DIMENSIONS (continued)
››› DPX 630 ■ Dimensions Plug-in version, front terminals
Fixed version, front terminals 183
140 32
70
153 29
183 70
130
94
220
94 302
100
X
M5
87 43.5
43.5
100 398
94
260
94
220
43.5 43.5
15 max.
100
100
43.5
140 32
4 min.
50
17
70
15 max.
32
144 105
27
43.5
4 min. Ø 14
Fixed version with earth leakage module mounted side by side Front terminals Rear terminals 144 105
183 70 21.75
32
4 min.
17 50
43.5 43.5
192
43.5 43.5 43.5
Plug-in version, rear terminals 144 105
4 min. 140
192 153
183 70
100
130
94
100 94 220
265
372
372
412
94
100
X
4 min. 87 43.5
70
43.5
43.5
Ø 6 or M5
27
34
183
5
130
TECHNICAL PART
Draw-out version, front terminals
Terminal shields 45.5
34
29 34
390
DPX 630 + earth leakage module mounted side by side
542
X
24.7
94 155
130
265
398
302
265
A
A DPX 630
14 43.5
43.5
43.5
Direct rotary handle on DPX and vari-depth handle on door
187
Y
Draw-out version, rear terminals
265 max. 93 min. 100 50
Rear terminal with threaded rod 34 34 43.5
43.5
94
43.5
2.5 max.
2/4
24.7
94
155 103 58
130
M 16 220
58
47
45.5
40
71.5
187
Flat rear terminal
43.5
43.5
29
15
8
187
24.7
59
94
155 124
34 34
130
220
45.5
71
DPX moulded case circuit breakers (continued)
DIMENSIONS (continued)
››› DPX 1250 - 1600 ■ Dimensions Fixed version, front terminals Y
70
20
158 94
X
320
280
149
100
70
169
25
25 max.
280 70
70
298 278
70
215 29 8 13 min.
Y
210
X
M12 M10
70 50
M8
35
5
140
Y
140
Fixed version, rear terminals Y
Vertical
280 (4 P)
Horizontal
210 (3 P)
163
12.5
32
13 105
140
12.5 98
140
56
94
145.5 273
68
M8
X
40
118
273
X
320
94
100
145.5
169
90 40
12
23
238
Y 13
72
6 2.5 max.
3
14 32
6 2.5 max.
3 188
238
364
256
325
Terminal shields 34.5
480
325 360
299
TECHNICAL PART
Draw-out version, rear terminals
70
70
70
218.5
70
253
70
Direct rotary handle on DPX
49
125 62.5
67.5
265 max. 93 min.
81
125 66.5
125 66.5
125 62.5
Vari-depth handle on door
2.5 max.
2/4
73
DX modular circuit breakers Legrand DX modular circuit breakers are used to organise distribution in rows in complete freedom
Find the complete offer on page 216
74
TECHNICAL PART
DX MODULAR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
18 mm 18 mm 1 module per pole up to 63 A and 1.5 modules from 80 to 125 A Quality and approval marks Circuit identification Control handle o I - ON/red o O - OFF/green Characteristics
Marking of DX units 1 2 protected poles
3
In : Rated current (nominal)
400 V
C 10 6000 3
2 Limiting class
DX 2-pole MCB
4
2 I∆n = 0.03 A
TEST
10000
T
Breaking capacity equal to that of associated MCB
T
Im = 500 A Im = 1500 A 230 V
40 A
3
3
Im : Making and breaking capacity
086 29
064 66
1
1
4
300 mA Mensuel Monthly
I∆m = Icn
078 08
Legrand Cat. No.
I
4
I∆n = 0.3 A
TEST
300 mA Mensuel Monthly
Rated sensitivity I∆n : Sensitivity
Short circuit with an associated protection
DX 2-pole RCCB
2
DX add-on module
75
DX modular circuit breakers CHARACTERISTICS OF DX UNITS
DX-E 6000 /6 kA
Designation Number of poles
1P
2P
3P
4P
1P + N
1P
2P
6/10/13/16 20/25/32 40/50/63
6/10/13/16 20/25/32 40/50/63
6/10/13/16 20/25/32 40/50/63
6/10/13/16 20/25/32 40/50/63
0,5/1/2/3/4 6/8/10/13/16 20/25/32/40
1/2/3/4/6/10 16/20/25/32 40/50/63
1/2/3/4/6/10 16/20/25/32 40/50/63
B and C
B and C
B and C
B and C
B and C
B and C
B and C
Nominal voltage (with standard tolerance)
230/400 V
400 V
400 V
400 V
230 V
230/400 V
400 V
Nominal frequency
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Rated current in at 30 °C (A) Ratings
Type of curve
Operating voltage (50/60 Hz) +/- 10%
240/415 V
415 V
415 V
415 V
240 V
240/415 V
415 V
with 127/230 V supply
6000 A
6000 A
6000 A
6000 A
6 000 A
6 000 A
6 000 A
with 230/400 V supply
6000 A
6000 A
6000 A
6000 A
6 000 A
6 000 A
6 000 A
6 kA
6 kA
6 kA
6 kA
10 kA
10 kA
Curve B: 25 kA Curve C: In ≤ 32 A: 25 kA In > 32 A: 20 kA
6 kA
6 kA
6 kA
6 kA
10 kA
10 kA
10 kA
Standard breaking capacity Ics acc. to EN 60947-2
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution 2)
500 V
500 V
500 V
500 V
250 V
500 V
500 V
6 kV
6 kV
6 kV
6 kV
4 kV
6 kV
6 kV
mechanical
20 000
20 000
20 000
20 000
20 000
20 000
20 000
electrical
10 000
10 000
10 000
10 000
10 000
10 000
10 000
2 500 V
2 500 V
2 500 V
2 500 V
2 500 V
2 500 V
2 500 V
Remote control
-
-
-
-
-
yes
yes
Add-on module
-
-
-
-
-
-
yes
-25°C to + 70°C
-25°C to + 70°C
-25°C to + 70°C
-25°C to + 70°C
-25°C to + 70°C
-25°C to + 70°C
-25°C to + 70°C
Breaking capacity Icn 50/60 Hz acc. to EN 60898
Breaking capacity Icu 50/60 Hz with 127/230 V supply acc. to EN 60947-2
with 230/400 V supply
Rated impulse withstand current Uimp (kV) Endurance (operating cycles)
Dieletric strength between 0 and 2000 m
Operating temperature
76
DX 6000 /10 kA
DX-H 10000 /25 kA
DX-D 6000
DX-L 50 kA
3P, 3P+N and 4P
1P
1P+N
2P
3P, 3P+N and 4P
1P
2P
3P and 4P
2P
4P
1/2/3/6/10 16/20/25/32 40/50/63
2/3/6/10 13/16/20/25 32/40/50/63 80/100/125
6/10/13/16 20/25/32 40/50/63
2/3/6/10 13/16/20/25 32/40/50/63 80/100/125
2/3/6/10 13/16/20/25 32/40/50/63 80/100/125
1/2/3/6/10/ 13/16/20/25 32/40/50/63
1/2/3/6/10 16/20/25/32 40/50/63 80/100/125
1/2/3/6/10 16/20/25 32/40/50/63 80/100/125
10/16/20/25 32/40/50/63
10/16/20/25 32/40/50/63
B and C
B(1) and C
B and C
C
B(1) and C
D
D
D
C
C
400 V
230/400 V
230 V
400 V
400 V
230/400 V
400 V
400 V
400 V
400 V
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
415 V
240/415 V
240 V
415 V
415 V
240/415 V
415 V
415 V
415 V
415 V
6 000 A
10 000 A
10 000 A
10 000 A
10 000 A
6 000 A
6 000 A
6 000 A
25 000 A
25 000 A
6 000 A
10 000 A
10 000 A
10 000 A
10 000 A
6 000 A
6 000 A
6 000 A
25 000 A
25 000 A
Curve B: 25 kA Curve C: In ≤ 32 A: 25 kA In > 32 A: 20 kA
25 kA
25 kA
In ≤ 40 A: 50 kA In ≤ 32 A: 25 kA In ≤ 40 A: 50 kA In 50/63 A: 25 kA In ≤ 63 A: 20 kA In > 40 A: 25 kA In > 63 A: 16 kA In > 63 A: 16 kA
In ≤ 32 A: 25 kA In ≤ 63 A: 20 kA In > 63 A: 16 kA
In ≤ 32 A: 25 kA In ≤ 63 A: 20 kA In > 63 A: 16 kA
70 kA
70 kA
In ≤ 20 A: 25 kA In ≤ 20 A: 25 kA In ≤ 20 A: 30 kA In ≤ 20 A: 25 kA In 25 A: 20 kA In 25 A: 20 kA In ≤ 32 A: 15 kA In 25 A: 25 kA In 25 A: 20 kA In 32 A: 15 kA In 32/40 A: 15 kA In 32/40 A: 20 kA In 32/40 A: 15 kA In > 32 A: 10 kA In > 32 A: 12,5 kA In > 32 A: 12,5 kA In > 40 A: 15 kA In > 40 A: 12,5 kA
In ≤ 32 A: 15 kA In > 32 A: 10 kA
In ≤ 32 A: 15 kA In > 32 A: 10 kA
50 kA
50 kA
10 kA
TECHNICAL PART
DX 6000 /10 kA
100%
75%
75%
75%
75%
75%
80%
75%
75%
75%
500 V
500 V
500 V
500 V
500 V
500 V
500 V
500 V
500 V
500 V
6 kV
6 kV
6 kV
6 kV
6 kV
6 kV
6 kV
6 kV
6 kV
6 kV
20 000
20 000
20 000
20 000
20 000
20 000
20 000
20 000
20 000
20 000
10 000
10 000
10 000
10 000
10 000
10 000
10 000
10 000
10 000
10 000
2 500 V
2 500 V
2 500 V
2 500 V
2 500 V
2 500 V
2 500 V
2 500 V
2 500 V
2 500 V
yes
yes
-
yes
yes
yes
≤ 63 A: yes
≤ 63 A: yes
yes
-
-
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
-25°C to + 70°C
-25°C to + 70°C
-25°C to + 70°C
-25°C to + 70°C
-25°C to + 70°C
-25°C to + 70°C
-25°C to + 70°C
-25°C to + 70°C
-25°C to + 70°C
-25°C to + 70°C
77
DX modular circuit breakers (continued)
CHARACTERISTICS OF DX UNITS (continued)
Choice of protection devices according to the neutral earthing system As a general rule all live conductors (phase and neutral) must be protected against overloads and shortcircuits. It is however possible to do away with this requirement for the neutral conductor in certain configurations.
Main permitted layouts according to the neutral earthing system and the type of circuit N
N
N
N
N
Neutral earthing system SN = SPH
SN = SPH
N not distributed
SN = SPH
TT
(1)
(1)
TN-S
(1)
(1)
SN < SPH
SN = SPH
SN < SPH
SN = SPH
SN < SPH
TN-C IT
(2)
(2)
(1) In TT and TN systems, it is possible to use circuit breakers with unprotected neutral pole if the cross-section of the neutral conductor is the same as that of the phase conductors. However, the neutral conductor must be protected if there is a risk of it breaking upstream of the device and there is no residual current protection (TN system). (2) In IT systems with a distributed neutral conductor, it is possible to use circuit breakers with unprotected neutral pole if a residual current protection device, with a sensitivity of less than 15% of the current permissible in the neutral, is placed upstream. This device must break all the poles, including the neutral. This situation should be limited to the supply of devices which can withstand the full voltage (between phases) with no risk of fire.
78
TECHNICAL PART
Interruption of the neutral (by deliberate breaking or detection of overcurrent) must always lead to breaking of all the live conductors. Single-pole breaking of the neutral creates an imbalance in the voltages applied to single-phase devices supplied by a three-phase circuit. When the neutral opens the R1 and R2 receivers are powered in series by the voltage between phases 1
(U23: 400 V in the example)
2
U23 = UR1 + UR2
3
Depending on the actual impedance of each receiver
N
R1 and R2, the voltage which will be applied to them can reach destructive values. If for example R1 is a 2 kW device and R2 a100 W R1
R2
device, the voltage at the terminals of R1 will be 20 V and that at the terminals of R2 will be 380 V(!) instead of a normal voltage of 230 V.
3-phase breaking devices with neutral pole must break the neutral pole last during opening and make it again first during closing. For this reason also it is always important to observe the N marking on devices and not connect the neutral conductor to another pole.
79
DX modular circuit breakers (continued)
CONNECTION OF DX UNITS Maximum capacities for each pole Control and signalling
LEXIC DX 63 A
DX 125 A
DX 63A with supply busbar
Direct cage
Direct cage
Direct cage
Incoming terminal Incoming terminal 049 05 049 06
6
16
35
50
25
35
6
10
25
35
16
35
Direct cage
DX 40 A
Mode
Connection rigid
Cross-section flexible (mm2)
PERFORMANCE The DX performances vary according to their conditions of use.
Temperature A circuit breaker is set to operate at In in an ambient temperature of: - 30 °C for DX circuit breakers according to EN 60898.
Rated current (A) according to the temperature for DX, DX-H circuit breakers curves B and C and DX-D circuit breakers curve D In (A)
0°C
10°C
20°C
30°C
40°C
50°C
60°C
1
1.1
1.07
1.03
1
0.97
0.93
0.90
2
2.2
2.1
2.06
2
1.94
1.86
1.80
3
3.3
3.2
3.1
3
2.9
2.8
2.6
6
6.6
6.4
6.18
6
6.8
5.5
5.4
10
11
10.7
10.3
10
9.7
9.3
9
16
18
17.3
16.6
16
15.4
14.7
14.1
20
22.4
21.6
20.8
20
19.2
18.4
17.6
25
28.3
27.2
26
25
24
22.7
21.7
32
36.2
34.9
33.3
32
30.7
29.1
27.8
40
46
44
42
40
38
36
34
50
57.5
55
52.5
50
47.5
45
42.5
63
73.1
69.9
66.1
63
59.8
56.1
52.9
80
96
89
86.4
80
73.6
67.2
60.8
100
119
114
108
100
92
84
76
125
148
142
135
125
115
105
95
- Reference temperature = 30°C 80
Protection of capacitor banks
The stated characteristics for the devices assume a frequency of 50/60 Hz. They should be corrected for use at 400 Hz. 1-module Neutral + phase DX and DX 80 A, 100 A and 125 A circuit breakers have their magnetic threshold increased by 35%. This increase is 45% for 1, 2, 3 and 4-pole DX and DX-H circuit breakers from 1 to 63 A. The other characteristics, such as the nominal rating for operation and the thermal thresholds, do not change. This is the case for all ratings.
The rating for the protection device should be determined on the basis of an actual rated current (IB) increased by the K cœfficient. K = 2 for Q ≤ 25 kVAR K = 1.8 for Q ≤ 50 kVAR K = 1.7 for Q ≤ 100 kVAR K = 1.5 for Q > 100 kVAR
TECHNICAL PART
400 Hz power supply
IB = Q x 1000 x K Ux 3 Q: Capacitor bank reactive power (in kVAR) U: Nominal voltage of 3-phase supply
DC power supply DXs can protect lines supplied with DC, provided they do not exceed: - 60 V per device for DX P+N and DNX P+N (1 module) - 80 V per pole for DX and DX-H. For voltages higher than 80 V, use multi-pole devices and place the poles in series.
Supplying power to fluorescent tubes The rating for the protection device should be determined on the basis of an actual rated current (IB) increased by the K cœfficient. K = 1.8 for compensated tubes (cos ϕ ≈ 0.85) K = 3.4 for non-compensated tubes (cos ϕ ≈ 0.5)
ELECTRICAL AUXILIARIES The DX range has all the necessary electrical auxiliaries: auxiliary contact, fault signal, shunt trips or undervoltage releases. For DXs, the auxiliaries (3 at maximum(1)) are mounted on the left-hand side of the devices. They allow the prong-type supply busbars to pass through. (1)
Only 1 control auxiliary per association and 1 signalling auxiliary maximum (0.5 module or 2 auxiliaries of 1 module) can be mounted between the m.c.b.s. and control auxiliary.
With 230 V three-phase distribution: IB = P x K 230 With 400 V three-phase distribution: IB =
P xK 400 x 3
P: Sum of powers (in W) of fluorescent fittings depending on models (18 W, 36 W, 58 W, 2 × 36 W, 2 × 58 W, 2 × 80 W, 4 × 18 W, etc).
81
Association of protective devices
Back-up protection is the technique by which the breaking capacity of a breaker is increased by coordinating it with another protection device, placed upstream. This coordination makes it possible to use a protection device with a breaking capacity which is lower than the maximum prospective short-circuit current at its installation point.
A
B
82
C
D
E
The breaking capacity of a protection device must be at least equal to the maximum short-circuit which may occur at the point at which this device is installed. By exception, the breaking capacity may be lower than the maximum prospective short-circuit, as long as: - it is associated with a device upstream which has the necessary breaking capacity at its own installation point - the downstream device and the trunking being protected can withstand the power limited by the association of the devices. Association therefore leads to substantial savings. The association values given in the tables on the following pages are based on laboratory tests carried out in accordance with IEC 947-2. In the case of single phase circuits in a 380/415 Vac system, supplied upstream by a 3-phase circuit, it is advisable to use the association tables for 230 Vac.
TECHNICAL PART
BACK-UP PROTECTION Example of association
Ik max = 30 kA
DPX 250 ER 250 A Breaking capacity = 50 kA Ik max = 23 kA
DX 40 A - C curve Breaking capacity alone = 10 kA Breaking capacity in association with DPX 250 ER = 25 kA
83
Association of protective devices
BACK-UP PROTECTION (continued)
3-level association
Association between distribution boards Association applies to devices installed in the same distribution board as well as in different boards.
A
B
It is therefore generally possible to benefit from the advantages of the association between devices located, for example, in a main distribution board and in a secondary board.
C
A
An association may be created on three levels if one of the conditions below is met. • The upstream device A must have an adequate breaking capacity at its installation point. Devices B and C are associated with device A. Simply check that the association values B + A and C + A have the necessary breaking capacity. In this case, there is no need to check the association between devices B and C. • The association is made between successive devices: - Upstream device A, which has an adequate breaking capacity at its installation point, device C is associated with device B which is in turn associated with device A. - Simply check that the association values C+B and B+A have the necessary breaking capacity. In this case, there is no need to check the association between devices A and C.
84
Board n°1
Board n°2
B
C
■ In 3-phase networks (+ N) 230/240 V according to IEC 60947-2 Fuses upstream gG type
Fuses upstream gG type
MCBs downstream
1 to 40 A
TECHNICAL PART
■ In 3-phase networks (+ N) 400/415 V according to IEC 60947-2
20 to 32 A
63 to 160 A
100
100
DX 6 000 - 10 kA
MCBs downstream
1 to 40 A
20 to 50 A
63 to 160 A
100
100
DX 6 000 - 10 kA C and D curves
C and D curves 50 to 125 A
2 to 40 A
50 to 125 A
100
100
2 to 40 A
100
100
100
100
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA
B and C curves
B and C curves 50 to 63 A
10 to 40 A
50 to 63 A
100
100
10 to 40 A
100
DX-L - 50 kA
DX-L - 50 kA
C curve
C curve 50 to 63 A
100
50 to 63 A
100
100
100
100
85
Association of protective devices (continued)
BACK-UP PROTECTION (continued) ■ In 3-phase networks + N 400/415 V according to IEC 60947-2
MCBs/MCCBs upstream
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA B and C curves
MCBs downstream
DX 6 000 - 10 kA B and C curves
2 to 32 A
DPX-E 125
DX-L
40 to 125 A 10 to 32 A
DPX 125
40 to 63 A 16 to 125 A 16 to 125 A 25 to 160 A
DX 6 000 - 15 kA D curve
86
100 A
160 A
250 A
12.5
50
25
16
25
25
25
25
25
25
25 A
25
12.5
50
25
16
25
25
25
25
25
25
32 A
12.5
25
16
25
25
25
25
25
25
40 A
12.5
25
16
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
16
25
20
25
25
20
20
16
25
15
20
15
15
80 A
20
25
20
20
100 A
20
25
20
20
50 A
15
15
1 to 16 A
50
25
16
25
25 25
25
25
25
25
20 A
50
25
16
25
20
25
25
25
25
25 A
25
16
25
15
25
25
25
25
32 A
25
16
25
20
25
25
25
25
40 A
25
16
25
20
25
25
25
25
50 A
25
16
25
15
25
25
20
20
16
25
25
25
20
15
15
50
50
50
50
50
63 A
DX-L - 50 kA C curve
63 A
25
125 A
B and C curves
DPX 250 ER
1 to 20 A
63 A
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA
DPX/ DPX-H 160
10 to 63 A
50
50
DPX/H/L 630
DPX/H/L 630 electronic
DPX/H/L 1 250
TECHNICAL PART
DPX/H/L 250
DPX/H/L 1 600
160 A
250 A
250 to 400 A
160 to 400 A
630 A
500 to 1 250 A 800 to 1 600 A
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
20
20
25
25
25
25
25
15
15
25
20
20
20
20
15
12.5
20
15
15
15
15
12.5
12.5
15
15
15
15
15
12.5
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
15
15
15
15
10
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
20
20
25
25
25
25
25
15
15
25
20
20
20
20
15
15
20
15
15
15
15
12.5
12.5
15
15
15
15
15
12.5
12.5
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
87
Association of protective devices (continued)
BACK-UP PROTECTION (continued) ■ In 3-phase networks + N 230/240 V according to IEC 60947-2 MCBs/MCCBs upstream
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA B and C curves
MCBs downstream
2 to 32 A
40 to 125 A 10 to 32 A
50
40 to 63 A 16 to 125 A 16 to 125 A 25 to 160 A
100 A
160 A
250 A
50
50
50
50
25
22
35
35
50
50
50
50
25
16
25
25
36
36
36
36
63 A
16
25
15
30
30
30
80 A
16
25
25
25
25
25
100 A
16
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
125 A
DX-L - 50 kA C curve
63 A
35
DX 6 000 - 10 kA
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA B and C curves DX 6 000 - 15 kA D curve
DPX 250 ER
35
50 A
B and C curves
DPX/ DPX-H 160
22
32 & 40 A
25
DPX 125
25
1 to 20 A
50
DPX-E 125
DX-L
1 to 40 A
50
50 A
25
22
35
35
50
50
50
50
25
16
25
25
36
36
36
36
16
25
25
30
30
30
70
70
70
63 A
10 to 63 A
70
70
70
70
TT or TN neutral earthing systems: For a 230/400 V supply in order to determine the breaking capacity of a 2 P MCB used as L + N (230 V) downstream a 2 P or 4 P circuit breaker use values indicated in the table for 230/240 V
88
DPX/H/L 630 electronic
DPX/H/L 1 250
TECHNICAL PART
DPX/H/L 250
DPX/H/L 1 600
160 A
250 A
250 to 400 A
160 to 400 A
630 A
500 to 1 250 A 800 to 1 600 A
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
36
30
30
30
25
25
25
30
30
30
30
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
20
25
25
25
25
20
25
25
25
25
20
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
36
30
30
30
25
25
25
25
30
30
30
25
25
25
70
70
70
70
70
70
89
Association of protective devices (continued)
DISCRIMINATION Discrimination or selectivity is a technique which consists of coordinating the protection in such a way that a fault on one circuit only trips the protection placed at the head of that circuit, thus avoiding rendering the remainder of the installation inoperative. Discrimination improves continuity of service and safety of the installation. Discrimination between A and B is said to be “total” if it is provided up to the value of the maximum prospective short-circuit at the point at which B is installed.
A
B
C
D
E
By extension, in the tables on the following pages, total discrimination, indicated by T, means that there is discrimination up to the breaking capacity of device B.
90
Discrimination between A and B is said to be “partial” in the other cases. The discrimination limit (given in the following tables) is therefore defined. This gives the shortcircuit current value below which only breaker B will open and above which breaker A may open. There are a number of techniques for providing discrimination: - Current discrimination, used for terminal circuits which have low short-circuits. - Time discrimination, provided by a delay on tripping the upstream breaker. - Logical discrimination, a variant of time discrimination, used on electronic breakers via a special link between the devices.
TECHNICAL PART
Since almost all faults occur during use, partial discrimination may be adequate if the discrimination limit is higher than the value of the maximum short-circuit which may occur at the point of use (or at the end of the trunking). This is referred to as “operating discrimination“. This technique is very often adequate, more economical and less restricting in terms of implementation.
DPX 250 ER 160 A
Ik max. : 8 kA DX 40 A
The discrimination limit for the association DPX 250 ER (160 A) with DX 40 A (curve C) is 6 kA. Since the prospective ISC at the point of installation is 8 kA, the discrimination is not total. However, there is discrimination at the point of use at which the prospective short-circuit is only 3 kA.
Ik max. : 3 kA
M
Discrimination in current This technique is based on the offset of the intensity of the tripping curves of the upstream and downstream breakers. It is checked by comparing these curves and checking that they do not overlap. It applies for the overload zone and the short-circuit zone, and the further apart the ratings of the devices, the better the discrimination. - On overloads To have discrimination in the overload zone, the ratio of the setting currents (Ir) must be at least 2.
The discrimination limit is then equal to the magnetic release current ImA of the upstream device. The discrimination is then total as long as IkB is less than ImA. Discrimination in current is therefore very suitable for terminal circuits where short-circuits are relatively weak. In other cases, time discrimination may be used together with current discrimination. (see p. 92)
- On short-circuits To have discrimination in the short-circuit zone, the ratio of the magnetic setting currents (Im) must be at least 1.6.
91
Association of protective devices (continued)
DISCRIMINATION (continued) Current discrimination
t A: upstream MCB
B: downstream MCB
The discrimination is total for IkB
Only B opens
A and B open Ir B
I
IkB
IrA ImB
ImA
IkB : maximum short-circuit at the point at which MCB B is installed
IP (kA) Non-limited current
When the downstream MCB B is a limiting device, the short-circuit current is limited in terms of time and amplitude. The discrimination is therefore total if the limited current IscB, which device B allows to pass, is lower than the tripping current of device A.
Limitation curve of the MCB
I'kB
IkB
ISC (kA)
IkB : prospective short-circuit at the point at which the device is installed I'kB : short-circuit limited by device B
92
Time discrimination
TECHNICAL PART
Logical discrimination
This technique is based on the offset of the times of the tripping curves of the breakers in series. It is checked by comparing the curves and is used for discrimination in the short-circuit zone. It is also used in addition to current discrimination in order to obtain discrimination beyond the magnetic setting current of the upstream breaker (ImA).
50 ms t (s) B A
… between two electronic DPXs via a special link Tm
ImB
ImA
I (A)
The following is necessary: - It must be possible to set a time delay on the upstream breaker, - The upstream breaker must be able to withstand the short-circuit current and its effects for the whole period of the time delay, - The trunking through which this current passes must be able to withstand the thermal stresses (I2t). The non-tripping time of the upstream device must be longer than the breaking time (including any time delay) of the downstream device. DPX MCCBs have a number of time delay setting positions for creating discrimination with a number of stages.
Logical discrimination This is provided between two devices which communicate via a special link. When the downstream breaker detects a fault, it sends a signal to the upstream device which will then have a 50 ms time delay. If the downstream device has not been able to eliminate the fault during this time delay, the upstream device will be activated. The electronic releases of DPX MCCBs are designed to perform logical discrimination.
With the same aim of improving continuity of service, the electronic releases also have a load shedding function. This function is used to disconnect non-priority circuits when the protected circuit has a load of more than 90%.
Electronic releases with contstant I 2t setting The use of MCCBs with electronic releases, on which a constant I2t can be set, improves the discrimination. Removing the heel value of the short delay tripping curve (I2t = constant) avoids overlapping of the tripping curves. This option is available on the DPX-630 and DPX-1600. t (s)
B
A
Set at constant I2t Normal setting
I (A)
93
Association of protective devices (continued) DISCRIMINATION (continued) Up-stream circuit-breaker
Down stream circuit-breaker
DPX-E 125
DPX 125 (25 kA)
DPX 125 (36 kA)
DPX 160 DPX 250 ER (25/36/50 kA)
DPX 250
DPX 250 electronic
DPX-H 250 DPX-L 250
DPX-H 250 elec. DPX-L 250 elec.
94
DPX 160 DPX-E 125 (25/36 kA) DPX 125 (25 /36 kA) DPX-H 160 (25/36/50 kA)
In (A) 16 25 40 63 100 125 16 25 40 63 100 125 16 25 40 63 100 125 25 40 63 100 160 250 25 40 63 100 160 250 40 63 100 160 250 25 40 63 100 160 250 40 63 100 160 250
40 0.8 0.8
63 1 1 1
100 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
125 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
0.8 0.8
1 1 1
1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
0.8 0.8
1 1 1
1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
40
63 0.63
100 1 1 1
1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
0.63
1 1 1
1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
0.63
1 1 1
0.63 0.63
1 1 1
0.4
0.8 0.8
1 1 1
1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
0.8
1 1
1.2 1.2 1.2
1.2 1.2 1.2
0.63
DPX 250 DPX-H 250 DPX-L 250
DPX 250 ER (25 /36/70 kA)
1 1 1
1 1
160 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6
1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6
250 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
63 100 0.63 1 1 1
0.63
1 1 1
0.63
1 1 1
0.63 0.63
1 1 1
0.63 0.63
1 1 1
0.63
1 1 1
1 1
DPX 250 electronic DPX-H 250 electronic DPX-L 250 electronic
160 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6
250 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
40 3.5 3.5
63 3.5 3.5 3.5
100 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
3.5 3.5
3.5 3.5 3.5
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
3.5 3.5
3.5 3.5 3.5
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
3.5
3.5 3.5
3.5 3.5 3.5
1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6
2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
3.5
3.5 3.5
1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6
2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
160 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
250 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
3.5 3.5 3.5
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
0.63
1 1
1.6 1.6 1.6
2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
3.5 3.5
3.5 3.5 3.5
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
3.5
3.5 3.5
3.5 3.5 3.5
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
250 6 6 6 6 4 4 6 6 6 6 4 4 6 6 6 6 4 4 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
320 6 6 6 6 4 4 6 6 6 6 4 4 6 6 6 6 4 4 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2
3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2
400 6 6 6 6 4 4 6 6 6 6 4 4 6 6 6 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
500 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
DPX 630 electronic DPX-H 630 electronic DPX-L 630 electronic
630 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3
160 8 8 6 6 6 6 8 8 6 6 6 6 8 8 6 6 6 6 8 8 6 6
250 8 8 6 6 6 6 8 8 6 6 6 6 8 8 6 6 6 6 8 8 6 6 6
8 8 6 6
8 8 8 8 8
8 6 6
8 6 6 6
8 8 6 6
8 8 8 8 8
8 6 6
8 6 6 6
400 8 8 6 6 6 6 8 8 6 6 6 6 8 8 6 6 6 6 8 8 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 6 8 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 6 8 6 6 6 6
630 8 8 6 6 6 6 8 8 6 6 6 6 8 8 6 6 6 6 8 8 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 6 8 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 6 8 6 6 6 6
DPX 1 250 DPX-H 1 250 DPX-L 1 250
500 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
630 T T T T T T 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
800 T T T T T T 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
1 000 1 250 T T T T T T T T T T T T 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
TECHNICAL PART
DPX 630 DPX-H 630 DPX-L 630
DPX 1600 S1 DPX 1600 S2 Sg DPX 1600 S1 S2 Sg DPX-H 1600 S1 DPX-H 1600 S2 Sg DPX-H 1600 S1 S2 Sg
630 T T T T T T T T T T T T 25 25 25 25 25 25 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
800 T T T T T T T T T T T T 25 25 25 25 25 25 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
630 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
800 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
1 250 1 600 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 30 36 30 36 30 36 30 36 30 36 30 36 30 36 30 36 30 36 30 36 30 36
95
Association of protective devices (continued)
DISCRIMINATION (continued) Up-stream circuit-breaker
Down stream circuit-breaker
DPX 630 DPX-H 630 DPX-L 630
In (A) 250
250
250
400
500
630
400
630
500
630
800
630
800
4
5
6.3
6
6
10
10
10
10
10
15
15
4
5
6.3
6
6
10
10
10
10
10
15
15
5
6.3
6
10
10
10
6
7,5
15
15
10
10
6
7,5
10
10
10
6
7,5 10
15
15
6.3
500 630 250 320 DPX-H 630 DPX-L 630
400 500
3.2
6.3
6
6
10
10
10
10
4
5
6.3
6
6
10
10
10
10
10
15
15
5
6.3
6
10
10
10
6
7.5
15
15
10
10
6
7.5
10
10
10
6
7.5
6.3
160
6.3
250
6.3
400
6.3
160
6.3
250
6.3
400
6.3
5
5
5
5
6.3
8
6
8
15
15
5
5
5
6.3
8
6
8
15
15
5
5
6.3
8
6
8
15
15
8
6
8
15
5
5
5
6.3
8
6
8
15
15
5
5
5
6.3
8
6
8
15
15
5
5
6.3
8
6
8
15
15
8
6
8 15
15
5
630 DPX 1 250
10
5
630 500
10
5
630 DPX-H 630 elec. DPX-H 630 elec.
1 000 1 250
4
630 DPX 630 elec.
DPX 1600 S1 DPX-H 1 600 S1
3.2
400
160
DPX 1 250 DPX-H 1 250 DPX-L 1 250
320
320 DPX 630
DPX 630 electronic DPX-H 630 electronic DPX-L 630 electronic
8
7.5
8
7.5
15 15
800 7.5
1 000 1 250 500 630 DPX-H 1 250 DPX-L 1 250
5
8
7.5
8
7.5
15
15 15
800 1 000
7.5
1 250 DPX 630 elec. DPX/DPX-H DPX 630 elec. DPX/DPX-H S1 S2 Sg
96
630
15
800 630 800 1 250 1 600
15
TECHNICAL PART
Upstream fuse DPX 1 600 S2 Sg DPX 1 600 S1 S2 Sg DPX-H 1 600 S2 Sg DPX-H 1 600 S1 S2 Sg
630
800
1 250
1 600
20
20
20
T
20
20
20
T
20
20
20
T
20
20
20
T
20
20
20
T
20
20
20
36
20
20
20
36
20
20
20
36
20
20
20
36
20
20
36
20
20
20
T
20
20
20
T
20
20
20
T
20
20
T
20
20
20
36
20
20
20
36
20
20
20
36
20
20
36
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
gG type
MCCBs downstream
250 A
DPX 125
7 500
400 A 1 000 A
DPX 160
10 000
DPX 250 ER
10 000
DPX 250
10 000
DPX 630
50 000
20 20
20 15 15
15
20
15
20
15
20
15
20 20
97
Association of protective devices (continued) DISCRIMINATION (continued) MCCBs upstream DPX DPX 125
MCBs downstream
DPX 160
DPX/H/L 250
63 A
100 A
125 A
63 A
100 A
160 A
63 A
100 A
160 A
250 A
63 A
100 A
160 A
250 A
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
6A
6 000
6 000
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
6 000
T
T
T
10 A
5 000
5 000
7 500
7 500
5 000
T
T
5 000
T
T
T
5 000
T
T
T
1 to 4 A
13 A
4 000
4 000
6 000
6 000
5 000
T
T
5 000
T
T
T
4 000
T
T
T
LR 6 000
16 A
4 000
4 000
6 000
6 000
4 000
T
T
4000
T
T
T
4 000
T
T
T
DX 6 000 - 6 kA
20 A
3 000
3 000
5 000
5 000
4 000
8 000
T
4 000
8 000
T
T
4 000
8 000
T
T
DX 6 000 - 10 kA
25 A
3 000
3 000
4 500
4 500
3 000
6 000
8 500
3 000
6 000
8 500
T
3 000
6 000
T
T
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA
32 A
2 000
4 000
4 000
2 000
5 000
7 000
2000
5 000
7 000
T
2 000
5 000
T
T
C curve
40 A
2 000
3 000
3 000
2 000
4 000
6 000
2 000
4 000
6 000
T
2 000
5 000
T
T
50 A
3 000
3 000
4 000
5 500
4 000
5 500
7 000
4 000
8 000
T
63 A
3 000
3 000
3 000
5 000
3 000
5 000
6 000
4 000
8 000
T
2 000
2 500
5 000
2 500
5 000
6 000
8 000
T
80 A 100 A
4 000
4 000
5 000
7 500
T
125 A
2 000
2 000
3 000
3 000
8 000
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
6A
6 000
6 000
T
T
4 000
T
T
4 000
T
T
T
6 000
T
T
T
10 A
5 000
5 000
7 500
7 500
4 000
T
T
4 000
T
T
T
5 000
T
T
T
13 A
4 000
4 000
6 000
6 000
4 000
T
T
4 000
T
T
T
4 000
T
T
T
16 A
4 000
4 000
6 000
6 000
3 500
6 000
T
3 500
6 000
T
T
4 000
T
T
T
1 to 4 A
20 A
3 000
3 000
5 000
5 000
3 500
6 000
T
3 500
6000
T
T
4 000
8 000
T
T
DX 6 000
25 A
3 000
3 000
4 500
4 500
2 500
5 500
8 500
2 500
5 500
8 500
T
3 000
6 000
T
T
D curve
32 A
2 000
4 000
4 000
2 500
5 000
7 000
2 500
5 000
7 000
T
2 000
5 000
T
T
40 A
2 000
3 000
3 000
2 000
4 500
6 000
2 000
4 500
6 000
T
2 000
5 000
T
T
50 A
3 000
3 000
3 500
5 000
3 500
5 500
T
4 000
8 000
T
63 A
3 000
3 000
3 500
5 000
3 500
5 000
6 000
4 000
8 000
T T
4 000
4 000
5 000
7 000
100 A
1 500
3 000
3 000
4 000
6 500
T
125 A
1 500
1 500
2 000
2 000
7 000
80 A
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
6A
6 000
6 000
10 000
10 000
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
6 000
T
T
T T
1 to 4 A
10 A
5 000
5 000
7 500
7 500
7 000
T
T
7 000
T
T
T
5 000
T
T
LR 6 000
13 A
4 000
4 000
6 000
6 000
7 000
T
T
7 000
T
T
T
4 000
T
T
T
DX 6 000 - 6 kA
16 A
4 000
4 000
6 000
6 000
5 500
9 500
T
5 500
9 500
T
T
4 000
T
T
T
DX 6 000 - 10 kA
20 A
3 000
3 000
5 000
5 000
5 500
8 500
10 000
5 500
8 500
10 000
T
3 000
8 000
T
T
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA
25 A
3 000
3 000
4 500
4 500
4 500
7 000
8 500
4 500
7 000
8 500
T
3 000
6 000
T
T
B curve
32 A
2 000
4 000
4 000
4 500
5 500
7 000
4 500
5 500
7 000
T
2 000
5 000
T
T
40 A
2 000
3 000
3 000
5 500
6 000
5 500
6 000
T
2 000
5 000
T
T
3 000
3 000
4 500
5 500
4 500
5 500
10 000
4 000
8 000
T
4 000
8 000
T
T
T
T
50 A
3 000
3 000
4 500
5 000
4 500
5 000
8 000
10 A
30 000
30 000
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
16 A
20 000
20 000
35 000
35 000
20 000
T
T
20 000
T
T
T
40 000
T
T
63 A
T
20 A
15 000
15 000
25 000
25 000
15 000
22 000
T
15 000
22 000
T
T
33 000
T
T
DX-L 25 000 - 50 kA
25 A
12 000
12 000
20 000
20 000
12 000
18 000
T
12 000
18 000
T
T
28 000
T
T
C curve
32 A
9 000
15 000
15 000
9 000
13 000
T
9 000
13 000
T
T
20 000
T
T
40 A
6 000
10 000
10 000
6 000
8 000
20 000
6 000
8 000
20 000
25 000
13 000
T
T
50 A
5 000
5 000
4 000
10 000
4 000
10 000
20 000
8 000
20 000
T
63 A
5 000
5 000
4 000
10 000
4 000
10 000
15 000
8 000
20 000
T
T= total selection, up to downstream circuit breaker breaking capacity according to IEC 60947-2
98
DPX 250 ER
40 A
TECHNICAL PART
DPX DPX/H/L 630 elec.
DPX/H/L 630
250 A
320 A
400 A
160 A
250 A 400 A
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
DPX/H/L 1250
DPX/H 1600 elec.
630 A
500 A
630 A
800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 630 A
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
800 A 1 250 A 1 600 A T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
8000
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
8 000
8 000
8 000
8 000
10 000
16 000
16 000
16 000
16 000
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
8 000
8 000
8 000
8 000
10 000
16 000
16 000
16 000
16 000
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
8 000
8 000
8 000
8 000
10 000
16 000
16 000
16 000
16 000
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
8 000
8 000
8 000
8 000
10 000
16 000
16 000
16 000
16 000
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
8 000
8 000
8 000
8 000
10 000
16 000
16 000
16 000
16 000
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
8 000
8 000
8 000
8 000
10 000
16 000
16 000
16 000
16 000
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
8 000
8 000
8 000
8 000
10 000
16 000
16 000
16 000
16 000
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
8 000
8 000
8 000
8 000
10 000
16 000
16 000
16 000
16 000
T
T
T
T
99
Association of protective devices (continued)
DISCRIMINATION (continued) Discrimination tables ACBs/ACBs
DMX-E upstream 800 A
1 600 A
2 000 A
2 500 A
3 200 A
4 000 A
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
1 000 A 1 250 A DMX-E downstream
1 600 A
T
2 000 A 2 500 A 3 200 A 4 000 A
ACBs/MCCBs
DMX-E upstream 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A 2 000 A 2 500 A 3 200 A 4 000 A DPX 125
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
DPX 160
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
DPX 250
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
DPX 250 ER
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
< 400 A
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
400 A
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
1 250 A
T
T
1 600 A
T
T
DPX downstream DPX 630
630 A 800 A DPX 1 600
T = total selectivity, up to downstream circuit breaker capacity according to IEC 60947-2
100
The conditions for coordination of residual current protection devices (RCDs) are defined in IEC 60364. While ensuring maximum safety, they allow continued operation of those parts of the installation which are unaffected by any faults that may have occurred. Discrimination between two residual current protection devices requires the time/current nontripping characteristic of the upstream device to be higher than that of the downstream device.
TECHNICAL PART
DISCRIMINATION BETWEEN RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES 2-level discrimination
Upstream RCD 300 mA discriminating (80 ms)
Total discrimination between a downstream (A) and upstream (B) device Downstream RCD 30 mA instantaneous (20 ms)
t
B
3-level discrimination
A
RCD 1A, 1 second delay I
In practice, the upstream device should have a sensitivity 2 to 3 times lower and a breaking time at I∆n at least 3 times longer than the downstream device. A delay of more than 1 s is not usually permitted.
RCD 300 mA discriminating (130 to 500 ms)
RCD 30 mA instantaneous (20 to 50 ms)
101
Voltage Surge Protectors (VSP) Lightning strikes occur every year and cause significant damage throughout the world. Lightning is a natural phenomenon which is increasingly disruptive to our industrial and domestic equipment
Find the complete offer on page 238
102
By their very nature, powerful and unexpected, lightning strikes often have dramatic consequences for electrical installations. Knowledge of the phenomenon and its effects is essential in order to assess the risks and choose the best protection equipment.
Risk of lightning: the annual average of stormy days
TECHNICAL PART
LIGHTNING, ITS EFFECTS AND CONSEQUENCES THE PHENOMENON OF LIGHTNING Lightning is a very powerful electrical discharge caused by a rebalancing of potential between clouds or between clouds and ground. Lightning currents can be as much as 10 to 100 kA with a rise time of a few microseconds. Lightning can cause considerable damage. - Cloud-to-ground lightning strike: a “stepped leader” traces a conductor channel descending from the cloud to ground and the lightning is discharged as it returns from the ground to the cloud. - Ground-to-cloud lightning strike: the leader rises, and is established from a point connected to earth (tree, building, lightning conductor, ground, etc). The lightning strike occurs as it returns with emission of light (flash), sound (thunder) and the discharge of an intense current (several hundred kA).
The different types of ground lightning strike Depending on the direction in which the charge develops and whether the charge is negative or positive, there are four different types of ground lightning strike
0-1 2-4 5-9 10 - 19 20 - 39
40 - 59 60 - 79 80 - 99 100 - 139 140 - 200 +
----
----
+++ ++
+++ ++
----+++++ ----+++++ Negative Positive ground- Positive cloud-to- Negative groundcloud-to-ground to-cloud ground to-cloud
Current
Typical shape of the atmospheric discharge current of a lightning strike
I
1st return arc
Rise time t1: 0.3 to 2 ms Reset time to half-value t2: 10 to 25 ms Peak current I: several tens of kA
Subsequent arcs
I/2
t1
t2
Time
103
Voltage Surge Protectors
LIGHTNING, ITS EFFECTS AND CONSEQUENCES (continued) Lightning directly or indirectly generates the following effects: - thermal (blow-outs, fire) - electrodynamic (loosening of terminals) - rise in earth voltage (risk of electrocution) - overvoltages of several thousand volts and destructive induced currents (damage to electrical and electronic equipment, interruption of operation)
DIRECT EFFECTS
INDIRECT EFFECTS The lightning current and its effects can reach the installation by three means of access: - air connections (power, telecoms, television, etc) entering or exiting the building ➀ - the ground, following its increase in potential, via the exposed conductive parts, the earth network and protective conductors ➁ - conductive loops (structure, etc), internal networks (power, telecoms, etc) ➂
At the point of impact, lightning generates: - direct thermal effects (melting, fire) caused by the electrical arc - thermal and electrodynamic effects induced by circulation of the lightning current - blast effects (shock wave and blast air) produced by air expansion
➂ ➀
➀ ➁
As the lightning current is propagated, it creates overvoltages either by conduction in the live cables ➀ and the earthing conductors ➁ , or by inductive or capacitive coupling, directly onto the mains supplies ➂ . It will then damage any connected electrical or electronic equipment.
The effects of a lightning strike can be felt by induction within a radius of 1 km and by conduction within a radius of more than 10 km.
104
Overvoltage on the power line input
Voltage returned by the earth
TECHNICAL PART
Simplified electrical models of overvoltages caused by lightning Overvoltage induced in a loop
U
U U Installation earth connection
Installation earth connection
Stray capacity
When lightning strikes overhead power lines it propagates overvoltages on HV and LV networks of several thousand volts.
U Stray capacity
A ground lightning strike causes an increase in the earth potential which can spread to the installation (return from earth).
ASSESSING THE RISKS OF LIGHTNING The consequences of lightning strikes and the probability of the site being hit by lightning can be assessed by carrying out a risk analysis. In order to do this, a number of factors must first be considered: - an assessment of the meteorological risks, the storm history - specific geographical features of the location - the nature of the site - the site to be protected and what it is sheltering Thus for a given site it is possible to measure more precisely the degree of protection on the basis of the risks run:
Installation earth connection
Stray capacity
Associated with the lightning discharge is an electromagnetic field with a wide frequency spectrum which, as it connects to the loops in the installation, will give rise to destructive induced currents.
- “external connections” to the site (electrical, telephone networks, etc) - the structure and scale of the buildings, the activity (installations for the protection of the environment, public buildings), - the consequences associated with the risks (environmental, human, financial, etc) - the sensitivity of equipment (computers, electronics, etc) - the strategic importance of installations (public services, transport, civil or military safety, etc) - the reasonably acceptable failure rate, its cost, its consequences, with regard to the various protection solutions.
105
Voltage Surge Protectors (continued)
PROTECTION AGAINST THE EFFECTS OF LIGHTNING This is based essentially on: • catching and discharging the current to earth • the use of voltage surge protectors • passive protection of the installation Passive protection (poor, good) designates the part of the protection provided by the structure and the configuration of the installation itself (neutral earthing system, area, level of equipotentiality, etc.)
Lightning conductors with spark-over device These are equipped with a device which creates an electrical field at their tip
DIRECT EFFECTS Protection against the direct effects of lightning relies on catching the current and discharging it to earth (lightning conductor, catcher rods, etc).
Lightning conductors These protect installations against direct lightning strikes. By catching the lightning and running the discharge current to earth, they avoid the damage linked to the lightning impact itself and circulation of the associated current. There are four categories of lightning conductor.
Lightning conductors with earthing wires This system is used on top of certain buildings, outdoor storage areas, electrical lines (protective ground wire), etc.
Lightning conductors with meshed cage
Single rod lightning conductors (Franklin type)
These consist of a tip, one or more downcoming conductors and an earth connection
106
The meshed cage consists of a network of conductors arranged around the outside of the building so that its whole volume is circumscribed. Catcher rods regularly arranged around the projecting points of the building can be added to this network. All the interconnected conductors are connected to the earth connection network by several downcoming conductors. The level of protection is defined by the size of the mesh. Lightning conductors with a meshed cage complete the arrangements for meshing buildings against radiated electromagnetic fields to which they must be interconnected
TECHNICAL PART
The electrogeometric model After assessing the risk of a lightning stike and its likely consequences in economic terms, the choice of lightning catching devices (lightning conductors) will require an implementation study specific to each site. In this approach, the aim will to be to check that the lightning has a preferential tendency to strike at precise predetermined points, not other parts of the buildings or installations. To achieve this, a so-called “electrogeometric” method is used which defines the circular zone theoretically protected by a lightning conductor according to the intensity of the discharge current of the 1st arc. The higher this current, the higher the probability of capture and the wider the protected zone.
General principle of the electrogeometric model
D
D D
Protected zone
The electrogeometric model should be adapted according to the protection device: single rod lightning conductor, meshed cage, earthing wires whose protected volumes are defined in standard IEC 61024-1. This defines four levels of protection according to the probability of capture. Level
I
II
III
IV
Probability of capture (%)
98
95
90
80
Min. capture current (kA)
2.8
5.2
9.5
14.7
Max. spark-over distance (m)
20
30
45
60
For active lightning conductors with a sparkover device, you should refer to the manufacturer documentation.
The tip of the leader stroke (or precursor) is deemed to represent the centre of a fictional sphere, with a radius D. This sphere follows the random path of the leader stroke. The first element to come into contact with this sphere will determine the lightning point of impact: a tree, a roof, the ground or a lightning conductor, if there is one. Beyond the tangent points of this sphere, protection is no longer provided by the lightning conductor. The theoretical radius (D) of the sphere is defined by the relationship: D = 10 x I2/3 where D is in metres and I is in kA D (m)
15
29
46
96
135
215
I (kA)
2
5
10
30
50
100
For optimum protection integrating the probable values of the lowest lightning currents (protection level I), the sphere we would be looking at is 20 m (I = 2.8 kA).
107
Voltage Surge Protectors (continued)
PROTECTION AGAINST THE EFFECTS OF LIGHTNING (continued) The protection plan: capture surface areas When the site to be protected consists of several buildings or extends beyond the range of a single catcher device (lightning conductor), it is necessary to draw up a protection plan for the area, juxtaposing the different theoretical capture surface areas. It is always difficult to achieve total coverage of a site when it consists of structures of different heights. Superimposing the protection plan on the site layout shows which zones are not covered and where a lightning strike could have destructive effects.
Example of protection plan
Storage
Car park Bays
Manufacturing Street lighting Aerial Chimney Reception
Automatic exchange
Pumping
Silo
Silo
Waste treatment
On this (fictional) site we can see that the sensitive areas: manufacturing, storage, processing etc, have been protected effectively by lightning conductors or by a meshed cage, but not areas such as reception and the car park which are deemed to be lowrisk. More in-depth consideration shows that the street lighting illuminating the car park can be struck by lightning and transmit the lightning strike to the installation, and that the reception area housing the telephone switchboard and paging aerial (beep) represents a zone which is both vulnerable and sensitive, the pumping station is in theory protected by the silo lightning conductors which are much higher, a situation which must not however lead us to forget that in this case, a sideways lightning strike is possible.
108
INDIRECT EFFECTS The principle of protection against indirect effects of lightning consists of preventing the interference-bearing, or even destructive, energy from reaching appliances and equipment. To achieve this, three conditions must be fulfilled. - Avoiding the appearance of dangerous overvoltages between the appliances themselves and between the appliances, the protection circuits and the various metal conductive parts, is the role of the equipotential bonding system - Minimising the effects of induction due to fields generated by the lightning impact itself and by the lightning conductor downcomers on all the conductive loops (electrical power and communication lines) and also the building structures; the appropriate location of devices and their wiring can limit induced voltages. - Limiting the rise in potential of the installation by shunting the lightning current to the low-lying reference potential (earthing network), is the role of the voltage surge protectors.
Damage to electrical installations mainly results from the indirect effects of lightning strikes.
TECHNICAL PART
Radiated electromagnetic field The lightning discharge current, whether by direct impact or carried by a lightning conductor downcomer, generates a field whose electrical and magnetic components reach considerable values: several kV/m and several tens of microTeslas (µT). This radiation is received by all the conductors, forming a more or less appropriate aerial, which becomes the focus of the induced currents. It is particularly on the conductors which make up the wide surface area loops that the effect of magnetic induction (field H) is predominant.
Coupling loop
2.5 m
i
100 m
U 12 m
3m
The field generated by the current i (several kA) in the lightning conductor downcomer connects to the loop formed by the conductors in the building, generating a voltage U of several kV. This phenomenon also occurs at a lesser level when there is an impact some distance away, even several hundred metres. By way of example, a lightning current of 10 kA at 100 m will generate an overvoltage of 600 V in a loop of 30 m2. The same lightning current in the lightning conductor downcomer (located 3 m away) will generate an overvoltage of more than 15 kV. In the 1st case, the overvoltage may be absorbed without too much damage, in the second it will certainly be destructive. This also illustrates how the presence of a lightning conductor can only be envisaged if voltage surge protectors are installed in the installation.
Inductive coupling of a single conductor on a loop:
H
L1 U L2
i
di voltage U equals: U = M x __ dt where M is a coefficient characterising the coupling according to distances L1 and L2, the loop surface area and the magnetic permeability of the environment. In practice, it is assumed that the loop plane is at rightangles to the current i (therefore L1 = L2) and that the distance is longer than the size of the loop.
U
109
Voltage Surge Protectors (continued)
PROTECTION AGAINST THE EFFECTS OF LIGHTNING (continued) Feedback from earth When lightning falls on a lightning conductor or even directly on the ground, it causes a local increase in the earth potential. This then spreads to neighbouring installations via their earth connections and bonding systems, and to more distant installations via the distribution network.
U
Installation Installation
Installation Feedback from earth Secondary spark-over
Local rise in earth potential
Close to the lightning strike, an overvoltage, said to be fed back from earth, spreads from earth to the network, either via the installation (with destructive effects), or by spark-over in the protectors. In this last instance, the installation is protected, but other installations supplied by the same mains supply are not necessarily protected. Overvoltage U, which spreads, can then cause destructive secondary sparkovers between live conductors and ground, in more distant installations where the earth is referenced to a different potential. This type of phenomenon can be seen in installations in buildings close to a tall structure that has been struck by lightning. To limit the consequences of such phenomena, which are always difficult to foresee, you should: - Equip all installations supplied by the same LV network with voltage surge protectors - Make all bonding systems equipotential via interconnected connections. This solution can be executed on groups of buildings (factory), but does not work in the home. Note that the neutral conductor, regularly earthed, ensures a certain equipotentiality for the system, but this is not extended to the installation whose earth connections are separate (TT system). From this point of view, distribution via a TN system would be more favourable. Finally, let us add that although they are naturally protected against direct effects, underground distribution networks can also induce feedback from earth.
110
The numerous links between the buildings (computer networks, remote monitoring, communications, alarms and power) create interference as a result of the effect of the lightning’s electromagnetic field or that of the potential gradient generated by the ground. There are two ways in which these links can be protected: - Shielding or use of Faraday cages which will, in addition to protecting against these fields, mainly consist of maintaining the equipotentiality of the link (adjacent earthing conductor, twisting, conductor screen, etc) - Galvanic decoupling which will separate buildings electrically (optocouplers, fibre optics, isolation transformers, etc). The terms “installation structure and setup” refer to: - Earth connection schemes (or neutral earthing systems) whose type has an influence on the behaviour of the installation and hence on the choice of voltage surge protectors.
- The geometric separation of circuits intended to limit the crosstalk couplings between the conductors of these circuits (the existence of coupling loops sensitive to the electromagnetic field generated by the lightning is based on dimensional and geometric aspects and must therefore be distinguished from the concept of cohabitation distance between the conductors themselves). - The electrical separation of power supplies between the so-called “sensitive” circuits and the power circuits. - Equipotentiality created by the bonding system, for which five levels are suggested.
TECHNICAL PART
Passive protection: installation structure and setup
The risk linked to the direct effects of lightning is never total zero. The additional cost of protection devices, compared to the potential losses, is negligible and is reimbursed when the 1st incident happens. But voltage surge protectors are not a panacea if they are incorporated in a badly designed installation. It is above all through the precautions taken in the installation structure and setup (passive protection) that the best protection will be established.
Passive protection: configuration logic Passive protection is defined by independent concepts, and some people may find it difficult to appreciate its qualitative value precisely: scale of the installation, separation of circuits, level of equipotentiality. The logic diagram should therefore be read as an indicator of the level of passive protection: - good when a maximum number of criteria are in the green zone - poor when a majority are in the red - and average in the intermediate cases (eg: TN system, but not very large site). Neutral earthing system TT IT Scale of the installation (number of loops) very large (site) large (block of flats) Geometric separation of circuits not separate (coupling) separate Separation of the power supply for sensitive circuits same power supply separate power supply Level of equipotentiality 0 1 2
protection conductors
earthing conductors
equipotential links
TN small (house) shielded (not much coupling) separate supply 3
meshing of blocks
4
total meshing 111
Voltage Surge Protectors (continued)
PROTECTION AGAINST THE EFFECTS OF LIGHTNING (continued) Active protection: voltage surge protectors The VSP is a passive component which becomes active when it responds to a lightning strike. It behaves like an automatic switch, shunting the current when it is subject to transient overvoltage (atmospheric origin). A single voltage surge protector may prove insufficient to protect the whole of an installation effectively: it could allow residual
voltage to pass through which might damage the electrical equipment. Installation in cascade is necessary by adding one or two additional voltage surge protectors: - by lowering the value of the residual voltage to a value less than the Up of the last voltage surge protector, an acceptable level for the equipment to be protected - by discharging an additional part of the original overcurrent to earth
Principle of active protection L N
20% of the original overcurrent
4% of the original overcurrent
100% of the original overcurrent
80% of the original overcurrent discharged by the VSP
1
16% of the original overcurrent
Reducing the overvoltage with voltage surge protectors in cascade
2
Second voltage surge protector
3
Proximity voltage surge protector
a few µs low supply voltage 230/400 V - 50 Hz 20 ms 10 ms
20 ms
40 ms 30 ms
50 ms
Without voltage surge protector 112
First (main) voltage surge protector
3
Stays between 0 and 1% of the original overcurrent
2
1
10 ms
40 ms 30 ms
20 ms 50 ms
Main voltage surge protector
10 ms
40 ms 30 ms
50 ms
Main voltage surge protector + proximity voltage surge protector
TECHNICAL PART
VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS CHARACTERISTICS AND TYPOLOGY Two concepts are essential in order to define the characteristics of a VSP: - its flow-to-earth capacity - its protection level There are three main types of VSP: - Class 1 (VSP to be used in the case of buildings equipped with a lightning conductor), VSP characterised by a flow-to-earth current in the form of a conventional wave 10/350 which is closest to the direct lightning current wave. This VSP therefore has a high capacity for discharging the energy. It is used to reduce the difference in potential between the lightning protection system and the electrical installation during flow-to-earth of the installation lightning conductor lightning current. In an apartment block, it can be replaced by class 2 VSP located at the source of each of the shunted installations. It is characterised by I imp. - Class 2 (VSP for general applications), a VSP characterised by a flow-to-earth current in the form of an 8/20 wave, a conventional current wave closest to the current waves due to the indirect effects of the lightning. It is characterised by I max. - Class 3 (used for final protection), a VSP characterised by a combined wave (voltage 1.2/50; current 8/20) and by Uoc.
Components used in voltage surge protectors VSP are based mainly on the use of 3 types of component. The voltage/time characteristics illustrated by the curves below show 2 operating modes: > voltage breaking
U Spark-over
Spark gap
µs > voltage limiting
U Peak limiting
Variable resistor
µs U Peak limiting
FOR MORE INFORMATION See the on-line catalogue: instructions, technical data sheets, etc.
Zener diode (extremely fragile)
µs 113
Voltage Surge Protectors (continued)
RULES FOR INSTALLING VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS CONNECTING VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS
Connection in parallel
Class 1 and 2 VSP are connected in parallel on the electrical installation. Class 3 VSP can be installed in parallel or in series depending on the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Uimp
S P D
Up Receiver
Phase or neutral terminal block
Connection principles For the voltage surge protector to perform its function as well as possible, it must be installed: - as a tap-off - keeping as short a connection length as possible between the phase-neutral terminal block and the PE or PEN terminal block - in accordance with EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) rules: avoid the use of loops, fix the cables against metal conductive parts
Max. distance: 0.5 m Cross-section: 2 6 mm min (16 mm2 with direct lighting protection)
MCB (VSP protection) VSP
Main terminal block protective conductors
Some wiring configurations can create couplings between the VSP upstream and downstream conductors, which are likely to cause the lightning wave to spread throughout the installation. Ph Ph
N PE
N Ph
N Ph
PE
Upstream and downstream conductors connected on the VSP with a common path
114
PE
Conductors connected on the same terminal but well separated (circuit VSP)
PE
Return conductor from the VSP close to the incoming conductors
Conductors for connecting the VSP kept separate and as short as possible (main VSP)
Standards bodies use the generic term “earthing device” to designate both the concept of equipotential bonding system and that of an earth connection without distinguishing between them. Contrary to received opinion, the value of the earth connection, guaranteed at low frequency to ensure people’s safety, does not have a direct correlation to effectiveness of the protection provided by VSP. As demonstrated below, this type of protection can be established even in the absence of an earth connection. The impedance opposing the flow-to-earth current shunted by the VSP can be broken down into two parts. The first, the earth connection, is formed by the conductors, which are usually wires and by the ground resistance. Its essentially inductive nature means that its effectiveness decreases with the frequency in spite of the wiring precautions taken. The second part of this impedance is less visible but essential at high frequency because it is in fact made up of the stray capacity between the installation and earth. The value of the earth connection low frequency resistance must comply with local installation regulations. There must only be one earth network. Distinct independent circuits (computers, lightning conductor downcomer) should be prohibited, but this does not exclude multiple earth connections (electrodes) if they are all interconnected.
Of course the relative values of each of these components vary according to the type and scale of the installation, the location of the VSP (main or proximity type) and according to the earth connection scheme (neutral earthing system) but it is demonstrated that the voltage surge protector’s share of the discharge current can reach 60 to 90% on the equipotential system whereas the part directly discharged by the earth connection is around 10 to 50%.
TECHNICAL PART
EARTH CONNECTION
The equipotential bonding system is essential to maintain a low reference potential. The VSP should be connected to this bonding system for maximum effectiveness.
SENSITIVITY OF DEVICES The recipe for effective protection using a voltage surge protector should be based on the comparison between the prospective value of the lightning strike dependng on the location and impulse withstand of the equipment to be protected (overvoltage withstand categories). Uimp (kV) Controlled Natural situation(1) situation(2)
Overvoltage category
Equipment type and characteristics
IV
Equipment installed upstream of the switchboard: meter, gauge, fuse carrier and main circuitbreaker, etc
6
4
III
Equipment forming part of the fixed installation: wiring accessories, circuit breakers, socket outlets, trunking, junction boxes, or permanently connected equipment for industrial use: motors, furnaces, etc
4
2.5
II
Everyday equipment designed to be connected: household tools and appliances
2.5
1.5
I
Sensitive equipment with reduced withstand incorporating electronic circuits. Proximity or integrated protection may be desirable
1.5
0.8
(1) Installations where transient overvoltages are reduced
(> Uimp)(by protection on the line itself or at the installation source (eg: protected overhead network). (2) Installations where the risk is naturally low and for which VSP is not usually considered necessary (eg: network entirely underground).
115
Voltage Surge Protectors (continued)
RULES FOR INSTALLING VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS (continued) CONNECTION LENGTH
Class 1
Cross-section (mm2)
Iimp
Capacity
Class 2
In practice we recommend that the total length of the VSP circuit does not exceed 50 cm. This requirement is not always easy to implement, but using the available earths nearby may help to satisfy it.
RECOMMENDED CROSS-SECTIONS FOR CONDUCTORS LINKING VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS
Standard (S)
6
Increased (I)
10
High (H)
10 kA
16
Lightning arrestor
>12.5 kA
16
The 0.5 m rule In theory, when lightning strikes, the voltage Ut applied to the receiver is the same as the protection voltage Up of the VSP (for its In) but in practice the latter is higher. In effect, the voltage dips caused by the connection conductor impedances of the VSP and its protection device are added to this: Ut = UI1 + Ud + UI2 + Up + UI3 By way of example, the voltage dip in 1 m of conductor travelled over by an impulse current 10 kA for 10 µs will reach 1000 V
UI1
Ud Lt
UI2
Ut receiver
Up
di ∆u = L x __ dt UI3 di: current variation 10,000 A dt: time variation 10 µs L: inductance of 1 m of conductor = 1 µs Vaue ∆u to be added to the voltage Up The total length Lt must therefore be as short as possible; in practice we recommend not exceeding 0.5 m. In the event of difficulty, it may be a good idea to use wide, flat conductors (insulated braids, flexible insulated bars).
116
Installation of several VSP allows gradual peak limitng of the overvoltages generated by the lightning. This cascade is essential when the distance between the VSP and the equipment is too great, but also when the level of peak limiting on the main VSP is insufficient, which is the case whenever senstive equipment needs to be protected. For highly sensitive equipment a third level, known as proximity, is even necessary.
Minimum distances between voltage surge protectors in one installation Upstream VSP
Downstream VSP
Distance (in metres)
Lighting arrestor
Increased (I) Standard (S)
8 10
Increased (I)
6
This arrangement of several VSP requires them to be coordinated so that each of them draws the energy in an optimum way and limits spreading of the lightning strike through the installation as much as possible. The coordination of VSP is a complex concept which needs to be the subject of specific studies and tests. Minimum distances between VSP or the interpositioning of decoupling chokes are recommended by manufacturers.
Coordination modules Coordination modules
d VSP in TN system HV / LV Protection Transformer
Metering
Distribution Board
L1 L2 L3 N PE
PEN
> VSP in TT system HV / LV Protection Transformer
Metering
Distribution Board
L1 L2 L3 N
VSP and continuity of service Installing VSP should not harm continuity of service, which would be contrary to the desired aim. They should therefore be installed, especially at the supply end of the domestic or similar installations (TT earthing systems), in accordance with an S type delayed residual current device. One precaution which should not be forgotten is that for significant lightning strikes (> 5 kA).
TECHNICAL PART
PROTECTION UPSTREAM OF THE VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS
I n = type S delayed PE
> VSP in IT system HV / LV Protection Transformer
Metering
Distribution Board
L1 L2 L3
PE
Disconnectors suitable for Legrand VSP See page 129 121
Voltage Surge Protectors (continued)
SETUP (continued) The outline diagram on the facing page represents the general architecture of an installation, its physical levels between the power supply and the application and also the various links to the protective conductors, the exposed conductive parts and the earth. The number of distribution levels has been limited to 3. In practice a larger number can be observed. Remember that this architecture does not differ fundamentally between a very high power installation (industry) and a low power installation (domestic). It is simply the scale and the number of distribution levels which differ. In domestic installations for example, the installation is reduced to a single level. The level called connection designates both HV and LV connection but in fact it is only a question of a legal property limit which does not alter the basic electrical diagram. However, the risk of lightning on the LV link between the transformer and the main distribution level could be very different by reason of its nature: - conductors several hundred metres in length, sometimes overhead, for public distribution - short conductors, usually protected by buildings, in industry or large-scale service industry. Operating circuits (terminals, proximity tables, direct applications) can be supplied directly from the main LV distribution board. These circuits and their devices are therefore subject to more restrictive conditions (Ik, Uimp) than they would be at final distribution level. They must therefore be appropriately protected.
This diagram (facing page) reveals the multiplicity of links with earth and therefore, unfortunately, feedback points due to lightning strikes (EMC, equipotentiality in the switchboards, circuits for protecting people against indirect contacts).
122
Contrary to received opinion, it is not essential to link the VSP to the main earth terminal when it is too far away. Connection to the nearest, most accessible equipotential link is more effective if the 0.5 m rule is adhered to. The minimum recommended cross-section for the connection conductors takes account of the maximum discharge current value and the characteristics of the end of life protection device (DX circuit breakers). It is pointless to increase this cross-section to compensate for a connection distance which is too great. At high frequency, the increase in the conductor impedance is directly linked to their length.
Depending on the activity (EMC sensitivity), the quality or age of the installation; the local equipotential links (solid green line on the diagram) between each distribution board and the surrounding local conductive parts are more or less in place. But although they may be systematically established at main distribution level, this is more rarely the case at final distribution level. These intentional links are often supplemented by unintentional links: - simple contact of devices with the ground (by their fixings, by their physical situation on the machine frame for example) - shielding of data conductors (computing) - exposed conductive part (0 potential) of electronic equipment. In practice the entry points for overvoltages and feedback from earth are innumerable, especially when installations are spread over a wide area. In some cases, lightning conductors can protect buildings which are located electrically on a secondary distribution level. The overvoltage that they create at local ground level would also be more likely to spread to the final circuits.
TECHNICAL PART
Outline diagram of an equipotential bonding system
➀
➁ ➂ ➃
➄
➅ ➆
Example of arrangement of voltage surge protectors used on a large-scale industrial or commercial installation Number in the diagram
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆
Type of VSP With lightning conductor
Without lightning conductor
Possible surge arrester (IT system) installed in the transformer station VSP accompanying a Class 1 lightning conductor
Class 2 high capacity VSP(1) (H) or Class 2 increased capacity VSP(1) (I)
Class 1 VSP (if lightning conductor on separate building powered by a secondary level or distribution) or Class 1/Class 2 high capacity VSP (H)
Class 2 increased capacity VSP(1) (I) or Class 2 standard capacity VSP(1) (S)
Class 2 increased capacity VSP (I)
Class 2 standard capacity VSP(1) (S)
Class 2 standard capacity VSP (S)
Class 2 standard capacity VSP(2) (S)
Proximity VSP(2) on terminals (P)
Proximity VSP(2) on terminals (P)
VSP(2)
incorporated in the receiver
VSP(2) incorporated in the receiver
(1) The types of VSP should be chosen according to the exposure conditions, the nature of the circuits and the installation passive protection (2) Depending on the sensitivity of receivers
123
Voltage Surge Protectors (continued)
PRACTICAL EXAMPLES OF MOUNTING Main installation VSP: the support rail, equipotential because of how it is mounted, can be used for the shortest VSP connection
Elements of the chassis, uprights and steel rails of XL3 enclosures have conductivity which ensures the equipotential continuity required for connection of the VSP terminal block, in this example a 70 kA high capacity model
Increased capacity VSP (40 kA), at the supply end of an industrial control system enclosure: the solid mounting plate (galvanised steel) provides the equipotential bonding and connection to earth
The use of exposed conductive parts for equipotential bonding purposes for VSP must of course be accompanied by precautions for construction and setup. The continuity of the enclosure conductive parts means that they can be used as PE conductors but also for connecting the VSP. It should also be noted than in addition to being easily accessible and allowing the 0.5 m rule to be adhered to, the conductive parts of XL3 enclosures have a much lower high-frequency impedance (typical inductance < 0.01 µH/m) than that of a conductor. Exposed conductive parts on other enclosures than XL3 or rails, especially in aluminium, should not be used for connnecting voltage surge protectors without checking first that they are suitable. In case of doubt, it is then preferable to keep a wire conductor for linking the protective conductors to the terminal block or collector.
124
TECHNICAL PART
PROTECTION OF TELEPHONE LINES When VSP are installed on the low voltage network, it is advisable to add VSP on the telecommunications network.
If electrical installations are referenced to an equipotential bonding system which is itself connected to a local earth, the telephone installations are usually referenced to a “distant earth” whose potential is not influenced by that of the “electrical earth”. During a lightning strike, an overvoltage will appear between the installation conductive parts and the telephone line, creating danger for any telephone user. The risk exists, by the way, irrespective of which network is hit by lightning, telephone or power. The solution therefore consists in extreme cases of galvanically separating the telephone network (special translators) or more simply installing special VSP whose earth terminal should be properly connected to the installation equipotential bonding system.
Legrand VSP Cat. No. 038 28 for analogue lines and Cat. No. 038 29 for digital lines are ideal for use in telephone applications
Distant earth
125
Voltage Surge Protectors (continued)
INSTALLATION OF TELEPHONE VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS Legrand telephone VSP are installed in series.
Installation principles > Digital
> Analogue Cat. No. 038 28 Distributor
DTI
Room Sitting room Hall Kitchen etc
Cat. No. 038 29 Cat. No. 038 29 DNT 110 V Cat. No. 038 29
Digital telephone or fax Visioconference
Cat. No. 038 29
> Analogue or digital
Cat. No. 038 28 DNT 110 V
Analogue line
Cat. No. 038 83
Digital line DNT 110 V Cat. No. 038 29 Cat. No. 038 29
126
Analogue telephone or fax
Digital visioconference
TECHNICAL PART
SOME LOCAL INSTALLATION REGULATIONS In Europe and throughout the world (1), VSP are widely recommended by all the national bodies and electricity suppliers. The familiar local standards and guides to installation are: Recommended values at the source of the installation Country
France
Italy
Spain
Guide
Overheadunderground links without lightning conductor
Class 1 Iimp > 12.5 kA Up < 2.5 kV
Class 2 In > 5 kA Up < 2.5 kV
CEI 81-8
No national obligations in 2005
Class 1 Iimp > 10 kA Up according to the equipment to be protected
Class 2 In > 10 kA Up according to the equipment to be protected
BT-23 (Table A and B)
VSP compulsory if risks to: human or animal life, public equipment, economic, agricultural or industrial activities Recommended in AQ2 zones
Class 1 Recommended, but not compulsory, no min. value required. Consult the manufacturers
Class 2 Compulsory no min. value required in 2005. Consult the manufacturers
Class 1 Iimp > 12.5 kA
Class 2 In > 5 kA
UTE C 15-443
Other countries
(2)
Lightning conductor(2) present on the building
NF C 15-100 Lightning conductor for all zones Overhead lines or overheadunderground lines in AQ2 Zone
Germany
(1)
Level of requirement of national regulations
DIN V VDE V 100 DIN V VDE V 0185 IEC 60364-4-44 IEC 60364-5-53
Refer to pages 108-110 Telecommunication VSP recommended
127
Voltage Surge Protectors (continued)
CHARACTERISTICS OF LEGRAND VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS VSP FOR POWER LINES
Cat. No. Mains supply
Lightning arrestor
High capacity (H)
039 10
039 20/21/22/23
230/400 V
Neutral earthing system Max. steady state voltage (Uc)
TT, TN, IT
TT, TN
440 V
320 V
wave 8/20 µs
1/2 70 kA
12.5 kA
10 kA
Common mode
1.8 kV - 20 kA 1.3 kV - 5 kA
2 kV - 20 kA 1.5 kV - 5 kA
1.8 kV - 15 kA 1.3 kV - 5 kA
440 V
Leakage current at Uc (Ic)
4 kA 4 kA < 1 mA Zero
Response time
25 ns
Environment
1.4 kV - 15 kA 1.2 kV - 5 kA
20 kA
Follower current (Is)
Rigid conductor
25 mm2
Flexible conductor with cable end
16 mm2
Degree of protection
15 kA
400 V
320 V 440 V
128
40 kA
wave 10/350 µs
260 V
Max. terminal capacity
039 40/41/43
110/230 V
1
Withstand to temporary overvoltages Ut
Ik at Uc (C20-C40)
039 35/36/38
50/60 Hz
Class
Level of protection Up - In
039 30/31/33
110/230/400 V
Frequency
I max
Standard capacity (S)
Increased capacity (I)
IP 20 installation in an enclosure
Operating temperature
-10°C to +40°C
Storage temperature
-20°C to + 70°C
Standard capacity 5/15 kA class 2 Uc = 320 V
Increased capacity 15/40 kA class 2 Uc = 320 V
Increased capacity 15/40 kA class 2 Uc = 440 V
TT*
TN
C 20 A
C 20 A F 40 A gG (14 x 51)
C 20 A
C 20 A
TECHNICAL PART
TELEPHONE VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS
DISCONNECTORS FOR USE IN ASSOCIATION** IT without neutral
Nominal voltage
Digital 038 29
170 V
48 V
Maximum discharge current (Imax)
C 20 A F 125 A gG (22 x 58) or C 40 A C 20 A F 125 A gG (22 x 58) or C 40 A
Analogue 038 28
Protection level (UP) Terminal capacity flexible/rigid C 20 A F 125 A gG (22 x 58) or C 40 A
High capacity 20/70 kA class 1/2 Uc = 440 V
C 40 A
C 40 A F 160 A gG (T00)
C 40 A F 160 A gG (T00)
Lightning arrestor 12.5 kA class 1 Uc = 440 V
C 40 A
C 40 A F 160 A gG (T00)
C 40 A F 160 A gG (T00)
Degree of protection
10 kA 300 V
100 V 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 IP 20
Operating temperature
- 10°C to + 40°C
Storage temperature
- 20°C to + 70°C
* Cartridge fuses prohibited ** DX, DX-H, DX-L depending on short circuit current in use
129
Isolation
Designed to separate an installation or part of an installation electrically, the purpose of isolation is to ensure the safety of people working on the installation
Find the complete offer on page 200
130
A switching device providing the isolation function must be installed: - at the source of any installation - at the source of each circuit or group of circuits The isolator must break all the live conductors (including the neutral). In contrast, the PE and PEN conductors must not be broken. The devices which perform isolation may be isolators, isolating switches, circuit-breakers, socket outlets, fuse carriers, isolating blades, disconnect terminals or any other device which
TECHNICAL PART
ISOLATION ensures a minimum contact opening distance of: - 4 mm for 230/400 V voltage - 8 mm for 400/690 V voltage - 11 mm for 1000 V voltage For double break devices the distances should be multiplied by 1.25.
Isolation does not on its own ensure that the installation is made safe. Appropriate methods should be employed to prevent any unwanted re-energizing (padlocking, signs, locked rooms, earthing) and put the installation out of use.
Isolation with positive contact indication This characteristic is checked by reliable interlocking between the position of the contacts and that of the control switch handle. The indication “I” or “O” (red or green) on the handle thus guarantees the actual contact position.
Isolation with visible contact indication The actual position of the separate contacts is directly visible. Visible contact indication can be obtained by means of a display window (Vistop, DPX-IS) or by using plug-in or draw-in devices (DPX, DMX-E).
Legrand solutions
DPX-IS 250
DPX-IS 630
Full load switch unit: used for emergency breaking and isolation
Draw-out DPX 630
131
Isolation
CONNECTING VISTOP UNITS Maximum capacities for each pole Connection
Busbars
Conductors
Copper terminals
Aluminium terminals
standard
compact
standard
compact
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
150-10
195-10
150-12
195-10
95-10
195-10
95-12
195-10
Cross-section (mm2)
Mode
63 - 100 - 125 - 160 A for rail fixing
flexible
12
70
50
6 x 35
6 x 25
227 78/79 Plate connection box
30
227 80/81 Cage connection box
18
20 Direct on plate
132
rigid
048 67 Distribution terminal
160
VISTOP
Direct in cage terminal
Width (mm)
185
150
CONNECTING DPX-IS UNITS Connection
Busbars
Conductors
Copper terminals
TECHNICAL PART
Maximum capacities for each pole Aluminium terminals
standard
compact
standard
compact
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
S - Ø (mm2 - mm)
150-12
300-10
240-12
300-10
50
2 x 185-12
2 x 300-10
2 x 185-12
2 x 300-12
32
2 x 300-16
2 x 300-16
50
300 - 14
300 - 16
Cross-section (mm2)
Mode
Width (mm)
rigid
flexible
32
250
DPX-IS
Direct on plate
262 60 Cage terminal
25
300
240
262 48/49 Spreaders
Direct on plate
630
DPX-IS
263 50/51 Rear terminals with screws
2 x 240
262 69 Terminal for 2 conductors
300 - 16
2 x 185
80
4 x 300 - 14
4 x 300 - 16
4 x 300 - 14
50
4 x 300 - 14
4 x 300 - 16
4 x 300 - 14
50
300 - 14
300 - 16
1600
DPX-IS
262 73/74 Spreaders
263 80/82 Rear terminals
Direct on plate
133
Distribution
Protection and switching of operating circuits are the basic functions of a distribution panel. But upstream there is another function, possibly more discreet, but just as essential: distribution.
Find the complete offer on page 240
134
TECHNICAL PART
Depending on the intensity used, distribution is achieved by distribution blocks (up to 400 A) and sets of busbars (usually above 250 A).
The selection and setup of distribution equipment call for an approach combining product selection (number of outputs, conductor types and cross-sections, connection method) and checking operating conditions (permissible current, short-circuit level, isolation, etc) in multiple configurations.
Distribution can be defined as the supply of a number of physically separate and individually protected circuits from a single circuit
I
Upstream protection device
Distribution
Downstream protection devices
I1
I2
I3
I4
135
Distribution BUSBARS DETERMINING THE CONDUCTOR CROSS-SECTION
Current according to standard IEC 60947-1
The required cross-section of the bars is determined according to the operating current, the IP protection class of the enclosure and after checking the short-circuit thermal stress. The currents are named according to the definitions in standard IEC 60947-1 applied to the usual operating conditions for a temperature rise ∆t of the bars which does not exceed 65 °C.
Ie: rated operating current to be taken into consideration in enclosures with natural ventilation or in panels which have protection class IP < 30. Ithe: thermal current in enclosure corresponding to the most severe installation conditions. Weatherproof enclosures do not allow natural renewal of the air. The IP protection class is > 30.
Parallel bars The permissible current in n bars is less than n times the permissible current in one bar. By way of example, use n = 1.6 to 1.8 for a group of 2 bars, n = 2.2 to 2.4 for 3 bars and n = 2.7 to 2.9 for 4 bars. The wider the bars, the more this coefficient is affected, the more difficult they are to cool and the higher the mutual inductance effects. The permissible current density is not therefore constant: it is approximately 3 A/mm2 for small bars and drops to 1 A/mm2 for groups of large bars.
Rigid bars on supports Cat. Nos. 373 15/21, Cat. Nos. 373 20/22 and Cat. Nos. 374 14/53
Rigid flat copper bars - edgewise mounting
136
le(A) IP30
Ithe(A) IP >30
Cat. No.
Dimensions (mm)
I2t (A2s)
Icw1s (A)
110
80
373 88
12 x 2
1,2 x 107
3430
160
125
373 89
12 x 4
4,7 x 107
6865
200
160
374 33
15 x 4
7,4 x 107
8580
250
200
374 34
18 x 4
1 x 108
10295
280
250
374 38
25 x 4
2,1 x 108
14300
330
270
374 18
25 x 5
3,2 x 108
17875
450
400
374 19
32 x 5
5,2 x 108
22900
700
630
374 40
50 x 5
1,1 x 109
33750
1150
1000
374 40
2 x (50 x 5)
4,5 x 109
67500
800
700
374 41
63 x 5
1,8 x 109
42500
1350
1150
374 41
2 x (63 x 5)
7,2 x 109
85000
950
850
374 59
75 x 5
2,5 x 109
50600
1500
1300
374 59
2 x (75 x 5)
1 x 1010
101000
1000
900
374 43
80 x 5
2,9 x 109
54000
1650
1450
374 43
2 x (80 x 5)
1,2 x 1010
108000
1200
1050
374 46
100 x5
4,5 x 109
67500
1900
1600
374 46
2 x (100 x 5)
1,8 x 1010
135000
Rigid flat copper bars - edgewise mounting le(A) IP30 Ithe(A) IP >30 700 1180 1600 2020 800 1380 1900 2350 950 1600 2200 2700 1000 1700 2350 2850 1200 2050 2900 3500 1450 2500 3450 4150 1750 3050 4200 5000
630 1020 1380 1720 700 1180 1600 1950 850 1400 1900 2300 900 1480 2000 2400 1050 1800 2450 2900 1270 2150 2900 3450 1500 2450 3300 3800
Number
Dimensions (mm)
I2t (A2s)
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
50 x 5 50 x 5 50 x 5 50 x 5 63 x 5 63 x 5 63 x 5 63 x 5 75 x 5 75 x 5 75 x 5 75 x 5 80 x 5 80 x 5 80 x 5 80 x 5 100 x 5 100 x 5 100 x 5 100 x 5 125 x 5 125 x 5 125 x 5 125 x 5 160 x 5(1) 160 x 5(1) 160 x 5(1) 160 x 5(1)
1.14 x 109 4.56 x 109 1.03 x 1010 1.82 x 1010 1.81 x 109 7.23 x 109 1.63 x 1010 2.89 x 1010 2.56 x 109 1.03 x 1010 2.31 x 1010 4.10 x 1011 2.92 x 109 1.17 x 1010 2.62 x 1010 4.67 x 1010 4.56 x 109 1.82 x 1010 4.10 x 1010 7.29 x 1010 7.12 x 109 2.85 x 1010 6.41 x 1010 1.14 x 1011 1.17 x 1010 4.67 x 1010 1.05 x 1011 1.87 x 1011
TECHNICAL PART
Rigid bars on supports Cat. Nos. 373 24 and 374 54
Rigid flat copper bars - edgewise mounting le(A) IP30 Ithe(A) IP >30 950 1680 2300 1150 2030 2800 1460 2500 3450 1750 3050 4150 2000 3600 4800
850 1470 2030 1020 1750 2400 1270 2150 2900 1500 2550 3500 1750 2920 4000
Number
Dimensions (mm)
I2t (A2s)
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
50 x 10 50 x 10 50 x 10 60 x 10 60 x 10 60 x 10 80 x 10 80 x 10 80 x 10 100 x 10 100 x 10 100 x 10 120 x 10 120 x 10 120 x 10
4.56 x 109 1.82 x 1010 4.10 x 1010 6.56 x 109 2.62 x 1010 5.90 x 1010 1.17 x 1010 4.67 x 1010 1.05 x 1011 1.82 x 1010 7.29 x 1010 1.64 x 1011 2.62 x 1010 1.05 x 1011 2.36 x 1011
Positioning of the groups of bars
(1) needs stainless steel threaded assembly rod, diameter 8 , to be supplied separately and cut to length
Bars mounted edgewise on vertical busbars
or horizontal on supports Cat. No. 374 54 in horizontal position Supports Cat. Nos. 373 24 are used to create very high current busbars: up to 4000 A in an enclosure 137
Distribution (continued) BUSBARS (continued) Rigid flat copper bars - flatwise mounting
Rigid flat copper bars - flatwise mounting
le(A) IP 30
Ithe(A) IP >30
Number per pole
Dimensions (mm)
le(A) IP 30
Ithe(A) IP >30
Number per pole
Dimensions (mm)
500 750 1000 1120 600 750 1100 1350 700 1000 1250 1600 750 1050 1300 1650 850 1200 1600 1900 1000 1450 1800 2150 1150 1650 2000 2350
420 630 900 1000 500 630 1000 1200 600 850 1100 1400 630 900 1150 1450 700 1050 1400 1650 800 1250 1600 1950 900 1450 1800 2150
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
50 x 5 50 x 5 50 x 5 50 x 5 63 x 5 63 x 5 63 x 5 63 x 5 75 x 5 75 x 5 75 x 5 75 x 5 80 x 5 80 x 5 80 x 5 80 x 5 100 x 5 100 x 5 100 x 5 100 x 5 125 x 5 125 x 5 125 x 5 125 x 5
880 1250 2000 1000 1600 2250 1150 1370 2500 1350 2000 2900 1650
650 1050 1600 800 1250 1850 950 1650 2000 1150 1650 2400 1450
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1
50 x 10 50 x 10 50 x 10 60 x 10 60 x 10 60 x 10 80 x 10 80 x 10 80 x 10 100 x 10 100 x 10 100 x 10 120 x 10
Positioning of the groups of bars Bars mounted flatwise in horizontal busbars on supports Cat. No. 374 54 in vertical position
160 x 5(1) 160 x 5(1) 160 x 5(1) 160 x 5(1)
(1) needs stainless steel threaded assembly rod, diameter 8, to be supplied separately and cut to length
Orientation of the bars Positioning bars edgewise encourages heat dissipation and is much the best option. If the bars have to be positioned flatwise, and therefore with the supports in a vertical position, the permissible currents must be reduced.
138
Simply rotate the isolating supports to take 5 mm or 10 mm thick bars
TECHNICAL PART
Supports Cat. No. 374 54
1 to 4 bars, 5 mm thick, per pole
1 to 3 bars, 10 mm thick, per pole
It is also necessary to check that the permisible thermal stress per bar is higher than that limited by the protection device.
DETERMINING THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE SUPPORTS The distance between the supports is determined according to the electrodynamic stress generated by the short-circuit. The forces exerted between the bars during a short-circuit are proportional to the peak value of the short-circuit current.
Value of the peak current (Ipk) The limited peak current is determined from the characteristics of the protection device. It represents the maximum (peak) value limited by this device. In the absence of a limiting protection device, the prospective peak value can be calculated from the prospective short-circuit current and an asymmetry cœfficient.
Rms value of the prospective short-circuit current (Ik) This is the prospective maximum value of the current which would circulate during a short-circuit if there were no protection device. It depends on the type and power of the supply. The actual short-circuit current will usually be lower, given the impedance of the electrical trunking.
Isc Prospective peak Isc
Prospective Isc
Prospective rms Isc Limited peak Isc Limited Isc
t
139
Distribution (continued) BUSBARS (continued) Limiting protection device
Non-limiting protection device
The limiting curves for the protection devices (DX and DPX) give the limited peak current according to the prospective short-circuit current. The non-limited peak Isc curve corresponds to no protection.
When the set of busbars is protected by a nonlimiting device, the maximum value of the peak current is developed during the first half-period of the short-circuit.
Peak Isc (kÂ)
N
l on
im
ite
Limited peak Isc
d
a pe
kI
Value of asymmetrical first peak
sc
Peak Isc
Rms value of Isc
Limitation curve
Time
Prospective Isc
rms Isc (kA)
The table below gives the limited peak value (Ipk) directly for the maximum prospective short-circuit value equal to the breaking capacity (Icu) of the device. For lower prospective short-circuit values, read the curves to find an optimised value.
140
Device
Rating (A)
Max. peak Isc (kÂ)
DPX 125 DPX 125 DPX 125 DPX 160 DPX 160 DPX 250 ER DPX 250 DPX-H 250 DPX 630 DPX-H 630 DPX 1600 DPX-H 1600
16-25 40-63 100-125 25 40 to 160 100 to 250 40 to 250 40 to 250 250 to 630 250 to 630 630 to 1600 630 to 1600
11.9 15 17 14.3 20 22 27 34 34 42 85 110
We then talk of an asymmetrical 1st peak. The relationship between the peak value and the rms value of the prospective short-circuit current is defined by the asymmetry coefficient n: peak Isc (Ipk) = n x prospective rms Isc
Prospective rms Isc (kA)
n
≤5
1.5
5 ≤ 1 = 10
1.7
10 ≤ 1 = 20
2
20 ≤ 1 = 50
2.1
50 < 1
2.2
The tables appearing below can be used to determine the maximum distances D (in mm) between the supports, and thus create sets of busbars, based on the required Ipk value. The shorter this distance D between the supports, the higher the permissible Isc. With single pole supports, it is also possible to vary the spacing between the bars E (in mm). The greater the spacing between the bars, the higher the permissible Isc.
The distance D’ after the last support must always be less than 30% of the distance D
TECHNICAL PART
Practical determination of the distances between the supports according to the peak current (Ipk)
D D'
D
FOR MORE INFORMATION E
See the on-line catalogue: instructions, technical data sheets, etc.
141
Distribution (continued)
Maximum distance “D” (in mm) for single pole supports (E adjustable)
Supports 373 98 Bars
373 88 (12 x 2) or 373 89 (12 x 4)
E (mm) Peak Isc (Ipk in kA)
Supports 374 37
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80
50
75
100
400
600
800
300 250 200
450 350 250
600 450 300
125 800 600 400
Supports 373 10
374 33 (15 x 4) or 374 34 (18 x 4) or 374 38 (25 x 4) 50
75
100
350
600
750
250 150 125 100
400 225 150 125 100
500 300 200 150 125
374 34 (18 x 4)
125 700 375 250 175 150
374 18 (25 x 5)
Bars Peak Isc (Ipk in kA)
142
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80
373 88 (12 x 2)
373 89 (12 x 4)
200 150 125 100
400 300 200 150
374 33/34 (15 x 4) (18 x 4) 550 400 300 200 150 100
83
83
55
600
650
300 250 200 150
400 300 250 200
500 350 300 250
600 400 350 300
500 400 350 300
600 500 400 350
125 100
150 125 100
200 150 125 100
250 200 150 125 100
250 200 150 100
300 250 200 150 100
Supports 373 15 374 32
373 96
55
55 500
Maximum distance “D” (in mm) for multipole supports (E fixed)
Supports
83
374 19 (32 x 5)
374 36 374 38 (25 x 4)
374 34 (18 x 4)
374 18 (25 x 5)
374 19 (32 x 5)
650 500 400 350 200 150 100
1 000 700 550 400 350
1 200 1 000 750 600 500
1 500 1 200 950 750 650
250 200 200 150 150
350 300 250 200 200
450 400 300 250 250
700
TECHNICAL PART
Maximum distance “D” (in mm) for multipole supports Cat. Nos. 374 53 (E fixed: 75 mm)
Supports 373 22 and 374 53
2 bars per pole
1 bar per pole Bars
Peak Isc (Ipk in kÂ)
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
374 40
374 41
374 59
374 43
374 46
374 40
374 41
374 59
374 43
374 46
(50 x 5)
(63 x 5)
(75 x 5)
(80 x 5)
(100 x 5)
(50 x 5)
(63 x 5)
(75 x 5)
(80 x 5)
(100 x 5)
1000
1200
1200
1200
1200
800 650 500 400 350 300 300 250 200 150 100 100 100 100 100
900 700 600 500 450 350 300 250 250 200 150 150 150 100 100
1000 750 600 550 450 400 350 300 250 250 200 200 150 150 100
1000 750 600 550 450 400 350 300 250 250 200 200 150 150 100
1200 900 700 600 550 450 400 350 300 250 200 200 150 150 100
700
800
550
600
650
650
700
450 350 250 250 200 200 200 150
500 400 350 300 250 200 150 150
500 400 350 300 300 250 200 200
500 400 350 300 300 250 200 200
550 450 400 300 300 250 200 200
Maximum distance “D” (in mm) for multipole supports Cat. Nos. 374 56 and 374 14 (E fixed: 75 mm)
Supports 373 21
Supports 373 20
1 flat bar per pole
1 C-section bar per pole Bars
Peak Isc (Ipk in kÂ)
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
1 flat bar per pole
374 60
374 61
374 62
374 40
374 41
374 59
374 42
374 34
374 18
374 19
374 40
374 41
155 mm2
265 mm2
440 mm2
(50 x 5)
(63 x 5)
(75 x 5)
(80 x 5)
(18 x 4)
(25 x 5)
(32 x 5)
(50 x 5)
(63 x 5)
1100
1600
1600
1100
1200
1200
1200
800
800
900
800 600 450 400 350 300 300 250 200 150
1000 800 650 550 450 400 350 300 300 250 200 200 150 150 150
1300 1000 800 700 600 550 500 450 400 350 300 250 250 200 200
800 650 500 400 350 300 300 250 200 150 100 100 100 100 100
900 700 600 500 450 350 300 250 250 200 150 150 150 100 100
1000 750 800 550 450 400 350 300 250 200 200 200 150 150 100
1000 750 800 550 450 400 350 300 250 200 200 200 150 150 100
400 300 250 225 200 175 150 150 125 100
600 450 350 300 250 200 200 150 125 100
600 500 400 350 300 250 200 150 125 100
700 600 500 400 350 275 225 200 150 150 100
800 700 550 450 400 300 250 200 150 150 100
143
Distribution (continued) Maximum distance “D” (in mm) for multipole supports Cat. Nos. 373 24 and 374 54 with 5 mm thick copper bars
Supports Cat. Nos. 373 24 and 374 54 1 bar per pole Bars Peak Isc (Ipk in kÂ)
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180
50 x 5
63 x 5
1550 1050 800 650 550 450 400 350 350 300 250
1700 1200 900 750 600 550 450 400 350 300 250 250
50 x 5
63 x 5
1700 1700 1550 1250 1050 900 800 700 650 550 450 400 350 350 300 300 250 250 250
1700 1700 1700 1450 1200 1050 900 800 750 600 550 450 400 400 350 300 300 250 250 250 250
75 x 5 80 x 5 1700 1350 1000 800 700 600 550 450 450 350 300 250 250
2 bars per pole 100 x 5
125 x 5
1700 1550 1150 950 800 650 600 550 500 400 350 300 250 250 250
1700 1700 1350 1100 900 800 700 600 550 450 400 350 300 300 250 250 250
100 x 5
125 x 5
1700 1700 1700 1700 1550 1300 1150 1050 950 800 700 600 550 500 450 400 350 350 350 300 300 300 250 250 250 250
1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1500 1300 1200 1050 900 750 700 600 550 500 450 450 400 350 350 350 300 300 300 250 250
Bars Peak Isc (Ipk in kÂ)
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180
50 x 5
63 x 5
1700 1550 1200 950 800 700 600 550 500 400 350 300 300 250 250
1700 1700 1350 1100 900 800 700 600 550 450 400 350 300 300 250 250
50 x 5
63 x 5
1700 1700 1700 1550 1300 1150 1000 900 800 650 600 500 450 400 350 350 300 300 300 250 250 250 250
1700 1700 1700 1700 1500 1250 1100 1000 900 750 650 600 500 450 450 400 350 350 300 300 300 250 250 250 250
3 bars per pole Bars Peak Isc (Ipk in kÂ)
144
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220
75 x 5 80 x 5 1700 1700 1700 1600 1350 1150 1050 900 850 700 600 550 500 450 400 350 350 300 300 250 250 250 250
75 x 5 80 x 5
100 x 5
125 x 5
1700 1700 1700 1400 1150 1000 900 800 700 600 500 450 400 350 350 300 300 250 250 250
1700 1700 1700 1550 1300 1150 1000 900 800 700 650 550 500 500 450 450 400 400 350 350 350 300
75 x 5 80 x 5
100 x 5
125 x 5
1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1450 1300 1150 1050 850 750 650 600 550 500 450 400 400 350 350 300 300 300 250 250 250
1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1650 1450 1300 1150 1000 850 750 650 600 550 550 500 450 400 400 350 350 300 300 250 250
1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1650 1450 1350 1100 950 850 750 700 600 550 550 500 450 350 300 300 250 250 200 200
1700 1700 1500 1200 1000 900 800 700 650 550 450 400 350 300 300 250 250 250
4 bars per pole Bars Peak Isc (Ipk in kÂ)
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220
1 bar per pole
Bars Peak Isc (Ipk in kÂ)
Supports Cat. Nos. 373 24 and 374 54
2 bars per pole
Bars Peak Isc (Ipk in kÂ)
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250
80 x 10 1700 1700 1700 1700 1500 1350 1200 1000 900 750 700 600 550 550 500 450 450 400 350 350 350 300 300 300 300 250 250
100 x 10 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1550 1400 1150 1000 900 800 700 650 600 550 500 500 450 450 400 400 350 350 350 300 300 300
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250
80 x 10
100 x10
120 x 10
1700 1600 1350 1150 1050 900 850 700 600 550 500 450 400 350 350 300 300 250 250 250 250 200 200
1700 1700 1550 1300 1150 1050 950 800 700 600 550 500 450 400 350 350 350 300 300 300 250 250 250 250 200
1700 1700 1700 1450 1300 1150 1050 850 750 650 600 550 500 450 400 400 350 350 300 300 300 300 250 250 250 200 200
3 bars per pole
Bars 120 x 10 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1550 1300 1100 1000 900 800 750 650 600 600 550 500 500 450 450 400 350 300 300 250 250
Peak Isc (Ipk in kÂ)
TECHNICAL PART
Maximum distance “D” (in mm) for multipole supports Cat. Nos. 373 24 and 374 54 with 10 mm thick copper bars
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250
80 x 10 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1600 1350 1150 1000 900 850 750 700 650 600 550 550 500 500 450 450 400 350 300 300 250
100 x 10 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1550 1300 1150 1050 900 800 750 700 650 650 600 500 450 400 400 350 300 300 250 250
120 x 10 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1500 1300 1100 950 800 750 700 650 600 500 500 450 400 400 350 300 300 250 250
145
Distribution (continued) BUSBARS (continued) CHECKING THE INSULATION CHARACTERISTICS Insulation voltage Ui
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp
This must be the same as or higher than the maximum value of the rated operating voltage for the assembly, or the reference voltage. The latter depends on the mains supply voltage and the structure of the supply (star, delta, with or without neutral).
This value characterises the permissible overvoltage level in the form of a voltage wave representative of a lightning strike. Its value (in kV) depends on the mains voltage, but also on where it is placed in the installation. It is highest at the installation source.
Insulation characteristics for busbar supports (Degree of pollution 3)
Cat. No.
373 98
374 37
373 96
374 32
374 36
373 10
374 14
374 53
373 21
374 54
Ui (V)
500
500
690
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
Uimp (kV)
8
8
8
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
All the recommendations relating to insulation are defined by international standard IEC 60664-1 “Insulation coordination in low-voltage systems (networks)”. They are also found in standards IEC 60439-1 and IEC 60947-1.
146
Legrand busbar supports are designed and tested for the harshest operating conditions corresponding to the highest overvoltage risks. The value Uimp characterises this safety requirement.
The magnetic effects associated with busbars can be separated into transient effects, which are the short-circuit electrodynamic forces, and permanent effects created by induction due to circulation of high currents. The effects of induction have several consequences. • Increased impedance in the conductors due to the effects of mutual inductance
• Temperature rise linked to magnetic saturation of materials in the field around the conductors
TECHNICAL PART
MAGNETIC EFFECTS ASSOCIATED WITH BUSBARS - 50 cm for devices with limited sensitivity (secondary MCBs, including RCDs, relays, contactors, transformers, etc) - 1 m for sensitive devices (electronics and digital metering equipment, systems with a bus, remote controls, electronic switches, etc) - Devices which are very sensitive to magnetic fields (analogue gauge, meters, oscillographs, cathode ray tubes, etc) may require greater separation distances.
Supports on aluminium crosspieces to prevent the formation of a magnetic field.
• Possible interference in sensitive devices for which minimum recommended cohabitation distances must be observed. Non-magnetic stainless steel screws have the same function on supports Cat. No. 374 54.
If very high power busbars are being used and there are no manufacturer instructions, the minimum distances should be increased to: - 30 cm for devices with very little sensitivity (fuses, non residual current devices, connections, MCCBs, etc)
147
Distribution (continued) THE XL-PART SYSTEM
Capable of supplying and distributing power up to 1600 A, XL-Part concentrates functions, multiplies innovations and is undoubtedly the most
XL-Part column chassis and active backplate XL-Part C-section columns are used to distribute the current directly to the DPX support bases: this solution divides the connection points by two and optimises the use of space in the enclosure.
homogenous solution for distributing power in industry and commercial situations. A simple yet effective solution
Power supply unit
which optimises the quality
Direct or indirect, from the top or the bottom… with the XL-Part column chassis, the power supply can be used in any configuration for connecting conductors.
and speed of installation.
Support bases for DPX The new XL-Part bases are used both to distribute current and fix MCCBs. With plug-in and draw-out versions, connection of the outputs (or inputs) is made by the base itself.
Row distribution blocks 400 and 250 A Fully complementary to C-section columns, XL-Part row distribution blocks are used to supply and distribute power up to 400 A, with bases designed to take and associate DPX, DX and Lexic wiring accessories.
148
TECHNICAL PART
N L1 L2 L 3
L3 L2 L1 N
149
Distribution (continued)
DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS The distribution block is a prefabricated device. It is therefore sized to suit its rated current and, unlike sets of busbars, does not require manufacturing definitions. In contrast, the diversity of distribution blocks according to their capacity, their connection mode and their installation calls for careful selection while adhering to precise standards-based rules. Phase balancing is also done at distribution level. The Legrand range of distribution blocks, both vast and diverse, can satisfy any requirement.
Permissible short-circuit value • The value Icw characterises the conventional permissible current for 1 s from the point of view of thermal stress. • The value Ipk characterises the maximum permissible peak current for the distribution block. This value must be higher than that limited by the upstream protection device for the prospective short-circuit.
CHARACTERISTICS OF DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS
Legrand distribution blocks are designed to have resistance to thermal stress at least as high as that of the conductor on the crosssection corresponding to the nominal current, which means that no other checks are usually necessary.
With universality as their watchword, distribution blocks are suitable for all types of application.
Rated current Often called nominal current (In), this should be chosen according to the current of the upstream device or the power supply conductor crosssection. As a general rule, use a distribution block with the same current as or immediately above that of the main device (It), ensuring that the sum of the distributed circuit currents is not higher than the nominal current (In) of the distribution block.
Type
Cat. No.
I2
or
150
Legrand distribution blocks are designed and tested for the harshest operating conditions corresponding to the highest overvoltage risks. The value Uimp characterises this safety requirement.
Insulation values for Legrand distribution blocks
It
I1
Insulation value
I3
I4
Term. Modular Extra-plats blocks Lexiclic Stepped distribution blocks distribution distribution 40/100 A blocks blocks IP 2 x 374 42 048 79/80/ 048 70/ 374 30/31 370 08 spacing 048 XX 81/82/83/84/ 374 47 374 00 74/75 374 35 50 mm 75 mm 85/86/88
Ui (V)
400
660
500
500
1000
1000
1000
1500
1000
Uimp (kV)
8
8
8
8
12
12
8
12
12
The various distribution blocks
Direct connection The conductors are directly connected in the terminals without any special preparation. Use of a ferrule (such as StarfixTM) is recommended for the flexible conductors connected in butt terminals and for external flexible cables which may be subject to pulling.
It is the actual installation and previously described characteristics: rated current, withstand to short-circuits, insulation values, number and capacities of outputs, connection method, that allow you to determine the most suitable choice of distribution block.
TECHNICAL PART
Connection method
Connection via terminals Type of connection normally used for conductors with a large cross-section. It is characterised by excellent mechanical withstand, excellent electrical reliability and its ease of connection/disconnection.
Possible installations for distribution blocks Distribution block
Device
Upstream device
Distribution block
Distribution block
Downstream device
Distribution block
Upstream device Distribution block Downstream device
Downstream device
Distribution block
At the supply end or on the panel output for connecting incoming or outgoing conductors (connection box)
Upstream device
Directly on the output of an upstream device (output terminal)
Directly on the input of downstream devices (supply busbar, Lexiclic)
Independently of the upstream and downstream devices with the need to connect the input and outputs
Directly on the output of the upstream device and on the input of downstream devices, with no wiring and incorporating the actual device fixing mechanisms. It is the most successful concept: XL-Part
151
Distribution (continued) DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS (continued) Lexic supply busbars
XL-Part row distribution blocks
1, 2, 3 or 4-pole supply busbars are used, by direct connection, to supply power to Lexic modular devices up to 90 A. They represent a flexible solution, which takes up very little space and can be adapted to provide distribution in rows.
Active supports used for supplying and distributing power in rows up to 400 A.
Possibility of adding supply busbars on top of or underneath Lexic devices to suit all local customs
Independent distribution terminal blocks Totally universal in their application, this type of terminal block can be used to distribute up to 100 A on between 4 and 33 outputs depending on the catalogue number. The incoming cross-section is between 4 and 25 mm2, and that of the outputs between 4 and 16 mm2. These terminal blocks are fixed on a flat 12 x 2 bar or on a 3 rail.
Possibility of direct and indirect power supply
Distribution terminals These single pole distribution blocks are fixed directly in the output terminals of devices DPX 125, 160, 250 ER, 250, DPX-IS 250 and modular Vistop from 63 to 160 A. They are used for direct, simplified distribution for panels where the number of main circuits is limited.
6 outputs 35 mm2 rigid (25 mm2 flexible) for the output terminal Cat. No. 048 67
By associating IP 2x terminal blocks with a support Cat. No. 048 10, you can create a 2P, 3P or 4P distribution block 152
Stepped distribution blocks
These combine compactness and high connection capacity. They are fixed by clipping onto TH 35-15 rails. Legrand modular distribution blocks are totally isolated: they are used at the supply end of the panel up to 250 A or in subgroups of outputs in panels with a higher power rating.
These exist in a catalogue version, complete and fully-assembled from 125 to 400 A and in their modular version (bars and supports to be ordered separately) can be used to create customised distribution.
TECHNICAL PART
Modular distribution blocks
Distribution block 250 A (Cat. No. 374 35) Modular distribution block 160 A Cat. No. 048 87 total isolation of each pole
2-pole distribution block equipped with an additional terminal block
Extra-flat distribution blocks Their shorter dimensions and their permissible currents means that the same panel can manage the power requirements for the supply end (up to 250 A) combined with the compactness of modular rows in slim panels.
Connection boxes Designed to form the interface between the large cross-section conductors coming into the panel, including some in aluminium, and the internal wiring conductors. Two models - 120 mm2/70 mm2 (Cat. No. 374 80) - 300 mm2/185 mm2 (Cat. No. 374 81) are available. They can also be used for operating circuits (outputs) in aluminium or when the line lengths make large cross-sections compulsory.
Power, capacity to connect to cables with large cross-sections and compactness are the key benefits of extra-flat distribution blocks 153
3
XL
enclosures
More than just an extensive offer, XL3 (new system of wall-mounting, floor-standing enclosures and distribution equipment), brings you freedom to create your assemblies: choose your distribution equipment, the finish and how you work.
Find the complete offer on page 248
154
TECHNICAL PART
THE XL3 RANGE This range offers you total freedom when choosing your solutions. It consists of “ready to use” wall-mounting and floor-standing extendable enclosures.
XL3 160 enclosures XL3 160 enclosures are delivered “ready to use”. They enable any configuration to be created, with or without a connection panel. They are easy to connect and are ideal for all installations (surface mounting and flush mounting solutions). XL3 160 enclosures, capacity 24 modules, are available in 3 versions: › metal › class II insulated › flush mounting
XL3 400 wall-mounting and floor-standing enclosures These are fully extendable. They provide strong housing for distribution assemblies, and their ingenious innovations (functional uprights, 2-position rails) make them easy to install. XL3 400 enclosures have capacity for 24 modules and are supplied with side panels, roof, base, and functional uprights, etc Wall-mounting enclosures are available in 3 versions: › metal › class II insulated › IP 55 metal Floor-standing enclosures are supplied with a plinth and are available in: › metal IP 43 and IP 55
XL3 800 wall-mounting and floor-standing enclosures The XL3 800 range provides extendable modular solutions up to 800 A. It provides strong housing for distribution assemblies. The modular solution enables partial doors to be fitted. XL3 800 wall-mounting and floor-standing enclosures have: › capacity for 24 or 36 modules per row › heights 1050 to 1950 mm which take or are associated with cable sleeves.
155
XL3
enclosures FREEDOM TO DISTRIBUTE HOW YOU WISH The new XL3 range allows you to choose the type of distribution you want:
“Standard” distribution
FREEDOM TO CHOOSE THE FINISH Faceplates 1/4 turn closing with sealable handle for XL3 160 to 800 wall-mounting and floor-standing enclosures.
This is made up of: - busbar supports - distribution blocks - terminal blocks - supply busbars
XL-Part “optimised” distribution These are made up of: - a column chassis - active backplates - row distribution blocks - automatic distribution using supply busbars
Screw-mounting and hinged faceplates for XL3 enclosures.
Doors Flat doors:
All metal
Glass
Curved doors:
All metal
156
Glass
The new XL3 range allows you complete freedom in putting the equipment together, due to its total accessibility. Removable side panels/draw-out chassis.
Legrand advantages
1
The XL3 range is perfectly integrated in the XL PRO2 design software
2
Choice of solutions up to 800 A: wall-mounting and floor-standing enclosures, distribution, finish
3
The freedom to organise your own assemblies
TECHNICAL PART
FREEDOM TO CHOOSE HOW YOU WORK
FOR MORE INFORMATION Other electronic protection units on request
157
XL3 160
enclosures CHARACTERISTICS XL3 160 enclosures have been designed to simplify wiring and connection. They are all equipped with a removable chassis and also offer original solutions for holding and running the wiring, a large working space and a high-quality finish. They can take devices up to 160 A. They are supplied complete with rails, faceplates, and a brass bar for protective conductors.
Insulated enclosure class II
Metal enclosure class I
20 kÂ
35 kÂ
O
Short-circuit resistance Ipk Protection index
without door
IP 30
with door
IP 40
with door and seal Conformity with standards
IP 43 IEC 60439-1 and 60439-3
Fireproof according to IEC 60695-2-1
750 °C/5 s
Colour
RAL 7035
XL3 160 insulated enclosure: - side panels can be removed separately - frame can be dismantled - removable chassis
158
Flush mounting enclosure
TECHNICAL PART
CLASS II INSULATED ENCLOSURES Enclosure with dedicated space for DPX 160
“Fully modular” enclosures
1050
External height (mm)
900 750 600 450
Cat. No.
200 52
200 53
200 54
200 55
200 56
200 95
200 96
Modular capacity
2 rows
3 rows
4 rows
5 rows
6 rows
3 rows
Modules
48
72
96
120
144
72
4 rows 96
solid
202 52
202 53
202 54
202 55
202 56
202 55
202 56
glass
202 62
202 63
202 64
202 65
202 66
202 65
202 66
solid
202 72
202 73
202 74
202 75
202 76
202 75
202 76
glass
202 82
202 83
202 84
202 85
202 86
202 85
202 86
Curved door
Flat door
Fully modular enclosures can take the DPX 125 and the Vistop 160 with no accessory.
159
XL3 160
enclosures (continued) METAL ENCLOSURES
External height (mm)
1050 900 750 600 450
Cat. No.
200 02
200 03
200 04
200 05
200 06
Modular capacity
2 rows
3 rows
4 rows
5 rows
6 rows
Modules
48
72
96
120
144
202 52
202 53
202 54
202 55
202 56
glass
202 62
202 63
202 64
202 65
202 66
solid
202 72
202 73
202 74
202 75
202 76
glass
202 82
202 83
202 84
202 85
202 86
solid Curved door
Flat door
Metal enclosures can take the DPX 125 and the Vistop 160 with no accessory.
160
Enclosure with dedicated space for DPX 160
“Fully modular” enclosures
External height (mm)
TECHNICAL PART
FLUSH MOUNTING ENCLOSURES
1050 900 750 600
Cat. No.
200 13
200 14
200 15
200 16
200 25
200 26
Modular capacity Modules
3 rows 72
4 rows 96
5 rows 120
6 rows 144
3 rows 72
4 rows 96
solid
202 73
202 74
202 75
202 76
202 75
202 76
glass
202 83
202 84
202 85
202 86
202 85
202 86
Flat door
Fully modular enclosures can take the DPX 125 and the Vistop 160 with no accessory.
161
XL3 400
enclosures CHARACTERISTICS XL3 400 can be used to create customised enclosures for all your environments. - IP 30 to IP 55 IK 04 to IK 08 - Class I and class II - Fire resistance: 750°/5 s (IEC 60695-2) for installation in public buildings - Short time withstand current Icw: 25 kA 1 s - 24 modules per row - Take devices up to 400 A - Choice of distribution: standard or optimised (XL-Part 250 active backplate, row distribution block 250 A, etc) - Joinable (left and/or right) and extendable cable sleeves: Lexic, DPX and distribution devices - Colour: RAL 7035 - Conform to IEC 60439-1 -
162
TECHNICAL PART
IP 30-40-43 METAL WALL-MOUNTING AND FLOOR-STANDING Depth: 175 mm - External width: 575 mm
Floor-standing enclosures
Wall-mounting enclosures 1900 1600 1500
External 1200 height 1050 (mm) 900 750 600
Cat. No.
201 03
201 04
201 05
201 06
201 07
201 08
201 18
201 19
Height with faceplate (mm)
550
700
850
1 000
1 150
1 450
1 450
1 750
solid
202 53
202 54
202 55
202 56
202 57
202 58
202 58
202 59
glass
202 63
202 64
202 65
202 66
202 67
202 68
202 68
202 69
solid
202 73
202 74
202 75
202 76
202 77
202 78
202 78
202 79
glass
202 83
202 84
202 85
202 86
202 87
202 88
202 88
202 89
201 23
201 24
201 25
201 26
201 27
201 28
201 38
201 39
201 63
201 64
201 65
201 66
201 67
201 68
201 68
201 69
Curved door
Flat door
Cable sleeve Solid door for cable sleeve
163
XL3 400
enclosures (continued) IP 30-40-43 INSULATED ENCLOSURES Depth: 175 mm - External width: 575 mm
External height (mm)
1200 1050 900 750 600
Cat. No.
201 53
201 54
201 55
201 56
201 57
550
700
850
1 000
1 150
202 53
202 54
202 55
202 56
202 57
202 63
202 64
202 65
202 66
202 67
solid
202 73
202 74
202 75
202 76
202 77
glass
202 83
202 84
202 85
202 86
202 87
201 73
201 74
201 75
201 76
201 77
201 63
201 64
201 65
201 66
201 67
Height with faceplate (mm) solid Curved door glass
Flat door
Cable sleeve Solid door for cable sleeve
164
TECHNICAL PART
ONE-PIECE IP 55 ENCLOSURES Depth: 215 mm - External width: 650 mm 1115
External height (mm)
915 715 515
Cat. No. Height with faceplate (mm)
201 82
201 83
201 84
201 85
400
600
800
1000
Metal floor-standing enclosure and cable sleeve
Metal wall-mounting enclosure
165
XL3 800
enclosures CHARACTERISTICS XL3 800 can be used to create customised enclosures for all your environments. - IP 30 to IP 55 - IK 07 to IK 08 - Fire resistance: 750°/5 s (IEC 60695-2) for installation in public buildings - Short time withstand current Icw: 25 kA 1 s - Max. short-circuit current Ipk: 50 k - 24 or 36 modules per row - Take devices up to 800 A (630 A for IP 55) - Choice of distribution: standard or optimised - Internal or external cable sleeves (joinable on left and/or right), extendable (DPX and distribution) - Colour: RAL 7035 - Conform to standard IEC 60439-1
166
Wall-mounting enclosures
TECHNICAL PART
IP 30-40-43 WALL-MOUNTING AND FLOOR-STANDING ENCLOSURES Floor-standing enclosures
1950 1550
External height (mm)
1250 1050
Cat. No.
204 01
204 06
204 02
204 07
204 03
204 08
204 04
204 09
660
910
660
910
660
910
660
910
24
36(1)
24
36(1)
24
36(1)
24
36(1)
1000
1000
1200
1200
1400
1400
1800
1800
metal
212 51
212 56
212 52
212 57
212 53
212 58
212 54
212 59
glass
212 61
212 66
212 62
212 67
212 63
212 68
212 64
212 69
Total width (mm) Capacity per row (modules) Height with faceplate (mm)
Curved doors
Internal cable sleeve kit
204 26
204 27
204 28
204 29
Faceplate for internal cable sleeve
204 46
204 47
204 48
204 49
External cable sleeve
204 23
204 23
204 24
204 24
Door for external cable sleeve
204 33
204 33
204 34
204 34
Faceplate for external cable sleeve
204 43
204 43
204 44
204 44
IP 43 kit
201 30
201 30
201 30
201 30
201 30
201 30
201 30
201 30
Partitioning divider
204 90
204 91
204 90
204 91
204 90
204 91
204 90
204 91
(1) or 24 modules if internal cable sleeve
167
XL3 800
enclosures (continued) IP 55 WALL-MOUNTING AND FLOOR-STANDING ENCLOSURES Wall-mounting enclosures
Floor-standing enclosures
1995 1595
External height (mm)
1295 1095
Cat. No.
204 51
204 56
204 52
204 57
204 53
204 58
204 54
204 59
700
950
700
950
700
950
700
950
Capacity per row (modules)
24
36(1)
24
36(1)
24(1)
36(1)
24
36(1)
Height with faceplate
1000
1000
1200
1200
1400
1400
1800
1800
metal
212 71
212 76
212 72
212 77
212 73
212 78
212 74
212 79
glass
212 81
212 86
212 82
212 87
212 83
212 88
212 84
212 89
Total width (mm)
Flat doors
Internal cable sleeve kit
204 76
204 77
204 78
204 79
Faceplate for external cable sleeve
204 46
204 47
204 48
204 49
External cable sleeve
204 73
204 73
204 74
204 74
Door for external cable sleeve
204 83
204 83
204 84
204 84
Faceplate for external cable sleeve
204 43
204 43
204 44
204 44
Partitioning divider
204 90
204 91
204 90
204 91
204 90
204 91
204 90
204 91
Side panels
204 66
204 66
204 67
204 67
204 68
204 68
204 69
204 69
(1) or 24 modules if internal cable sleeve
168
Complete enclosure = Backpiece + roof + + width 660 mm base + plinth assembly
Side panel support
+
Side panels
+
TECHNICAL PART
MODULAR ENCLOSURES (24 MODULES)
Curved doors
204 15
Metal 212 49 Glass 212 39
204 16
Metal 212 50 Glass 212 60
204 15
Metal 212 49 Glass 212 39
204 18
Metal 212 52 Glass 212 62
204 16
Metal 212 50 Glass 212 60
204 17
Metal 212 51 Glass 212 61
204 13
204 19
204 14
204 19
204 14
204 19
204 14
2 x 204 19
600
3 x 204 15
Metal 3 x 212 49 Glass 3 x 212 39
600
1950
600
1000
1950
800
1200
1950
600
800
1550
600
External height (mm) Heights with faceplate (mm)
169
The Legrand offer
170
NEW DMX-E 65
DMX-E 55 air circuit breakers
air circuit breakers
6260 05
6260 75
Electrical characteristics (p. 30 and p. 31) Dimensions (p. 32)
Electrical characteristics (p. 30 and p. 31) Dimensions (p. 33 and p. 34) Air circuit breakers equipped with: - MP 2G electronic protection unit - rear terminals - 8 auxiliary contacts (4 NO + 4 NC) Breaking capacity Icu 65 kA (415 V )
Air circuit breakers equipped with: - MP 2G electronic protection unit - rear terminals - 8 auxiliary contacts (4 NO + 4 NC) Breaking capacity Icu 55 kA (415 V )
±
±
Pack
3P
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
Pack
Cat.Nos
6260 6260 6260 6260
6260 6260 6260 6260
4P
02 03 04 05
22 23 24 25
6260 6260 6260 6260
6260 6260 6260 6260
12 13 14 15
32 33 34 35
Fixed version In 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A Draw-out version Supplied with a base equipped with adjustable rear terminals and independently lockable safety shutters In 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A
Cat.Nos
3P
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
4P
6260 6260 6260 6260 6260 6260
42 43 44 45 46 47
6260 6260 6260 6260 6260 6260
52 53 54 55 56 57
6260 6260 6260 6260 6260 6260
62 63 64 65 66 67
6260 6260 6260 6260 6260 6260
72 73 74 75 76 77
Fixed version In 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A 2 000 A 2 500 A Draw-out version Supplied with a base equipped with adjustable rear terminals and independently lockable safety shutters In 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A 2 000 A 2 500 A
Red catalogue numbers: New products
171
NEW DMX-E 100
DMX-E 80 air circuit breakers
air circuit breakers
6261 17
6261 29
Electrical characteristics (p. 30 and p. 31) Dimensions (p. 33 and p. 34)
Electrical characteristics (p. 30 and p. 31) Dimensions (p. 34) Air circuit breakers equipped with: - MP 2G electronic protection unit - rear terminals - 8 auxiliary contacts (4 NO + 4 NC) Breaking capacity Icu 100 kA (415 V
Air circuit breakers equipped with: - MP 2G electronic protection unit - rear terminals - 8 auxiliary contacts (4 NO + 4 NC) Breaking capacity Icu 80 kA (415 V )
±)
±
Pack
Cat.Nos
3P
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
Pack
4P
6260 6260 6260 6260
86 87 88 89
6260 6260 6260 6260
96 97 98 99
6261 6261 6261 6261
06 07 08 09
6261 6261 6261 6261
16 17 18 19
Fixed version In 2 000 A 2 500 A 3 200 A 4 000 A Draw-out version Supplied with a base equipped with adjustable rear terminals and independently lockable safety shutters In 2 000 A 2 500 A 3 200 A 4 000 A
Cat.Nos
3P
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
6261 6261 6261 6261
26 27 28 29
6261 6261 6261 6261
36 37 38 39
6261 6261 6261 6261
46 47 48 49
6261 6261 6261 6261
56 57 58 59
Red catalogue numbers: New products
172
4P
Fixed version In 2 000 A 2 500 A 3 200 A 4 000 A Draw-out version Supplied with a base equipped with adjustable rear terminals (except 2 000 and 2 500 A) and independently lockable safety shutters In 2 000 A 2 500 A 3 200 A 4 000 A
NEW DMX-EI
DMX-E electronic protection unit
6263 79
trip-free switches
MP 3 available on request
6262 05
Electrical characteristics (p. 30 and p. 31) Dimensions (p. 32 to p. 34)
Technical characteristics (p. 30 and p. 31) The circuit breakers are delivered with their protection unit MP 2G Pack
Cat.Nos
MP 2G electronic protection unit On standard, the DMX-E are equipped with an MP 2G electronic protection unit, with rotary selectors for adjustment of the operating parameters (p. 43) Adjustment of neutral protection: 0, 50 or 100 %
Pack
lr
1 1 1 1
Tr
1
ls
1
Ts lg
lp
1
t
1
Tg
Other versions on request Test box 6263 79 Use to verify the correct functioning of the protection unit and the opening conditions MP 3 electronic protection unit On request, the DMX-E can be equipped with an MP 3 electronic protection unit provided with a liquid crystal display high resolution, additional protections, functions of measurement and communication
Cat.Nos
3P
1
I
1
Non automatic air circuit breakers with rear terminals and 8 auxiliary contacts (4 NO + 4 NF) Suitable for isolation
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4P
6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Fixed version In 630 A 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A 2 000 A 2 500 A 3 200 A 4 000 A Draw-out version Supplied with a base equipped with adjustable rear terminals (except 2 000 and 2 500 A) and independently lockable safety shutters In 630 A 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A 2 000 A 2 500 A 3 200 A 4 000 A
Red catalogue numbers: New products
173
NEW
DMX-E control and signalling auxiliaries and locking options
6262 64
Pack
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
6263 04
6262 95
Cat.Nos
6262 6262 6262 6262
6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262
60 62 64 65
70 71 72 73 74 77 78 79 80
6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262 6262
81 82 83 84 87 88 89 90
6262 6262 6262 6262 6262
91 92 93 95 96
Control and signalling auxiliaries
Pack
Shunt releases Trip the breaker from a remote location when energized 24/30 V 110 V - 50/60 Hz - 110 V 220/240 V - 50/60 Hz - 220/250 V 415 V - 50 Hz - 380/415 V - 60 Hz Undervoltage releases Trip the breaker from a remote location when its voltage drops 24/30 V 48 V 110 V - 50 Hz 110 V - 60 Hz 110 V 240 V - 50 Hz 240 V - 60 Hz 380/415 V - 50 Hz 380/415 V - 60 Hz Delayed undervoltage releases Trip the breaker from a remote location after a time delay when its voltage drops 48 V 110 V - 50 Hz 110 V - 60 Hz 110 V 240 V - 50 Hz 240 V - 60 Hz 380/415 V - 50 Hz 380/415 V - 60 Hz Motor operators To motorise a DMX-E, it is necessary to attach to the motor operator, a release coil (undervoltage or shunt release) and a closing release 24/30 V 48/60 V 110 V - 50/60 Hz - 110/125 V 240 V - 50/60 Hz - 250 V 380/415 V - 50/60 Hz - 400 V
= ± ± ±
= ±
=
= = ± ± = ± ±
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cat.Nos
6263 6263 6263 6263 6263
00 01 02 04 05
6263 6263 6263 6263 6263
11 17 18 15 16
± ±
= = ± ±
=
±
Closing releases Enables remote closing of the circuit breaker if the closing spring is charged 24/30 V 48/60 V 110 V - 50/60 Hz - 110 V 240 V - 50 Hz - 220/240 V - 60 Hz - 220/250 V 415 V - 50 Hz - 380/415 V - 60 Hz Signalling contacts Position signal contact Fault signal contact True "ready to close" contact Shunt release action signal contact Undervoltage release action signal contact
= = ± ± ±
= ± ±
=
Locking options
± ±
= ± ± = ± ±
Control and signalling auxiliaries (continued)
6263 6263 6263 6263
40 41 42 43
1
6263 6263 6263 6263
45 46 47 48
1
6263 22
1 1 1 1
1 1 1
Key locking in "open" position For lock (not supplied) Ronis Profalux Castell Kirk Key locking in "drawn-out" position 1 or 2 locks for one DMX-E for lock (not supplied) Ronis Profalux Castell Kirk Door locking Prevents opening of the door with the circuit breaker closed For left or right hand side mounting door Door locking
= =
For other voltage, please consult us Red catalogue numbers: New products
174
NEW
DMX-E equipment and accessories
6263 87
Pack
1 1 1 1
Cat.Nos
6263 6263 6263 6263
80 81 82 83
Equipment for supply invertors
Pack
The mechanical interlock is set up using cables and can interlock 2 or 3 devices, which may be different type in a vertical or horizontal configuration The interlock unit are mounted on the right-hand side of the device (see p. 44) Supplied complete with cable set 1 standard power supply + 1 standby power supply 3 power supplies 2 standard power supplies + 1 standby power supply 2 power supplies + 1 coupler
Accessories
1
1
Rating mis-insertion device Prevents the insertion of a draw-out circuit breaker in an incompatible base 6263 20 Rating error prevention Operation counter Counts total number of operation cycles 6263 24 Operation counter
1 1 1
Cat.Nos
Conversion of a fixed device into a draw-out device
Converting a fixed device requires a base and a set of rear terminals 3P 4P Bases for draw-out device 6263 86 6263 87 For DMX-E 55 and DMX-E 65, In ≤ 1 600 A 6263 88 6263 89 For DMX-E 65, In = 2 000 and 2 500 A DMX-E 80, In = 2 000 and 2 500 A 6263 90 6263 91 For DMX-E 80, In = 3 200 and 4 000 A DMX-E 100, In = 2 000 and 2 500 A
1
6263 30
1
6263 31
1
6263 32
1
6263 30
Rear terminals Rear terminals are supplied singly the number to be ordered for each device is indicated in bold type Horizontal or vertical 400 - 1 600 A 3 P (3) 4 P (4) Horizontal 2 000 - 2 500 A 3 P (3) 4 P (4) Vertical 2 000 - 2 500 A 3 P (3) 4 P (4) Horizontal or vertical 3 200 - 4 000 A 3 P (6) 4 P (8)
Red catalogue numbers: New products
175
DPX
]
Products and systems
[
MCCBs: DPX
DPX are MCCBs and trip-free switches, known as "moulded case" units, for controlling and protecting circuits up to 1 600 A
The DPX system from 16 to 1 600 A Simple, set criteria for selecting a DPX Type of release [thermal magnetic or electronic] and breaking capacity [16, 25, 36, 50, 70 and 100 kA] Size of unit: 125, 160, 250 ER, 250, 630, 1 250, 1600 Version: fixed, plug-in or draw-out [from 250 A] A perfect fit: in the new XL cabinets and enclosures 3
Auxiliaries that are common to the whole range
DPX can also be used with earth leakage modules
Legrand advantages
176
1
1 device = 1 catalogue number
2
Single installation principle irrespective of the device rating or version
3
Mounted under faceplate in standard or optimised distribution solutions
Installation principle 1
Mounting
DPX 125, 160 and 250 ER are mounted on They can also be installed on special plates
2
3 rail.
DPX 250, 630, 1 250 and 1600 can only be mounted on special plates
Connection (2 options)
Via front terminals Connect directly on plate (bar or cable with lug) or via cage terminal (cables) or on a base (for plug-in or draw-out versions)
Connection via cables
Connection via bars
Via rear terminals Connect bars or cables with lugs to the rear terminals mounted directly on the devices (fixed version) or on bases (for plug-in or draw-out versions)
Connection via bars
FOR MORE INFORMATION Consult the E-Catalogue: product guides, technical data sheets, etc.
177
DPXTM 125
DPXTM 125
MCCBs from 16 to 125 A thermal magnetic
electronic earth leakage modules motor operators
250 18
250 59 250 45 + 260 13
Dimensions (p. 62 and p. 63) Electrical characteristics (p. 40 and p. 41) MCCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage electrical lines Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries Can be used with earth leakage modules (opposite) or with residual current relays (p. 193) Supplied complete with: - cage terminals - terminal shields Conform to IEC 60947-2 Fixed version Thermal release adjustable from 0.7 to 1 In Fixed magnetic at 10 In in factory Thermal adjustement sealable
Pack
±)
1P
250 00 250 01 250 02 250 03 250 04 250 05 250 06 250 07 250 08 250 09
Breaking capacity Icu: 16 kA (230 V In 16 A 20 A 25 A 32 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 80 A 100 A 125 A Breaking capacity Icu: 16 kA (400 V In 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 100 A 125 A In 125 A
3P
4P
250 16 250 17 250 18 250 19 250 20 250 21
250 24 250 25 250 26 250 27 250 28 250 29
3 P + N/2
250 23
1
DPX 125
±)
1 1 1 1 1 1
3P
4P
250 36 250 37 250 38 250 39 250 40 250 41
250 44 250 45 250 46 250 47 250 48 250 49
3 P + N/2
250 43
1
Breaking capacity Icu: 25 kA (400 V In 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 100 A 125 A In 125 A Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V In 16 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 100 A 125 A In 125 A
±)
1 1 1 1 1 1
3P
4P
250 50 250 51 250 52 250 53 250 54 250 55
250 58 250 59 250 60 250 61 250 62 250 63
3 P + N/2
1
178
250 57
Can be fitted directly onto DPX/DPX-I 125 230 V - 500 V Adjustable, sealable sensitivity: 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A Adjustable, sealable tripping: 0 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s Equipped with: • test push-button • reset push-button Remote earth fault signalling contact Switch for mechanical tests on operation and insulation of the device (installation insulation test) Mounted side by side In 63 A 125 A Mounted underneath 63 A 125 A
±
1 1 1 1
3P
4P
260 02 260 12
260 03 260 13 260 04 260 14
Motor operators
±)
1 1 1 1 1 1
Electronic earth leakage modules
Cat.Nos
DPX-E 125
Cat.Nos
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Pack
1 1
261 00 261 03
For remote making and breaking of a DPX circuit and reset in the even of tripping on a fault A lock prevents operation when working on the line Front operated 24 V Front operated 230 V /
=± =
DPXTM 125
DPXTM 125
rotary handles mounting and connection accessories ■ Mounting
4
Mounting on rail with plate (XL3 160 p. 199, XL3 400 p. 210, XL3 800 p. 224) Spacer 262 99
263 01
262 01
Pack
Cat.Nos
1
202 00 206 00
1
262 08
1
Mounting on rail
4
For fixing on upright Comprising one aluminium mounting rail and 2 fixing brackets For XL3 400 For XL3 800 24 modules/row Din-rail fixing plate For mounting DPX 125 with or without earth leakage module on rail For fixing on plate Device only, vertical position Device + earth leakage module, vertical position Device or device + earth leakage module, horizontal position Spacer for modular devices Fits on a rail ; can be used to mount on the same row DX and DPX 125 on plate Cat.No 262 08
4
1
202 10 202 12
1
202 14
1
262 99
1
Plate 262 08
■ Connection DPX front terminals With cables
With bars max. 12
max. Ø 12
4
6 Nm
6 Nm
Rotary handles 1 1
1 1
262 01 262 03
262 02 262 04
Direct on DPX Standard (grey) For emergency use (red/yellow) Vari-depth handle Including: - connection rod - bracket - self adhesive drilling template - mounting accessories - door lock mechanism Standard (grey) For emergency use (red/yellow)
■ Motor operators
Connection accessories
1 1 1 1
Insulated shields Used to isolate the connection between each pole 262 07 Set of 3 3P 4P Sealable terminal shields 262 05 262 06 Set of 2 Padlock 262 00 For locking in "OFF" position 3P 4P Rear terminals 263 00 263 01 Used to convert the fixed version with front terminals to the fixed version with rear terminals Set of 6 (or 8) rear terminals, incoming or outgoing
Red catalogue numbers: New products
179
DPXTM 160
DPXTM 160
MCCBs from 25 to 160 A thermal magnetic
electronic earth leakage modules motor operators, supply invertor type
251 25
251 72
261 95 251 33 + 260 21
Dimensions (p. 64 and p. 65) Electrical characteristics (p. 40 to p. 41)
Pack
MCCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage electrical lines Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries Can be used with earth leakage modules (opposite) or with residual current relays (p. 193) Supplied complete with: - connection plates for bars - upstream and downstream connection devices for lugs (width max. 20 mm) - terminal shields Conform to IEC 60947-2 Fixed version Thermal adjustable from 0.64 to 1 In Fixed magnetic at 10 In in factory Thermal adjustement sealable
3P
DPX 160
Cat.Nos
±)
1 1 1
3P
4P
251 23 251 24 251 25
251 31 251 32 251 33
3 P + N/2
251 27
1
Breaking capacity Icu: 25 kA (400 V In 63 A 100 A 160 A In 160 A Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V In 63 A 100 A 160 A In 160 A Breaking capacity Icu: 50 kA (400 V In 40 A 63 A 100 A 160 A In 160 A
Can be fitted directly onto DPX/DPX-I 160 230 V - 500 V Adjustable, sealable sensitivity: 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A Adjustable, sealable tripping: 0 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s Equipped with: • test push-button • reset push-button Remote earth fault signalling contact Switch for mechanical tests on operation and insulation of the device (installation insulation test) Mounted side by side 4P In 260 21 160 A Mounted underneath 260 22 160 A
1
260 20
Motor operators
±)
1 1 1
3P
4P
251 49 251 50 251 51
251 57 251 58 251 59
3 P + N/2
251 53
1
±)
1 1 1 1
3P
4P
251 62 251 63 251 64 251 65
251 70 251 71 251 72 251 73
3 P + N/2
1
251 67
1 1
261 10 261 13
For remote making and breaking of a DPX circuit and reset in the even of tripping on a fault A lock prevents operation when working on the line Front operated 24 V Front operated 230V /
= ±=
Supply invertor type 1
264 01
1
261 95 261 96
1
180
Electronic earth leakage modules
±
1 Pack
Cat.Nos
Mounting plate For mechanical interlocking of 2 DPX of the same size for use in normal or automatic modes Mounting plate for mechanical interlock Electronic control box For detecting the absence of voltage or a drop in voltage: triggers the opening of a power supply source 24 V 230 V NB: for automatic version, add 2 remote controls and 2 auxiliary contacts
= ±
DPXTM 160
DPXTM 160
rotary handles mounting and connection accessories ■ Mounting
4
Mounting on rail with plate (XL3 160 p. 199, XL3 400 p. 210, XL3 800 p. 224) Spacer 262 99
262 11
Cat.Nos
1
202 00 206 00
1
262 09
1 1
202 10 202 12
1
202 14
1
1
262 99
Mounting on rail
4
For fixing on upright Comprising one aluminium mounting rail and 2 fixing brackets For XL3 400 For XL3 800, 24 modules/row Din-rail fixing plate For mounting DPX 160 with or without earth leakage module on rail For fixing on plate Device only, vertical position Device + earth leakage module, vertical position Device or device + earth leakage module, horizontal position Spacer for modular devices Fits on a rail ; can be used to mount on the same row DX and DPX 160 on plate Cat.No 262 09
4
Plate 262 09
■ Connection DPX front terminals With cables
With bars max. 18 Ø 8.5
max. Ø 18
4
max. 10
Pack
263 10
Rotary handles 1 1
1 1
262 11 262 13
262 12 262 14
Direct on DPX Standard (grey) For emergency use (red/yellow) Vari-depth handle Including: connecting rod, bracket, self-adhesive drilling template, mounting accessories, door locking mechanism Standard (grey) For emergency use (red/yellow)
10 Nm
10 Nm
■ Motor operators
Connection accessories
1 1 1
1 1
1 1
Insulated shields Used to isolate the connection between each pole 262 07 Set of 3 3P 4P Sealable terminal shields 262 15 262 16 Set of 2 Padlock 262 10 For locking in "OFF" position Cage terminals For connecting bare cables without lugs 262 18 Set of 4 terminals for cable 95 mm2 max. (or 70 mm2 flexible) 262 19 Set of 4 high-capacity terminals for cable 120 mm2 max. (or 95 mm2 flexible) Adaptor for lug For connecting bare cables with wide lug 262 17 Set of 1 adaptor + insulated shields 3P 4P Rear terminals 263 10 263 11 Used to convert the fixed version with front terminals to the fixed version with rear terminals Set of 6 (or 8) rear terminals, incoming or outgoing Red catalogue numbers: New products
181
DPXTM 250 ER
DPXTM 250 ER
MCCBs from 100 to 250 A thermal magnetic
electronic earth leakage modules plug-in version
265 13
252 55 252 56 + 260 36
Dimensions (p. 66 and p. 67) Electrical characteristics (p. 40 and p. 41)
Pack
Cat.Nos
MCCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage electrical lines Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries Can be used with earth leakage modules (opposite) or with residual current relays (p. 193) Supplied complete with: - connection plates for bars - upstream and downstream connection devices for lugs (width max. 20 mm) - terminal shields Conform to IEC 60947-2 Fixed version Thermal adjustable from 0.64 to 1 In Fixed magnetic at 10 In in factory Thermal adjustement sealable
DPX 250 ER
Cat.Nos
4P
260 31 260 36
1
±
1 1 1
3P
4P
252 04 252 05 252 06
252 14 252 15 252 16
3 P + N/2
252 09
1
Breaking capacity Icu: 25 kA (400 V ) In 100 A 160 A 250 A In 250 A Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V ) In 100 A 160 A 250 A In 250 A Breaking capacity Icu: 50 kA (400 V ) In 100 A 160 A 250 A In 250 A
1 1
3P
4P
252 24 252 25 252 26
252 34 252 35 252 36
3 P + N/2
252 29
1
±
1 1 1
3P
4P
252 44 252 45 252 46
252 54 252 55 252 56
3 P + N/2
1
252 49
260 33 260 38
1 1
Plug-in version
±
1
Can be fitted directly onto DPX/DPX-I 250 ER 230-500 V Adjustable, sealable sensitivity: 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A Adjustable, sealable tripping: 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s Equipped with: • test push-button • reset push-button Remote earth fault signalling contact Switch for mechanical tests on operation and insulation of the device (installation insulation test) Mounted side by side In 160 A 250 A Mounted underneath 160 A 250 A
±
1 Pack
Electronic earth leakage modules
1
1 1
1
A plug-in is a DPX fitted with tulip contacts mounted on a base 3P 4P Tulip contacts 265 12 265 13 Set of tulip contacts supplied with an incoming/outgoing protective cover Bases Can accept DPX and DPX-I fitted with tulip contacts 265 14 265 15 Front terminal mounting base 265 16 265 17 Rear terminal mounting base Connectors For connecting the auxiliaries included in the DPX 4P 263 99 1 set of connectors (8-pin)
Supply invertor type 1
264 02
1
261 95 261 96
1
Red catalogue numbers: New products
182
Mounting plate For mechanical interlocking of 2 DPX of the same size for use in normal or automatic modes Mounting plate for mechanical interlock Electronic control box For detecting the absence of voltage or a drop in voltage: triggers the opening of a power supply source 24 V 230 V NB: for automatic version, add 2 remote controls and 2 auxiliary contacts
= ±
DPXTM 250 ER
DPXTM 250 ER
rotary handles mounting and connection accessories ■ Mounting
4
Mounting on rail with plate (XL3 160 p. 199, XL3 400 p. 210, XL3 800 p. 224) Spacer 262 99
262 11
Pack
Cat.Nos
1 1
202 00 206 00
1
262 09
1 1
202 10 202 12
1
202 16
1
262 99
262 07
Mounting on rail
4 Plate 262 09
For fixing on upright Comprising one aluminium mounting rail and 2 fixing brackets For XL3 400 For XL3 800, 24 modules/row Din-rail fixing plate For mounting DPX 250 ER with or without earth leakage module on rail For fixing on plate Device only, vertical position Device + earth leakage module, vertical position Device or device + earth leakage module, horizontal position Spacer for modular devices Fits on a rail ; can be used to mount on the same row DX and DPX 250 ER on plate Cat.No 262 09
4
■ Connection DPX front terminals With cables
With bars max. 18 Ø 8.5
max. Ø 18
4
max. 10
262 99
Rotary handles 1 1
1 1
262 11 262 13
262 12 262 14
Direct on DPX Standard (grey) For emergency use (red/yellow) Vari-depth handle Including: - connecting rod - bracket - self-adhesive drilling template - mounting accessories - door lock mechanism Standard (grey) For emergency use (red/yellow)
10 Nm
DPX rear terminals
10 Nm
Plug-in version, rear terminals
max. 20
17 mm
Connection accessories
1 1
1 1
1
1
Insulated shields Used to isolate the connection between each pole 262 07 Set of 3 3P 4P Sealable terminal shields 262 85 262 86 Set of 2
10 Nm
Padlock For locking in "OFF" position Connection terminals 262 88 Set of 4 terminals for cables without lugs 185 mm2 max. (rigid) or 150 mm2 max. (flexible) Spreaders For increasing the distance between each 3P 4P pole to be connected 262 90 262 91 Set of incoming or outgoing spreaders Rear terminals Used to convert the fixed version with front terminals to the fixed version with rear terminals 265 10 265 11 Set of 6 (or 8) rear terminals, incoming or outgoing 262 10
Red catalogue numbers: New products
183
DPXTM 250 MCCBs from 40 to 250 A thermal magnetic and electronic release
253 49
254 23
260 55
Dimensions (p. 68 and p. 69) Electrical characteristics (p. 40 and p. 41) MCCBs and moulded case MCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage electrical lines Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries Can be used with earth leakage modules (opposite) or with residual current relays (p. 193) Supplied complete with: - connection plates for bars - upstream and downstream connection devices for lugs (width max. 20 mm) - terminal shields Conform to IEC 60947-2 - Fixed version - Thermal adjustement sealable Pack
DPX 250 thermal magnetic
Cat.Nos
Pack
Thermal adjustable from 0.64 to 1 In Magnetic adjustable from 3.5 to 10 In Adjustment (p. 42) DPX 250 36 kA Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V ) In 40 A 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A In 160 A 250 A DPX-H 250 70 kA Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V ) In 40 A 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A In 250 A DPX-L 250 100 kA Breaking capacity Icu: 100 kA (400 V ) In 100 A 160 A 250 A In 250 A
±
1 1 1 1 1
3P
4P
253 28 253 29 253 30 253 31 253 32
253 45 253 46 253 47 253 48 253 49
3 P + N/2
253 41 253 42
1 1
Cat.Nos
DPX 250 electronic release (continued) DPX-H 250 70 kA Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V ) In 40 A 100 A 160 A 250 A DPX-L 250 100 kA Breaking capacity Icu: 100 kA (400 V ) In 40 A 100 A 160 A 250 A
±
1 1 1 1
3P
4 P(2)
254 13 254 15 254 16 254 17
254 19 254 21 254 22 254 23
3P
4 P(2)
254 25 254 27 254 28 254 29
254 31 254 33 254 34 254 35
±
1 1 1 1
±
1 1 1 1 1
3P
4P
253 52 253 53 253 54 253 55 253 56
253 69 253 70 253 71 253 72 253 73
3 P + N/2
253 66
1
Electronic earth leakage modules Fitted directly onto DPX/DPX-I 250 Adjustable, sealable sensitivity: 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A Adjustable, sealable time delay: 0 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s Equipped with: test and reset push-buttons, remote earth fault signalling contact Switch for mechanical tests on operation and insulation of the device (installation insulation test) Mounted underneath Standard 4P In 260 51 160 A 260 55 250 A
±
1 1 1
3P
4P
253 80 253 81 253 82
253 89 253 90 253 91
3 P + N/2
253 88
1
3P
1 1
260 54
DPX 250 electronic release 4P
Adjustment of Ir, Im (p. 42) Indicator lamp(1) Connector for test unit Instantaneous protection If = 4 kA DPX 250 36 kA Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V In 40 A 100 A 160 A 250 A
1 1
260 53 260 57
LED version Monitors the isolation state of the installation via a series of LEDs In 160 A 250 A
±)
1 1 1 1
3P
4 P(2)
254 01 254 03 254 04 254 05
254 07 254 09 254 10 254 11
(1) Minimum current for indicator lamp operation (30 % of In) green: normal - fixed red: I ≥ 0.9 Ir - flushing red: I ≥ 1.05 Ir (2) Adjustment of neutral on front panel
184
DPXTM 250 equipment accessories
265 32
265 46
Pack
Plug-in version
Cat.Nos
3P
4P
1
265 29
265 30
1 1
265 31 265 33
265 32 265 34
1
265 35
265 36
1 1
265 37 265 38
1
265 39
1 1 1
263 99 098 19 263 43
A plug-in is a DPX fitted with tulip contacts mounted on a base Tulip contacts Set of tulip contacts supplied with an incoming/outgoing protective cover Bases Can accept fitted with tulip contacts • For DPX only Front terminal mounting base Rear terminal mounting base with threaded rod Flat rear terminal mounting base • For DPX with earth leakage module Front terminal mounting base Rear terminal mounting base with threaded rod Flat rear terminal mounting base Accessories 1 set of connectors (8-pin) 1 set of connectors (6-pin) Extractor handle
Draw-out version
1 1 1 1 1 1
A DPX draw-out version is a plug-in DPX fitted with a "Debro-lift" device which can be used to withdraw the DPX while keeping it on its base 3P 4P "Debro-lift" device 265 45 265 46 For DPX only 265 47 For DPX with earth leakage module Accessories for lifting device 265 74 Signalling contact, plugged-in/drawn-out 265 75 Operating handle 265 76 Ronis locking device 265 78 Ronis locking device for motorised draw-out
261 30
Pack
Cat.Nos
1 1
262 22 262 24
1 1
262 23 262 24
1
262 25
1 1 1 1
1 1
264 08 264 03
261 95 261 96
Direct on DPX Standard (grey) Conversion kit for emergency use (can be fitted on Cat.No 262 22) Vari-depth handle Including: connection rod, bracket, self-adhesive drilling template, mounting accessories and door lock mechanism Standard (grey) Conversion kit for emergency use (can be fitted on Cat.No 262 23) Locking accessory
Insulated shields Used to isolate the connection between each pole 262 30 Set of 3 insulated shields 3P 4P Sealable terminal shields 262 26 262 27 Set of 2 long terminal shields 262 28 262 29 Set of 2 short terminal shields Padlock 262 21 For locking in "OFF" position
Connection accessories
1
1
Supply invertor type
1 1
Rotary handles
Mounting accessories
1
Mounting plate For mechanical interlocking of 2 DPX of the same size for use in manual or automatic modes Mounting plate for fixed version Mounting plate for plug-in type and draw-out version Electronic control box For detecting the absence of voltage or a drop in voltage: triggers the opening of a power supply source 24 V 230 V
262 22
1
1 1
Cage terminals For connecting bare cables without lugs 262 35 Set of 4 terminals for cable 185 mm2 max. (or 150 mm2 flexible) Adaptor for lug For connecting bare cables with wide lug 262 31 Set of 1 adaptor + insulated shields Extended front terminals 262 32 For connections Spreaders For increasing the distance between 3P 4P each pole to be connected 262 33 262 34 Set of 3 (or 4) rear terminals, incoming or outgoing Rear terminals Used to convert the fixed version with front terminals to the fixed version with rear terminals 263 31 263 32 Set of 6 (or 8) rear terminals, incoming or outgoing 265 27 265 28 Set of 6 (or 8) flat rear terminals, incoming or outgoing
=±
Motor operators 1 1
261 30 261 34
1
261 59
Front operated 24 V 230 V Accessory Ronis locking accessory
± ±
185
DPXTM 630 MCCBs from 250 to 630 A thermal magnetic and electronic release
Green indicator lamp (only S1): normal operation minimum current for indicator lamp operation (30 % of In) Fixed red indicator lamp: ≥ 0.9 Ir Flushing red indicator lamp: I ≥ 1.05 Ir connector for test unit
255 53
255 40
256 07(1)
Dimensions ((p. 70 and p. 71) Electrical characteristics (p. 40 and p. 41) MCCBs and moulded case MCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage electrical lines Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries Can be used with earth leakage modules or with residual current relays (p. 193) Supplied complete with: - connection plates for bars - terminal shields Conform to IEC 60947-2 Fixed version - Thermal adjustement sealable Pack
DPX 630 thermal magnetic
Cat.Nos
Pack
Thermal adjustable from 0.8 to 1 In Magnetic adjustable from 5 to 10 In Adjustment (p. 42) DPX 630 36 kA Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V ) In 250 A 320 A 400 A 500 A 630 A In 320 A 400 A 500 A 630 A DPX-H 630 70 kA Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V ) In 320 A 400 A 500 A 630 A In 320 A 400 A 500 A 630 A DPX-L 630 100 kA Breaking capacity Icu: 100 kA (400 V ) In 320 A 400 A 500 A 630 A In 400 A 500 A 630 A
Cat.Nos
3P
4P
255 21 255 22 255 23 255 25 255 24
255 36 255 37 255 38 255 39 255 40
3 P + N/2
255 32 255 33 255 35 255 34
1 1 1 1
3P
4 P(1)
1 1 1
256 01 256 02 256 03
256 05 256 06 256 07
1 1 1
256 26 256 27 256 28
256 30 256 31 256 32
1 1 1
256 51 256 52 256 53
256 55 256 56 256 57
±
1 1 1 1
3P
4P
255 42 255 43 255 45 255 44
255 57 255 58 255 59 255 60
3 P + N/2
255 52 255 53 255 55 255 54
1 1 1 1
±
3P
4 P(1)
1 1
256 10 256 11
256 14 256 15
1 1
256 35 256 36
256 39 256 40
1 1
256 60 256 61
256 64 256 65
±
1 1 1 1
3P
4P
255 62 255 63 255 65 255 64
255 77 255 78 255 79 255 80
3 P + N/2
1 1 1
255 73 255 75 255 74
Adjustment of Ir, Im, Tr, Tm (p. 187) Instantaneous protection: 5 kA DPX 630 36 kA Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V ) S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im(2) In 250 A 400 A 630 A S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm 250 A 400 A 630 A Sg - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm, Ig, Tg 250 A 400 A 630 A DPX-H 630 70 kA Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V ) S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im(2) In 400 A 630 A S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm 400 A 630 A Sg - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm, Ig, Tg 400 A 630 A DPX-L 630 100 kA Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V ) S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im(2) In 400 A 630 A S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm 400 A 630 A Sg - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm, Ig, Tg 400 A 630 A
±
±
1 1 1 1 1
DPX 630 electronic release
±
3P
4 P(1)
1 1
256 18 256 19
256 22 256 23
1 1
256 43 256 44
256 47 256 48
1 1
256 68 256 69
256 72 256 73
(1) Adjustment of neutral on front panel (2) Green indicator lamp
186
DPXTM 630
DPXTM 630
earth leakage modules
■ Performance data S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im t
Ir
Im If
I
• Long delay protection against overloads with an adjustable threshold based on the rms value of the current: Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.95 - 1 x In (8 steps) Tr = 5 s (fixed at 6 tr) • Short delay protection against short-circuits with an adjustable Im threshold: Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps) Tm = 0.05 s (fixed) •Instantaneous protection if with fixed threshold: If = 5 kA
260 63
Pack
Cat.Nos
Earth leakage modules
Can be fitted directly onto DPX/DPX-I 630 230-500 V Adjustable, sealable sensitivity: 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A Adjustable, sealable time delay: 0 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s Equipped with: • test push-button • reset push-button Remote earth fault signalling contact Switch for mechanical tests on operation and insulation of the device (installation insulation test) Mounted underneath Standard 4P In 260 61 400 A 260 65 630 A
±
3P
1 1
260 60 260 64
4P
1 1
260 63 260 67
LED version Monitors the isolation state of the installation via a series of LEDs In 400 A 630 A
S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm t
Ir Tr Im Tm
If
I
• Long delay protection against overloads with an adjustable threshold based on the rms value of the current: Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.9 - 0.95 - 1 x In (8 steps) Tr = 5 - 10 - 20 - 30 s (at 6 Ir) (4 steps) • Short delay protection against short-circuits with an adjustable Im threshold: Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps) Tm = 0 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s (4 steps) Tm = 0.01 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s at 12 x Ir (I2 t constant) (4 steps) • Instantaneous protection against short-circuits with fixed threshold: If = 5 kA
Sg - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm, Ig, Tg t
Ir Ig Tg
Tr Im Tm
If
I
• Long delay protection against overloads with an adjustable threshold based on the rms value of the current: Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.9 - 0.95 - 1 x In (8 steps) Tr = 5 - 10 - 20 - 30 s (at Ir) (4 steps) • Short delay protection against short-circuits with an adjustable Im threshold: Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps) Tm = 0.01 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s (4 steps) Tm = 0.01 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s at 12 x Ir (I2 t constant) (4 steps) • Instantaneous protection against short-circuits with fixed threshold: If = 5 kA • Earth fault measurement: Ig: 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 1 x In (8 steps) Tg: 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.5 - 1 s (4 steps)
187
DPXTM 630 equipment accessories
265 57
265 67
Pack
Plug-in version
Cat.Nos
3P
4P
1
265 50
265 51
1 1
265 52 265 54
265 53 265 55
1
265 56
265 57
1 1
265 58 265 59
1
265 60
1
263 68
A plug-in is a DPX fitted with tulip contacts mounted on a base Tulip contacts Set of tulip contacts supplied with an incoming/outgoing protective cover Bases Can accept fitted with tulip contacts • For DPX only Front terminal mounting base Rear terminal mounting base with threaded rod Flat rear terminal mounting base • For DPX with earth leakage module Front terminal mounting base Rear terminal mounting base with threaded rod Flat rear terminal mounting base Accessory Extractor handle
Draw-out version
1 1
1 1 1 1
A DPX draw-out version is a plug-in DPX fitted with a "Debro-lift" device which can be used to withdraw the DPX while keeping it on its base 3P 4P "Debro-lift" device 265 66 265 67 For DPX mounting bases only 265 68 For DPX mounting bases with earth leakage module Accessories for lifting device 265 74 Signalling contact, plugged-in/drawn-out 265 75 Operating handle 265 76 Ronis locking device 265 78 Ronis locking device for motorised draw-out
Supply invertor type
1 1
1 1
264 09 264 04
261 95 261 96
Factory assembled Mounting plate For mechanical interlocking of 2 DPX of the same size for use in normal or automatic modes Mounting plate for fixed version Mounting plate for plug-in type and draw-out version Electronic control box For detecting the absence of voltage or a drop in voltage: triggers the opening of a power supply source 24 V 230 V
=±
Motor operators 1 1
261 40 261 44
1
261 59
188
Front operated 24 V 230 V Accessory Ronis locking accessory
±±
262 50
262 51
Pack
Cat.Nos
1 1
262 41 262 24
1 1
262 42 262 24
1
262 25
262 48
Rotary handles Direct on DPX Standard (grey) Conversion kit for emergency use (can be fitted on Cat.No 262 41) Vari-depth handle Including: connection rod, bracket, self-adhesive drilling template, mounting accessories and door lock mechanism Standard (grey) Conversion kit for emergency use (can be fitted on Cat.No 262 42) Locking accessory
Mounting accessories
1 1 1
Insulated shields Used to isolate the connection between each pole 262 30 Set of 3 3P 4P Sealable terminal shields 262 44 262 45 Set of 2 Padlock 262 40 For locking in "OFF" position
Connection accessories
1 1
1 1
1
1 1
Cage terminals For connecting bare cables without lugs 262 50 Set of 4 terminals for cable 300 mm2 max. (or 240 mm2 flexible) 262 51 Set of 4 high-capacity terminals for cable 2 x 240 mm2 (rigid) or 2 x 185 mm2 (flexible) Adaptor for lug For connecting bare cables with wide lugs 262 46 Set of 4 adaptors + insulated shields Extended front terminals 262 47 For connections Spreaders For increasing the distance between 3P 4P each pole to be connected 262 48 262 49 Set of 3 (or 4) rear terminals, incoming or outgoing Rear terminals Used to convert the fixed version with front terminals to the fixed version with rear terminals Set of 3 (or 4) 263 50 263 51 Swivel terminals 263 52 265 53 Flat terminals
DPXTM 1 250
DPXTM 1 600
MCCBs from 800 to 1250 A thermal magnetic
MCCBs from 800 to 1 600 A electronic release
258 04
257 08
Dimensions (p. 72 and p. 73) Electrical characteristics (p. 40 and p. 41)
Dimensions (p. 72 and p. 73) Electrical characteristics (p. 40 and p. 41) MCCBs and moulded case MCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage electrical lines Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries (integrated terminal blocks) Can be used with earth leakage modules or with residual current relays (p. 193) Supplied complete with: - connection plates for bars - terminal shields Conform to IEC 60947-2 Fixed version Thermal adjustable from 0.8 to 1 In (see p. 42) Magnetic adjustable 5 to 10 < 1 000 A ≤ 3 to 6 In (see p. 42)
Pack
Pack
DPX 1 250
Cat.Nos
MCCBs and moulded case MCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage electrical lines Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries (integrated terminal blocks) Can be used with earth leakage modules or with residual current relays (p. 193) Supplied complete with: - connection plates for bars - terminal shields Conform to IEC 60947-2 Fixed version Adjustment of Ir, Im, Tr, Tm (see p. 42) Instantaneous protection If = 20 kA Connector for test unit Indicator lamp: minimum current for indicator lamp operation (30 % In): green: normal - fixed red: I ≥ 0.9 Ir - flushing red: I ≥ 1.05 Ir Cat.Nos
±
±)
3P
1 1 1
258 02 258 03 258 04
Breaking capacity Icu: 50 kA (400 V 4 In 258 09 800 A 258 10 1 000 A 258 11 1 250 A P(1)
DPX-H 1 250
±)
3P
1 1 1
258 16 258 17 258 18
Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V 4 P(1) In 258 23 800 A 258 24 1 000 A 258 25 1 250 A
3P
4 P(1)
1 1 1
257 02 257 03 257 04
257 06 257 07 257 08
1 1 1
257 26 257 27 257 28
257 30 257 31 257 32
1 1 1
257 51 257 52 257 53
257 55 257 56 257 57
DPX-L 1 250
1 1 1
258 30 258 31 258 32
Breaking capacity Icu: 100 kA (400 V 4 P(1) In 258 39 800 A 258 40 1 000 A 258 41 1 250 A
(1) Neutral without protection
Breaking capacity Icu: 50 kA (400 V ) S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im In 800 A 1 250 A 1 600 A S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, lm, Tm In 800 A 1 250 A 1 600 A Sg - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, lm, Tm, Ig, Tg In 800 A 1 250 A 1 600 A
DPX-H 1600
±)
3P
DPX 1600
±
3P
4 P(1)
1 1 1
257 10 257 11 257 12
257 14 257 15 257 16
1 1 1
257 34 257 35 257 36
257 38 257 39 257 40
1 1 1
257 59 257 60 257 61
257 63 257 64 257 65
Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V ) S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im In 800 A 1 250 A 1 600 A S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, lm, Tm In 800 A 1 250 A 1 600 A Sg - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, lm, Tm, Ig, Tg In 800 A 1 250 A 1 600 A (1) Adjustment of neutral on front panel
189
DPXTM 1 250 - 1 600
DPXTM 1 600
equipment
MCCBs from 800 to 1 600 A electronic release ■ Performance data S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im t
Ir
Im If
I
• Long delay protection against overloads with an adjustable threshold based on the rms value of the current: Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 -0.9 - 0.95 - 1 x In (8 steps) Tr = 5 s (at 6 Ir) (4 steps) - Fixed • Short delay protection against short-circuits with an adjustable Im threshold: Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps) Tm = 0.1 s (fixed) • Instantaneous protection with fixed theshold: If = 15 ≤ 1 250 < 20
S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm 265 84
t
Ir Tr Im
Pack
1 1 1 1 1 1
Cat.Nos
Draw-out version
A DPX draw-out version is a plug-in DPX fitted with a "Debro-lift" device which can be used to withdraw the DPX while keeping it on its base Draw-out kit The draw-out kit includes a base, a 3P 4P "Debro-lift" device and brackets 265 82 265 83 Front terminals 265 84 265 85 Rear terminals Accessories for lifting device 265 74 Signalling contact, plugged-in/drawn-out 265 75 Operating handle 265 76 Ronis locking device, 1 key breaker only 265 80 Ronis locking device, 2 keys for motorised breaker or with rotary handle
Tm
1 1
1 1
190
264 10 264 05
261 95 261 96
Mounting plate For mechanical interlocking of 2 DPX of the same size for use in normal or automatic modes Factory-assembled Mounting plate for fixed version Mounting plate for plug-in and draw-out version Electronic control box For detecting the absence of voltage or a drop in voltage: triggers the opening of a power supply source 24 V 230 V
= ±
I
• Long delay protection against overloads with an adjustable threshold based on the rms value of the current: Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.9 - 0.95 - 1 x In (8 steps) Tr = 5 - 10 - 20 - 30 s (at 6 x Ir) (4 steps) • Short delay protection against short-circuits with an adjustable Im threshold: Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps) Tm = 0 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s (4 steps) Tm = 0.01 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s at 12 x Ir (I2 t constant) (4 steps) • Instantaneous protection against short-circuits with fixed threshold: If = 20 kA
Sg - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm, Ig, Tg t
Supply invertor type
If
Ir Ig Tg
Tr Im Tm
If
I
• Long delay protection against overloads with an adjustable threshold based on the rms value of the current: Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.9 - 0.95 - 1 x In (8 steps) Tr = 5 - 10- 20 - 30 s (at 6 x Ir) (4 steps) • Short delay protection against short-circuits with an adjustable Im threshold: Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps) Tm = 0 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s (4 steps) Tm = 0.01 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s at 12 x Ir (I2 t constant) (4 steps) • Instantaneous protection against short-circuits with fixed threshold: If = 20 kA • Earth fault measurement: Ig: 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 1 x In (8 steps) Tg: 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.5 - 1 s (4 steps)
DPXTM 1 250 - 1 600 rotary handles accessories
262 61
Pack
1 1
262 60
Cat.Nos
Motor operators
261 54 261 59
For remote making and breaking of a DPX circuit and reset in the event of tripping on a fault A lock prevents operation when working on the line Factory assembled Front operated 230 V Ronis locking accessory
262 70
Pack
±
1
1
Rotary handles 1 1
1
262 61 262 62
262 25
Direct on DPX Vari-depth handle Including: connection rod, bracket, self-adhesive drilling template, mounting accessories and door lock mechanism Locking accessory
1 1 1 1
Mounting accessories
1 1 1
Insulated shields Used to isolate the connections between each pole 262 66 Set of 3 insulated shields 3P 4P Sealable terminal shields 262 64 262 65 Set of 2 short terminal shields Padlock 262 60 For locking in "OFF" position
1
Cat.Nos
262 67 + 262 68
Connection accessories
Cage terminals For connecting bare cables without lugs 262 69 Set of 1 terminal 2 x 240 mm2 (rigid) or 2 x 185 mm2 (flexible) 262 70 Set of 1 high-capacity terminal 4 x 240 mm2 for rigid cable 4 x 185 mm2 for flexible cable Rear terminals Used to convert the fixed version with front terminals to the fixed version with rear terminals Set of 6 (or 8) rear terminals, incoming or outgoing 3P 4P 263 80 263 82 Short terminals 263 81 263 83 Long terminals Extended front terminals 262 67 Short terminals 262 68 Long terminals Spreaders For increasing the distance between each pole to be connected 3P 4P 262 73 262 74 Set of 3 (or 4) rear terminals, incoming or outgoing
191
DPXTM
DPXTM
control and signalling auxiliaries electronic test unit
common auxiliaries from 16 to 1 600 A for DPX, DPX-IS, DPX-I
261 60
Pack
1
261 85
Auxiliary contact or fault signal A singly Cat.No 261 60 auxiliary contact or fault signal
261 98
Cat.Nos
Auxiliary contact or fault signal
261 60
For signalling the state of the contacts or opening of the MCCB on a fault For DPX/DPX-I/DPX-IS from 16 A to 1 600 A Changeover switch 3 A - 240 V
Releases
1 1 1 1 1
261 64 261 65 261 66 261 67 261 68 For DPX 125, For DPX 160 DPX-IS 250/ to 1600, 630 DPX-IS 1 600, DPX-I
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
261 70 261 71 261 72 261 76 261 73 261 74
261 80 261 81 261 82 261 86 261 83 261 84
261 90 261 91 261 75 261 85
Allow remote tripping of a DPX Shunt releases For DPX-IS/DPX-I and DPX from 16 to 1 600 A Shunt inrush power 300 VA Coil voltage 24 V and Coil voltage 48 V and Coil voltage 110 V and Coil voltage 230 V and Coil voltage 400 V and Undervoltage releases For DPX-IS/DPX-I and DPX from 16 to 1 600 A Undervoltage power consumption 5 VA Coil voltage 24 V Coil voltage 24 V Coil voltage 48 V Coil voltage 110 V Coil voltage 230 V Coil voltage 400 V
± = ± = ± = ± = ± = = ± = ± ± ±
Time-lag (ms) undervoltage releases Allow remote tripping of a DPX Prevent false tripping in the event of AC supply microbreaks Require a time-lag module connected to the undervoltage releases below Number of modules Time-lag modules 230 V 3 400 V 3 Undervoltage releases For DPX-IS, DPX 125 and DPX 160 For DPX 250 ER to 1600
± ±
Electronic test unit 1
192
261 98
Undervoltage releases
For checking the operating characteristics of an electronic MCCB via 2 n electronic unit PALM III C • identification of the undervoltage release • checking correct operation of the undervoltage release • monitoring of trip curves • memorisation of causes of last trip: overload, short-circuit (instantaneous or short delay), earth fault and phase affected • memorisation of number of occasions the device has tripped on a fault since installation • measurement of current values for each phase • measurement of internal temperatures of the device
Shunt releases
Time-lag undervoltage releases
Max. number of contacts per DPX-IS device Auxiliary contact AC
EBAC
FS
Shunt release or undervoltage release
Device Without release
DPX-IS 250
1
2
–
–
With release
DPX-IS 250
1
1
1
1
AC = auxiliary contact EBAC = "early" auxiliary contact FS = break on trip contact Max. number of contacts per DPX device Auxiliary contact AC
FS
Shunt release or undervoltage release
DPX 125
1
1
1
DPX 160
1
1
1
DPX 250 ER
1
1
1
DPX 250
2
1
1
DPX 630
2
2
1
DPX 1 600
3
1
1
Device
residual current relay and separate coils
residual current relay and separate coils
for DPX and DPX-I
Residual current relay Cat.No 260 88
19 18 17
4
60 44
6
35 5
6
21
1
90
45
35
On
Reset
20
88
Delay (s) Trip 60 40 20 Test
2
3
Coils Cat.Nos 260 92/93/94/95/96
Coil Cat.No 260 97
22
260 93 coil for use with relay
C M
D 5
D
C
A
A
L
L
6
260 88
E
1
A 35 80 110 140 210 150
B 75 108 148 177 270 225
C 85 132 170 206 295 259
D 42 67 86 104 150 133
E 92 125 165 200 290 245
H 36 36 36 36 44 275
L 43 65 84 102 145 95
M 56 56 56 56 64 113
7
Cat.No 260 98
21
Detects fault currents, and, when used with a shunt trip or an undervoltage release, it gives the trip command to on MCCB or a switch • Comprises: - a tinged, sealable window - an auxiliary contact - a green Led indicating energisation - 3 yellow Leds indicating respectively the max. phase earth insulation current: 20, 40 and 60 % - a red Led indicating Fixed: exceeding of the insulation fault current value Flashing: breaking of one of the connections between coils and relays • For use with coils: - Ø 35 and 80 mm Adjustable sensitivity: 0.03, 0.05, 0.075, 0.1, 0.15, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 A - Ø 110 to 210 mm Adjustable sensitivity: 0.3, 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 A - Ø 150 mm Adjustable sensitivity: 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 A - Ø 300 mm Adjustable sensitivity: 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 A NEW • Adjustable trip: 0, 0.15, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5 seconds 2 modules • Supply voltage: 230/240 V - 50/60 Hz 260 88 Residual current relay to clip on rail
Cat.Nos 260 92 260 93 260 94 260 95 260 96 260 97
5
Residual current relay
79
58
Cat.Nos
45 34
E
B
Add residual current protection to trip-free DPX MCCBs and switches equipped with shunt trip or undervoltage release Pack
B H
M
260 98
H
23
5.5
310
30
368 400
Coils
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
260 92 260 93 260 94 260 95 260 96 260 97 260 98
For use with residual current relay Cat.No 260 88 (above) 1 coil per DPX Coil Ø 35 mm Coil Ø 80 mm Coil Ø 110 mm Coil Ø 140 mm Coil Ø 210 mm Coil Ø 150 mm - open Coil Ø 300 mm - open Red catalogue numbers: New products
193
DPXTM 125
■ Dimensions
Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage module mounted side by side
Fixed version, front terminals 97 74
101
75.6 12
8
37.8
97 8 74
10
50.8
8
32
45
32.25
193
193
210
101
45
120
101
45
120
45
12
101
M4
25.4
25.4
25.4
Ø 4.3 or M4
Fixed version, rear terminals
97 74
101
25.4
25.4
25.4
32.25
45
39
10
81
M8 M4
8
191
25.4
Fixed version, rear terminals with earth leakage module mounted side by side
101
45
25.4
8
45
25.4
97 74
210
25.4
101
101
45
120
75.6
25.4
81
M8 39
M4
A
10
Terminal shields
Direct rotative handle on DPX
80
11.2
260
103
DPX 125 + earth leakage module mounted side by side
40.2
170 80
A DPX 125
48
74
8
20
60
75.5 25.4
12.7
20
M4
Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage module mounted underneath(1) 202 101 37.8
97 101 25.4
10
Vari-depth handle on door
74
35
75.5
11.25
8 12.7
(1) Dimensions of 3-pole earth leakage modules are the same as 4-pole earth leakage modules
194
103 62.75
80
45
103
120
12.7 113.7
74
8
25.4
M4
282 max. 72 min.
2/4
DPXTM 160
■ Dimensions
Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage module mounted side by side
Fixed version, front terminals 8
23
18 max.
30
247 45
M4 30
23
14
115
265
45
150
45
150
45
8
150
45
97
8 9
120
90
120 30
97 74
M4
30 30 45
23 8
74
Fixed version, rear terminals 90
97
120
8
45 55.5
161 115
45
158
48
95
241
55
X
265 247
74
30 30 30
150
30 30
Y
45
45
150
Fixed version, rear terminals with earth leakage module mounted side by side
30 30 30
74
120
8
97
45 M10
M4 240 120
120 30 ==
8
45
=
X
132 86
150
95
=
M4
97 74 8
8
Y
48
95
Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage module mounted underneath(1)
60
Direct rotative handle on DPX
30
45 15
135
M4 8
30 Y
74
60 48
115 11.25 38.5
80
35
Terminal shields
1.5 max.
A
15 75.5
Vari-depth handle on door A
DPX 160 + earth leakage module mounted side by side
393
M4 8
30
74
282 max. 72 min.
35 2/4
38.5
115 11.25
278
80
DPX 160
(1) Dimensions of 3-pole earth leakage modules are the same as 4-pole earth leakage modules
15 75.5
195
DPXTM 250 ER
■ Dimensions
Fixed version with earth leakage module mounted side by side Front terminals
Fixed version, front terminals
Ø 18 max.
45
45
45
45
11.5
97
10 max.
74
52.8 67.8 83.3
18
62.7
62.7
267 298
107.7
237
69
38.5
53.5
1.6
30 30 30
20 max.
45
M4
10 max.
8 18
45
145 115
176
91.5
M4
120 30 30 30
Ø max. 18
10 max.
18
M4
8
120 30 30 30
90
Rear terminals
30 30 30 20 max. 45
1.6
18
11.5
74 97
8
74 97
Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage module mounted underneath 160 A Terminal shields Y
240
120 30 ==
120
176
95
97 74
60
A 115 76.5
X
30
45 135
A
M4
15 Y
DPX 250 ER
296
DPX 250 ER + earth leakage module
418
250 A 270 30
30
Direct rotative handle on DPX and vari-depth handle on door
150
30
30
30
15 30 282 max. 72 min. 8
74
35 2/4
60 48
11.25 38.5
80
115
176
145
M4
35
69
53.5
38.5
115
215.5
30
20 max. 30 30
30 45
196
30
30
15 75.5
1.5 max.
11.5
DPXTM 250
■ Dimensions
Draw-out version, front terminals
105 36 •
52.35 34
4 min.
34
52.5
25 35 35
124.5
144.75 313
353.5
X 449.5
66.5 90 94
10
M5
155
99.5
170
94
200
173.5
11
17
105 (3 P) 20
192.75
140 70 17.5
45.5 32.5
5
105 100 35
140 (4 P)
187 34
Fixed version, front terminals
27
35 35 35
24.75
138.5
Fixed version with earth leakage module mounted side by side(1) Front terminals Rear terminals 138.5 105
140 24 52.5
138.5 105
36
11
Ø9
34
4 min.
35
35
35
Y 10
Draw-out version, rear terminals 100
Rear terminal with threaded rod 35
187
35
35 35 M12 47.5
93.5
17.5 70
M12
173.5
108.75
90
94
66.5
155 99.5 24.75
10 35
35
93.5 47.5
34 45.5
281.5
308
278
94
34
27
M5
Flat rear terminal 187
Plug-in version, front terminals
34
140
105
186.5
20
32.5
10
37
81 26 173.5
108.75
90
66.5 94
35
26
35 Ø9 10
37
81
200
35 35 19
90 66.5
24.75
33
4 min.
155 99.5
Ø9
4
245.5
94
341.5
35 19
34 45.5
Terminal shields
35 35
35
35 35
153
A
Ø9
A
Plug-in version, rear terminals 105 100 35
186.5 153 4 min.
140
DPX 250
330
DPX 250 + earth leakage module mounted side by side
438
Direct rotative handle on DPX and vari-depth handle on door
40
35 35
35
66.5
71.5
153
25
2.5 max. 50
2/4
94
52.5 35 35
90
173.5
200
94 173.5
100
265 max. 93 min. 58
(1) Dimensions of 3-pole earth leakage modules are the same as 4-pole earth leakage modules
197
DPXTM 630
■ Dimensions
Draw-out version, front terminals
Fixed version, front terminals
45.5
34
183
183
34
4 min.
94 155
130
265
X
24.7
15 max.
94
260
94
220
15 max.
100
100
398
50
17
70
302
32
70
265
140 32
34
29
5
130 144 105
14 43.5 43.5 43.5
43.5
43.5
43.5
187
Y
M5
87 43.5
43.5
27
43.5
Draw-out version, rear terminals Fixed version with earth leakage module mounted side by side Rear terminal with threaded rod Front terminals 70 21.75
32
45.5
34 34
144 105
183
Rear terminals 4 min.
144
17 50
105
43.5
43.5
4 min.
43.5
94
24.7
372
372
412
94
155 103 58
130
220
M 16 100
187
Flat rear terminal 45.5
153 29
183 70
187
100
29
8
130
X
A
94
220
Terminal shields
94 302
398
100
43.5
59
140 32
220
Plug-in version, front terminals
43.5
15
27
155 124
43.5
24.7
43.5
34 34
94
43.5
Ø 6 or M5
130
87
A
4 min. DPX 630
390
DPX 630 + earth leakage module mounted side by side
542
Ø 14 43.5 43.5
192
43.5 43.5 43.5
Plug-in version, rear terminals 70
265 max. 93 min. 100 50
130
X
40
71.5
58
94
94
100 94 220
265
100
Direct rotative handle on DPX and vari-depth handle on door
192 153
183
47
140
4 min.
198
2.5 max.
2/4
DPXTM 1 250 - DPXTM 1 600
■ Dimensions Fixed version, front terminals Y
70
20
158 94
X
320
280
149
100
70
169
25
25 max.
280 70
70
298 278
70
215 29 8 13 min.
Y
210
X
M12 M10
70 50
M8
35
5
140
Y
140
Fixed version, rear terminals Y
Vertical
280 (4 P)
Horizontal
210 (3 P)
163
12.5
32
13 105
140
12.5 98
140
56
94
145.5 273
68
M8
X
40
118
273
X
320
94
100
145.5
169
90 40
12
23
6 2.5 max.
3
14 13
256
325
Terminal shields 34.5
480
325 360
364
238
188
32
Draw-out version, rear terminals 299
6 2.5 max.
3
238
Y
70
70
70
218.5
70
253
70
Direct rotative handle on DPX
Vari-depth handle on door 49
125 62.5
67.5
265 max. 93 min.
81
125 66.5
125 66.5
125 62.5
2.5 max.
2/4
199
[ DMX-EI, DPX-I, DPX-IS, VISTOP, DX-IS ]
Products and systems
Main isolating switches, isolating switches for rows, circuits or groups of circuits Isolating switches perform the isolation function by electrically separating all or part of an installation to ensure the safety of those working on it
The range: The range of isolating switches comprises three main families:
Isolating switches with visible contact indication The actual position of the contacts is clearly visible (for example, through a window)
DPX-IS
VISTOP
• Isolation with visible contact indication from 63 to 1600 A • Fixing on rail or on plate up to 250 A. Above 250 A, fix on plate • Tripping version (common DPX auxiliaries)
• Isolation with visible contact indication from 32 to 160 A • Fixing on rail or on plate • External reversible side handle or front handle
2
2
NB: When the DPX-IS is equipped with a trip it becomes a trip-free isolating switch
Isolating switches with positive contact indication The position of the contacts and that of the handle are linked (for example, when the handle is in position O, the contacts are in open position)
DX-IS • Isolation with positive contact indication from 16 to 125 A • Tripping version (common DX auxiliaries) • Red handle: main device • Faulty contact indicator • Fixing on rail
2
200
Key facts • Positive contact indication: The position of the handle indicates the position of the contacts • Trip-free: This is obtained by the use of auxiliaries
Trip-free isolating switches These enable remote opening of circuits
DMX-EI
DPX-I
• Isolation from 630 to 4 000 A • Fixed or draw-out version
• Isolation from 125 to 1600 A • Fixing on rail or plate up to 250 A. Above 250 A, fix on plate
2
How to select your isolating switch 4 criteria must be taken into consideration when choosing your isolating switch:
In what type of distribution board is it to be installed? Main LV, secondary, control unit
What is its rating? Directly dependent on the main power
FOR MORE INFORMATION
Use of auxiliaries, remote control? Information feedback
What size?
See the online catalogue: instructions, technical data sheets, etc.
For optimisation of the size of the enclosures
201
isolating switches selection chart
VISTOP visible load break p. 85-86 Black handle Rating (A)
Front handle
Side handle
3P
4P
3P
4P
32
(1)
224 98 /225 00
225 02
225 03 /05
225 07
63
225 12
225 15
225 16
225 18
100
225 20
225 22
225 25
225 27
125
225 34
225 39
225 44
225 46
160
225 51
225 53
225 54
225 56
(1)
(1) 2 P
DPX-IS visible load break p. 88 to 93 Rating (A)
With release Right-hand side handle 3P 4P
Front handle
Left-hand side handle 3P 4P
Front handle
3P
4P
63
266 30
266 34
266 40
266 44
266 50
266 54
100
266 31
266 35
266 41
266 45
266 51
266 55
160
266 32
266 36
266 42
266 46
266 52
250
266 33
266 37
266 43
266 47
400
266 72
266 74
266 76
630
266 73
266 75
266 77
800
265 91
265 95
1 000
265 92
265 96
1 250
265 93
265 97
1 600
265 94
265 98
Without release Right-hand side handle 3P 4P
Left-hand side handle 3P 4P
3P
4P
266 56
266 02
266 06
266 12
266 16
266 22
266 26
266 53
266 57
266 03
266 07
266 13
266 17
266 23
266 27
266 78
266 80
266 82
266 60
266 62
266 64
266 66
266 68
266 70
266 79
266 81
266 83
266 61
266 63
266 65
266 67
266 69
266 71
DX-IS visible load break p. 113 Rating (A)
With release 2P
3P
Without release 2P 3P
1P
4P
16
043 01
043 21
20
043 02
043 22
043 42
043 62 043 65
32
043 05
043 25
043 45
40
023 56
023 76
043 07
043 27
043 47
043 67
63
023 57
023 77
043 10
043 30
043 50
043 70
100
023 58
023 78
043 14
125
023 59
023 79
043 34
043 54
043 74
043 38
043 58
043 78
DPX-I visible load break p. 94 Rating (A)
Devices
3P
4P
125
DPX-I 125
250 98
250 99
160
DPX-I 160
251 98
251 99
250
DPX-I 250 ER
252 98
252 99
250
DPX-I 250
253 98
253 99
400
DPX-I 630
255 86
255 87
630
DPX-I 630
255 88
255 89
800
DPX-I 1 600
257 94
257 95
1 250
DPX-I 1 600
257 96
257 97
1 600
DPX-I 1 600
257 98
257 99
Red catalogue numbers: New products
202
VistopTM 32 A
VistopTM 32 A
full load break isolating switches
full load break isolating switches
Conform to standards IEC NF EN 60947-3, BS EN 60947-3, VDE 0660 NBN EN 60947-3 Veritas approved Red handle/yellow frontplate conform to VDE 0113, IEC 60 204-1, EN 60 204 Glass fibre reinforced insulating casing, self-extinguishing at 960 °C (NF C 20-455) Handle can be locked in "OFF" position with 1 to 3 padlocks Ø 6 mm Accept the following NC + NO auxiliary contacts Cat.Nos 227 03/08: - 1 or 2 contacts (on handle side)
■ Electrical characteristics Thermal rating (Ith)(1)
32 A cages
Terminals 225 02
225 05
Connection
6 to 16 mm2
Cu
±
690 V
Insulation voltage (Ui)
Safety switch for on-load circuit breaking by visible isolation of the contacts "Double break" type load switching with self-cleaning contacts by rapid make and break movements 2 versions • With handle on side of the unit for flange mounting: supplied complete with gasket, screws and 30 to 170 mm extension shaft (supplied with the unit) • With handle on front of the unit which can be used for a door interlock facility to prevent the opening of an enclosure whilst circuits are energized (Cat.No 227 34 below to be ordered separately) Pack
1 1 1
Cat.Nos Front handle
Side handle
224 98 225 00 225 02
225 03 225 05 225 07
2P 3P 4P
16 mm2 cage terminals
AC 22 A(2)
AC 23 A(2)
400 V 500 V
32 A (17 kW) 32 A (20 kW)
400 V
32 A (17 kW)
500 V
20 A (14 kW) -
690 V
5
Peak current (kA) 1 s resistant current (kA rms) (Icw) Icc with fuse (kA rating)
0.5 100 32 A (gG) 20 A (aM)
Max. rating of fuses
Black handle Connection
8 kV
Impulse resistant current voltage (U imp)
No of 17.5 mm modules Side handle removed
4 4 5
3.5 3.5 4.5
Short-circuit capacity (kA prospective peak) (Icm)
0.75 > 10 000
Mechanical endurance (No of operations)
IP 2x (16 mm2) IP 3x under front plate AC 22 A: Resistive motor breaking AC 23 A: Inductive motor breaking
Index of protection AC: alternating current A = use with frequent operations
■ Dimensions
227 30
1
227 34
1
227 03 227 08
Front handle Cat.Nos 224 98 - 225 00/02 2 P. 3 P : 70 4 P : 83 Ø5
63 44
max. : 191 mm min. : 53 mm
51
1
Left-hand side control Kit comprising: angle linking plate, fixing screws, front cover and technical sheet For black handle Front external control Kit comprising: connecting rod, racket, drilling template and mounting accessories Door distance 46 to 91 mm Auxiliary switch for on/off signalling Connection 5 A - 250 V N/C +N/O lug 2.58 2 set of N/C + N/O
92 82 53 45
Accessories
±
Weight (kg)
2P 0.220
88 92 3P 0.240
4P 0.290
Side handle Cat.Nos 225 03/05/07 69.5 44
51
2 P. 3 P : 98.5 4 P : 111.5 Ø 5
92 82 53 45
1
55
2 P.3 P : 26 4 P : 39
2 P.3 P : 26 4 P : 39 Weight (kg)
2P 0.300
Mounting on rail
3P 0.320
65
28 62
4P 0.370
4 or with 4 x M5 screws
(1) Continuity of service 8 h - IEC 60947-1 (2) Test conditions in accordance with IEC 60947-3
203
VistopTM 63 to 160 A visible load break isolating switches, screws or din-rail mounting
225 15
4 rail fixing
227 22
225 53
225 18
227 98
227 32
Technical information and dimensions (p. 205) Safety isolating switches with visible breaking of load and positive action of the contacts Double breaking of the phases by self-cleaning snap open/close action contacts Label holders for identification of the circuits Connection via cage terminals tightened by Allen key (except 63 A ; by PZ 2 screws) Screw-fixing or on EN 50022 rail (only on rail for 63 A Vistop) Two versions for mounting on faceplate: • With left or right external side handle with seal to maintain the IP protection (up to IP 55), mounting accessories, self-adhesive drilling template, adjustable extension rod (30 to 170 mm) • With direct or external front handle with Cat.No 227 32 to be ordered separately Possibility of attaching a 2-pole - 16 A auxiliary isolating switch Cat.No 227 22, or one or two N/C + N/O auxiliary Cat.No 227 04/07
4
Pack
Cat.Nos Front handle
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
225 12 225 15 225 20 225 22 225 34 225 39 225 51 225 53
Side handle
Black handle 63 A
225 16 3-pole 225 18 4-pole 100 A 225 25 3-pole 225 27 4-pole 125 A 225 44 3-pole 225 46 4-pole 160 A 225 54 3-pole 225 56 4-pole
Pack
7 7
7.5 9 7.5 9
Auxiliary isolating switch 2-pole - 16 A - 400 V For creating 3 or 4-pole assemblies for simultaneous breaking of 2-pole auxiliary power supply (PLC, remote control), 16 A maximum Mounts on the left side of Vistop 100 to 160 A
No of 17.5 mm modules
7.5 9
Cat.Nos
1
227 22 2 P
Connection
No of 17.5 mm modules
Cage terminals
1.5
Sealable terminal shields 1
227 98 Set of 2 separate, sealable terminal shields Clip on upstream and/or downstream of Vistop 100 to 160 A
Full load isolating switch units up to 160 A (p. 215)
Front external handle Kit comprising: connecting rods, bracket, self-adhesive drilling template, mounting accessories (including a seal for maintaining the IP protection of the enclosure up to IP 55) and locking mechanism preventing the door being opened when the circuit is closed For Vistop fixing on rail Door distance or using screws (mm) 63, 100, 125 et 160 A 35 to 470
4
1
227 32
Auxiliary switches for on-off signalling IP 2x - 5A - 250V
1 1
204
227 04 227 07
N/O + N/C contact For incorporation in one-piece enclosure Main contact Door distance Additional N/C + N/O (mm) auxiliary contact for 2 N/C + 2 N/O mounting lug 2.58
VistopTM 63 to 160 A visible load break isolating switches
■ Dimensions Accept auxiliary contacts N/C + N/O (Cat.No 227 04/07) 1 or 2 (side handle) (p. 86) Front handle 98 74 60
C1 78
Conform to standards NF C 63-130, NF EN 60947-3, IEC 60947-3, BS EN 60947-3, VDE 0660, NBN EN 60947-3, CNOMO E03 - 15-611 R, Veritas approved Version with red handle/yellow front plate conforms to standards NF C 79-130, VDE 0113, IEC 60204-I, EN 60204 Glass fibre reinforced insulating casing, self-extinguishing at 960 °C (IEC NF EN 60695-2-1) Handle can be padlocked in open position using 1 to 3 padlocks Ø 6 mm
C2 83 63 45
■ Electrical characteristics Thermal rating (Ith)
63 A
100 A
125 A
160 A
Isolating switch 16 A(4)
Terminals
cage
cage
cage
cage
cage
4 to 352
4 to 50 mm2
62
4 to 502
4 to 70 mm2
62
Insulating voltage (Ui)
690 V
800 V
800 V
800 V
Impulse resistant voltage (U imp)
8 kV
8 kV
8 kV
8 kV
±
±
±
±
±
Side handle
400 V
400 V 63 A (35 kW) 100 A (55 kW) 125 A (70 kW) 160 A (88 kW)
16 A
500 V 63 A (44 kW) 100 A (69 kW) 125 A (87 kW) 160 A (110 kW)
-
DC 22 A/250 V(1) (2)
*
100
125
125
22
16 A
DC 23 A/250 V(1) (2)
*
100
125
125
10 A
Breaking capacity (Icu) (kA peak)
15
15
15
15
2
1 s resistant current (kA rms) (Icw)
2.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
1
Icc with fuses (kA rms)
100
100
100
80
100
Fuse rupture capacity
63 A
100 A (gG) 63 A (aM)(3)
125 A (gG) 125 A (aM)(3)
160 A (gG) 125 A (aM)
-
7
12
12
12
1
Mechanical endurance (No of operations)
> 30 000
> 30 000
> 30 000
> 30 000
> 30 000
Index of protection
IP 2x B (IP 3x C under front plates) from 6 mm2
Short circuit capacity (kA prospective peak) (Icm)
C2 83 66 63 45 22.5
690 V 40 A (38 kW) 100 A (96 kW) 125 A (120 kW) 125 A (120 kW)
32
8
C1
-
AC 22 A AC 23 A(1)
44 min. 114 - max. 523
C
24
Connec- Cu (flexible) tion Cu (rigid)
22 6
44 60
6
C1
C1
C1
Front handle 63 A 100 A, 125 A, 160 A 3 and 4-pole 3P 4P 125 133 160 17.7 26.7 90 91
C C1 C2
16 50
C
External side handle 63 A 100 A, 125 A, 160 A 3 and 4-pole 3P 4P 125 133 160 17.7 26.7 90 91
■ Example of mounting with Vistop 100 to 160 A Front external handle Cat.No 227 32
IP 2x B (IP 3x C under front plate) from 10 mm2
Isolating switch Vistop Auxiliary Cat.No 227 22
Sealable terminal shields Cat.No 227 98
Padlock Cat.No 227 97
(1) Test conditions accordance with IEC 60947-3 AC = alternating current. DC = direct current. A = for frequent switching AC 22 A/DC 22 A: resistive motor breaking AC 23 A/DC 23 A: inductive motor breaking (2) N° of breaking contacts: 2 (3) 100 A (aM) with blade type cartridge fuses (4) Values correspond to the device mounted on Vistop 100 - 125 - 160 A
205
DPX-IS 250 isolating switches 63 to 250 A mounting and connection accessories
266 37
266 47
Isolating switches for on-load circuit breaking by visible isolation and positive action of the contacts Connection with cage terminals Padlock integrated in the handle Supplied with terminal shields Conform to IEC 60947-3 Category of use AC 23 A Accept the same electrical auxiliaries as the DPX (see p. 207) Pack
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DPX-IS with release
Cat.Nos
3P
4P
266 30 266 31 266 32 266 33
266 34 266 35 266 36 266 37
266 40 266 41 266 42 266 43
266 44 266 45 266 46 266 47
266 50 266 51 266 52 266 53
266 54 266 55 266 56 266 57
3P
4P
266 02 266 03
266 06 266 07
266 12 266 13
266 16 266 17
266 22 266 23
266 26 266 27
Supplied without shunt trip Can be associated with a residual current relay with separate coils (p. 63) Front handle 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A Right-hand side handle 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A Left-hand side handle 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A
DPX-IS without release 1 1 1 1 1 1
Pack
Front handle 160 A 250 A Right-hand side handle 160 A 250 A Left-hand side handle 160 A 250 A
Cat.Nos
266 89 266 90
1 1
266 86 266 87
1 1
1
262 39 262 99
1
262 87
1
266 92
1
266 94
1
Mounting accessories Emergency handle For replacement of standard handles Front and right side emergency handle Left side emergency handle Mounting kit for remote handle IP 55 Kit comprising: connecting rods, brackets, drilling template, mounting accessories (including a seal for maintaining the IP up to 55) and locking mechanism preventing the door being opened when the circuit is closed For remote front and side handle For remote front and side emergency handle(1) Fixing accessories Plate for mounting on rail Spacer for modules device Fits on rail so that they can combined with the DPX-IS 250 on the same row Terminal shields Set of 2 Locking accessories Ronis key lock Interlock Interlock module (one for each DPX-IS) Provides the closing of 2 devices at the same time
4
Connection accessories 1
1
1
Cage terminals Set of 4 terminals for cable 185 mm2 max. (rigid) or 150 mm2 max. (flexible) Spreaders 273 22 Set of upstream and downstream spreaders 3P 4P Rear terminals 265 10 265 11 Set of upstream and downstream spreaders 262 88
Common auxiliaries to DPX
see p. 192 (1) To order together with Cat.No 266 89 or 266 90 Red catalogue numbers: New products
206
DPX-IS 250 isolating switches
■ Electrical characteristics
Mounted on rail 72.5 100 A
160 A
Nominal rating (Ue)
690 V
± ± 690 V±
63 A
100 A
160 A
250 A
690 V
63 A
100 A
160 A
160 A
63 A
100 A
160 A
250 A
40 kA
63 A 63 A
gG aM mechanical electrical (AC 23 - 400 V )
Max. rating of fuse
105
72.5
85.5
70 250 A 160 A
74
35
2 500 operations
±
11.5
IP 20 front panel
40.5
Ø 18 max.
74
50 min. 300 max. 11.5
32
18
35 35 35 160 195
74
■ Mounting Mounted on rail with plate (XL3 400 p. 209, XL3 800 p. 224)
11.5
1-6
55
42 1.5
28 max.
140 195
77 45
45
138 77
8 M4
18 8
10 max. M4
90 35 35 35
10 max.
■ Dimensions
17.5
42
138
Index of protection
258
Endurance
With terminal shields
12 kA efficient 100 kA efficient 100 A 160 A 100 A 160 A 25 000 operations
I admissible ls (Icw) I admissible with fuse (Icc)
1 75 76.5
195
45
AC 22 A
11.5
400 V
Short-circuit making capacity (kA efficient) (Icm)
8.5
60
AC 23 A
138 35
± - 250 V= ± 8 kV±
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
74 40.5
800 V
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
105 70 35
45 42
Copper bar
150 185 mm2 Width max. 28 mm
Cu flexible Cu rigid / Alu
Connection
250 A
mm2
27
63 A
129
Rating
4
Spacer 262 99
40.4
Right lateral handle 18 8
Ø 18 max.
45
10 max. M4
10 max.
90 35 35 35
138 77
17.5
Plate 262 39 28 max.
1-6 18
35 35 35 195
74
Left lateral handle
40.4
Distribution terminal 048 68
90° 17.5
138 77
35 35 35
11.5
35 35 35 195
28 max.
207
DPX-IS 630 isolating switches 400 to 630 A
266 62
262 50
266 70
262 51
Isolating switches for on-load circuit breaking by visible isolation and positive action of the contacts Connection with cage terminals Padlock integrated in the handle Supplied with terminal shields Conform to IEC 60947-3 Category of use AC 23 A Accept the same electrical auxiliaries as the DPX (p. 192) Pack
1 1 1 1 1 1
DPX-IS with release
Cat.Nos
3P
4P
266 72 266 73
266 74 266 75
266 76 266 77
266 78 266 79
266 80 266 81
266 82 266 83
Pack
Supplied without shunt trip Can be associated with a residual current relay with separate coil (p. 193) Front handle 400 A 630 A Right-hand side handle 400 A 630 A Left-hand side handle 400 A 630 A
1 1
1 1 1
Cat.Nos
Connection accessories
Cage terminals Set of 4 terminals for cables 300 mm2 max. (rigid) or 240 mm2 max. (flexible) 262 51 Set of 4 terminals for cables 2 x 240 mm2 max. (rigid) or 2 x 185 mm2 max. (flexible) 3P 4P Spreaders 262 48 262 49 Set of upstream or downstream spreaders Rear terminals 263 50 263 51 Set of upstream and downstream swivel rear terminals 263 52 263 53 Set of upstream and downstream flat rear terminals 262 50
DPX-IS without release 3P
1 1 1 1 1 1
Front handle 266 62 400 A 266 63 630 A Right-hand side handle 266 66 400 A 266 67 630 A Left-hand side handle 266 70 400 A 266 71 630 A 4P
266 60 266 61 266 64 266 65 266 68 266 69
Mounting accessories
1 1
266 89 266 90
1
266 86 266 87
1
262 45
1
266 97
1
Emergency handle For replacement of standard handles Front and right side emergency handle Left side emergency handle Mounting kit for remote handle IP 55 Kit comprising: connecting rods, brackets, drilling template, mounting accessories (including a seal for maintaining the IP up to 55) and locking mechanism preventing the door being opened when the circuit is closed For remote front and side handle For remote front and side emergency handle(1) Terminal shields Set of 2 Locking accessory Ronis key lock
Common auxiliaries to DPX
see p. 192 (1) To order together with Cat.No 266 89 or 266 90 Red catalogue numbers: New products
208
DPX-IS 630 isolating switches
■ Electrical characteristics Cu flexible Cu rigid/Alu
1 x 240 or 2 x 185 1 x 300 or 2 x 240
mm2
width max. 32 mm
Nominal rating (Ue)
690 V
A 500 VA 690 VA 690 VA 250 V= 400 V
94 138 160 200 630 A
400 A
630 A
400 A
630 A
400 A
630 A
400 A
630 A
105 181
130.5 87 43.5
20 kA efficient
I admissible with fuse (kA efficient) (Icc)
26
Front handle with terminal shields
40 kA
I admissible ls (Icw)
43.5 43.5 43.5
108.2
100 kA 630 A 630 A
Mechanical endurance
15 000 operations
Electrical endurance (AC 23 - 400 V )
1 500 operations
Index of protection
IP 20 front panel
A
165.3
400 A
330.6
aM
94
400 A
42
Max. rating of fuse
gG
65.3
DC 23 A
400 A
Short-circuit making capacity (kA efficient) (Icm)
17
M5
A - 250 V= A 8 kVA
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
AC 22 A
48
800 V
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
AC 23 A
43.5 43.5
˚ 90
Copper bar
265
200
Connection
327.5
630 A mm2
132
400 A
42
Rating
Left lateral handle
11 38.7
■ Dimensions 183.2
Front handle
265
48.1 43.5 43.5 28
6
42
15 max.
Ø 25 max. 26.4
116
17
M5
200
˚
138
90
105
38.2
105
32 max.
81.8
6
11
28
43.5 43.5 43.5 265
Right lateral handle 327.5 265 48
43.5 43.5
42
200 160 138 94
M5
132
90 ˚
17
105
26
43.5 43.5 43.5
181
209
NEW
DPX-IS 1 600 isolating switches 800 to 1 600 A accessories
265 98
262 65
Isolating switches for on-load circuit breaking by visible isolation and positive action of the contacts Connection with cage terminals Padlock integrated in the handle Supplied with terminal shields Conform to IEC 60947-3 Category of use AC 23 A Accept the same electrical auxiliaries as the DPX (p. 192) Pack
1 1 1 1
3P
4P
265 91 265 92 265 93 265 94
265 95 265 96 265 97 265 98
3P
1
1
DPX-IS with release
Cat.Nos
Pack
Supplied without shunt release Can be associated with a residual current relay with separate coil (p. 193) Front handle 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A
1
1
Mounting accessories
1
4P Sealable terminal shields 262 65 Set of 2 short terminal shields Insulation shields Used to isolate the connections between each pole 262 66 Set of 3 insulation shields
1
262 64
1 1 1
Cat.Nos
Cage terminals Set of 1 terminal for cables 2 x 240 mm2 max. (rigid) or 2 x 185 mm2 max. (flexible) 262 70 Set of terminal for cables 4 x 240 mm2 max. (rigid) or 4 x 185 mm2 max. (flexible) Spreaders For increasing the distance between each pole to be connected 3P 4P 262 73 262 74 Set of upstream or downstream spreaders Rear terminals Set of 6 (or 8) rear terminals, upstream or downstream 263 80 263 82 Short terminals 263 81 263 83 Long terminals Extended front terminals 262 67 Short terminals 262 68 Long terminals
Red catalogue numbers : New products
210
Connection accessories
262 69
Control and signalling auxiliaries
Residual current relay and coils
see p. 192
see p. 193
DPX-IS 1 600 isolating switches
■ Electrical characteristics Rating
Connexion
■ Dimensions 800 A
1 000 A
1 250 A
Cu flexible
2 x 185 mm2 or 4 x 185 mm2
Cu rigide
2 x 240 mm2 or 4 x 240 mm2
Alu
2 x 240 mm2 or 4 x 240 mm2
1 600 A
Front handle with terminal shields 280 70
204
70
70
64
50 mm or 80 mm
DC 23 A
400 V
800 A
1 000 A
1 250 A
1 600 A
500 V
800 A
1 000 A
1 250 A
1 600 A
800 A
1 000 A
1 250 A
1 600 A
800 A
1 000 A
1 250 A
1 600 A
20 kA efficient
I admissible is for 1s (Icw)
800 A
1 000 A
1 250 A
Short-circuit making capacity (kA peak) (Icm)
40 kA
Mechanical endurance
10 000
Electrical endurance (AC 23 A - 400 V )
±
Index of protection
158
94
298
278
149
35 140 210
M12 M10
5
140
100 kA efficient
I admissible with fuse (Icc) Max. rating of fuse
25 50
3 000
3 000
2 000
IP 20 front panel
1 600 A
Terminal shields
2 000 320
± ± 690 V± 250 V±
±
42
8 kV
205 100
24 max.
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
320
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
AC 23 A
169
± 690 V± 690 V
Nominal rating (Ue)
280
Copper bar
211
DPX-ITM 125 to 1 600 A
DPX - ITM 125 to 1 600 A
trip-free switches
technical characteristics
■ Electrical characteristics DPX-I 125 Rated 50/60 Hz operating voltage direct Ue (V) Rated insulation voltage Ui (V ) Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) Rated closing capacity on 400 V short-circuit Icm (kA) Short-time resistive t=1s current Icw (kA) Endurance (o.c cycle) mechanical electrical Conventional thermal current (A)
±
250 99
253 99
Dimensions (p. 62 to p. 73) Conform to IEC 60947-3 Category of use AC 23 A Trip-free switches for on-load circuit breaking and isolation of low voltage electrical circuits Can be associated to earth leakage modules or to corresponding DPX residual current relays up to DPX 250 ER Mount on rail Connection identical to corresponding DPX
DPX-I 160 DPX-I 250 ER DPX-I 250 500
500
690
690
690
250
250
250
250
250
250
500
500
500
690
690
690
6
6
6
8
8
8
3
3.6
4.3
4.3
13
40
1.7
2.1
3
3
7.6
20
8 500 1 500
7 000 1 000
7 000 1 000
7 000 1 000
4 000 1 000
2 500 500
125
160
250
250
630
1 600
AC 23 A (690 V
125 (500 V)
160 (500 V)
250 (500 V)
250
630
1 600
DC 23 A (250 V
125
160
250
250
630
-
±) ±)
2
Pack
1
DPX-I 125
Cat.Nos 3P
4P
250 98
250 99
In 125 A
DPX-I 160 1
3P
4P
251 98
251 99
In 160 A
DPX-I 250 ER 1
3P
4P
252 98
252 99
In 250 A
DPX-I 250 1
3P
4P
253 98
253 99
3P
4P
255 86 255 88
255 87 255 89
In 250 A
DPX-I 630 1 1
In 400 A 630 A
DPX-I 1 600 3P
1 1 1
257 94 257 96 257 98
4P In 257 95 800 A 257 97 1 250 A 257 99 1 600 A
Common auxiliaries to DPX (p. 192)
212
DPX-I 630 DPX-I 1 600
500
■ Dimensions Dimensions of DPX-I identical to corresponding DPX DPX-I
Dimensions
DPX-I 125
DPX 125 (see p. 62-63)
DPX-I 160
DPX 160 (see p. 64-65)
DPX-I 250 ER
DPX 250 ER (see p. 66-67)
DPX-I 250
DPX 250 (see p. 68-69)
DPX-I 630
DPX 630 (see p. 70-71)
DPX-I 1 600
DPX 1 600 (see p. 72-73)
20 A isolating switch
20 A isolating switch
full load break isolating switch
full load break isolating switch
Conform to standard IEC NF EN 60947-3
■ Electrical characteristics Thermal rating
20 A 102
Rigid Flexible with ferrules
Copper connection
0.75 to 62 690 V 20 A 16 A 10 A 0.35 20 25 1 kA
Insulation voltage AC 22 A
224 90 + 227 33
224 94
Safety switch for on load circuit breaking by visible isolation of the contacts "Double break" type load switching with self cleaning contacts by rapid make and break movements
500 V 400 V AC 23 A 690 V 1 s resistant current (kA efficient) Icc with fuse (kA) rating Max. rating of fuses Short circuit making capacity (Icm) Mechanical endurance (No of operations) Index of protection
100 000 IP 2x (wired)
■ Dimensions Cat.No 224 90
Pack
Cat.Nos
Front control, red handle
1
224 90 3 P
1
224 94 For making 3 P + N
18.5
44
75
45
Additional neutral pole 27 Off (O)
Accessories 55
33
66
Cat.No 224 94
75.5
12
17.5
33.5
1
227 00 N/C + N/O auxiliary contact 2 independent electrical contacts Rating: 4 A, 440 V (AC - 15 A) 227 33 Kit for front control with padlocking of door 66
1
48.5
■ Mounting of kit Cat.No 227 33
X
Usable depth (x) min. max. Without kit axis With kit axis
85 mm
100 mm
125 mm
255 mm
213
full load switch units
full load switch units
12 and 25 A - IP 65 proximity switching
technical characteristics
■ Technical characteristics Conform to IEC 60947-3, VDE 0113, NF EN 60947-3, IEC 60204-1 NF EN 60204-1 Ithe (thermal current in enclosure) = 12 A for 12 A - 25 A for 25 A IP 65 according to IEC 60529 and NF C 20-070 Insulating voltage UI = 690 V - Self-extinguishing at 960° Duty categories AC 21 AC 3 3 x 400 V 3 x 690 V
226 00/04 25 A (17 kW)
7 A (5.5 kW) 3.5 A (3 kW)
13.5 A (7.5 kW) 8 A (7.5 kW)
226 02
For on-load circuit breaking, isolation and locking equipment located remotely from a control cabinet Applications: Motors, fixed or mobile machines, air conditioners
■ Dimensions 12 A Cat.Nos 226 60/62
25 A Cat.Nos 226 00/02/04
Pack
Cat.Nos
120
76
Can also be used as a: • general switch • emergency breaker • emergency stop Totally isolated enclosure - IP 65 Black base Red front-mounted rotary knob on yellow background for immediate visual identification from a distance (position 0: open, position I: closed) The rotary knob can take up to 4 padlocks (Ø 6 mm) in position 0
Connection 12 A: Max. 4 mm2 (fixed) - 2.5 mm2 (flexible) 4 entries: 2 top, 2 bottom - Ø 19 mm PG 11 (Ø cable 10 mm max.) 25 A: Max. 6 mm2 (fixed) - 6 mm2 (flexible with lugs) 4 entries: 2 top, 2 bottom - Ø 23 mm PG 16 (Ø cable 14 mm max.)
12 A - IK 08 76
25 A - IK 07
1 1
1
214
Supplied complete with 2 anti-fraud locking screws and 1 relay terminal for continuity of neutral or earth (2 x 10 mm2) For breaking/isolating a single speed motor 226 00 3-pole Can incorporate a contact for remote control 226 02 3-pole + N N can be used as a contact for report of position For breaking/isolating a two-speed motor 226 04 6-pole
97 96
Fixing centres 12 A Cat.Nos 226 60/62
ø 4.5
77 109
25 A Cat.Nos 226 00/02/04
109
1
58
65
1
For breaking/isolating a single speed motor Supplied complete with 2 x 6 mm2 relay terminal 226 60 3-pole 226 62 3-pole + N N can be used as a contact for report of position
109
226 60
226 60/62 12 A (8.5 kW)
50 Ø 4.5 (for screw M4) Ø 4.5 (for screw M4)
full load isolating switch units
full load isolating switch units
32 to 160 A - IP 65
technical characteristics
■ Electrical characteristics Identical to corresponding Vistop isolating switch Switch units
Cat.Nos
Characteristics
32 A
226 05/07
Vistop 32 A p. 85
63 A
226 15/17
Vistop 63 A p. 86
100 A
226 25/27
Vistop 100 A p. 86
125 A
226 33/34
Vistop 125 A p. 86
160 A
226 35/37
Vistop 160 A p. 86
■ Dimensions 32 to 160 A E
A
C
226 37
D
B
Units supplied with 2 cable glands
226 17
226 07
Cat.Nos 226 05/07 226 15/17 226 25/27/33/34 226 35/37
32 A 63 A 100/125 A 160 A
A 200 290 332 382
B 160 190 262 292
C 218 263 316 346
D 93 95 132 132
E 93 102 132 132
Vistop with side red handle, yellow front plate version mounted in a IP 65 plastic boxes with transparent hinged cover Fitted with an auxiliary N/C + N/O contact for position signal Vistop padlockable in open position For agricultural machinery, textile industry machines, printing presses, wood-working or plastic industries, lifting bridges, industrial process rotating electrical machines Pack
Cat.Nos
Switch units with full load break isolating switches Vistop - IK 07 32 A Supplied with 2 cable glands 21 P - ISO 25
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
226 05 3 P 226 07 4 P
Connection
Earth terminal nominal capacity
16 mm2 cage terminals
10 mm2
63 A Supplied with 2 cable glands 29 P - ISO 32 226 15 3 P cage terminals 50 mm2 2 226 17 4 P 50 mm flexible 50 mm2 70 mm2 rigid 100 A Supplied with 2 cable glands 36 P - ISO 50 226 25 3 P cage terminals 50 mm2 226 27 4 P 50 mm2 flexible 50 mm2 70 mm2 rigid 125 A Supplied with 2 cable glands 36 P - ISO 50 226 33 3 P cage terminals 50 mm2 226 34 4 P 50 mm2 flexible 50 mm2 70 mm2 rigid 160 A Supplied with 2 cable glands 36 P - ISO 50 226 35 3 P cage terminals 50 mm2 226 37 4 P 50 mm2 flexible 50 mm2
215
[ P R OT E CT I O N ]
Products and systems
LR residual current circuit breakers and switches The new LR range provides a simple solution for the protection requirements of people and property on the domestic market. It is easy to incorporate in Ekinoxe NX distribution cabinets: an efficient, high-performance system
The range 40 A 20 mA
TYPE AC RCDs
I - ON
O- OFF
• • • •
Ratings 25 to 63 A Sensitivity 30, 100 and 300 mA 2 P and 4 P Surface mounted cylindrical test button
Socket circuits
C16
C16
C16
C20
C20
I - ON
I - ON
I - ON
I - ON
I - ON
O- OFF
O- OFF
O- OFF
O- OFF
O- OFF
EKINOXE NX • A range from 4 to 36 modules flush or surface mounting • White and transparent plastic door or white metal door
16 A
16 A
16 A
20 A
20 A
2.52
2.52
2.52
2.52
2.52
Legrand advantages
1 2 3
216
Complete, short range Special marking on front panel Clamps at the bottom for fixing on rail
N
Neutral
L
Phase Earth
CIRCUIT BREAKERS • • • •
Ratings 2 to 63 A 1 P, 2 P, 3 P, 4 P B and C curves Breaking capacity: 10 000 A on 127/220 V mains supply 6 000 A on 230/400 V mains supply
± ±
C10
C20
C32
C16
C16
I - ON
I - ON
I - ON
I - ON
I - ON
O- OFF
O- OFF
O- OFF
O- OFF
O- OFF
FOR MORE INFORMATION See the on-line catalogue: instructions, technical data sheets, etc.
217
NEW
LRTM 6 000 thermal magnetic MCBs from 6 A to 63 A B and C curves
6048 96
6048 50
Dimensions (p. 237) Conform to IEC 60898 Breaking capacity: 6 000 - IEC 60898 - 230/400 V 6 kA - IEC 60947-2 - 230/400 V 10 000 - IEC 60898 - 127/220 V 10 kA - IEC 60947-2 - 127/220 V Do not accept auxiliaries
±± ±±
Pack
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Cat.Nos
±
Single pole - 230/400 V
B curve
C curve
In
Number of modules
6049 02 6049 03 6049 04 6049 05 6049 06 6049 07 6049 08 6049 09 6049 10 6049 11
6048 02 6048 03 6048 04 6048 05 6048 06 6048 07 6048 08 6048 09 6048 10 6048 11
6A 10 A 13 A 16 A 20 A 25 A 32 A 40 A 50 A 63 A
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Pack
Cat.Nos B curve
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
C curve
6049 32 6048 32 6049 33 6048 33 6048 34 6049 35 6048 35 6049 36 6048 36 6049 37 6048 37 6049 38 6048 38 6049 39 6048 39 6049 40 6048 40 6049 41 6048 41
±
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
In
Number of modules
6048 90 6048 91 6048 92 6048 93 6047 90 6047 91 6047 92
6A 10 A 13 A 16 A 20 A 25 A 32 A
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
1
±
B curve
C curve
In
Number of modules
6049 17 6049 18 6049 19 6049 20 6049 21 6049 22 6049 23 6049 24 6049 25 6049 26
6048 17 6048 18 6048 19 6048 20 6048 21 6048 22 6048 23 6048 24 6048 25 6048 26
6A 10 A 13 A 16 A 20 A 25 A 32 A 40 A 50 A 63 A
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Number of modules
6A 10 A 13 A 16 A 20 A 25 A 32 A 40 A 50 A 63 A
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3-pole + neutral(1) - 400 V
5
2-pole - 400 V
±
In
±
Single pole + neutral(1) - 230 V C curve
3-pole - 400 V
1
C curve
In
Number of modules
6047 96 6048 94 6048 95 6048 96 6048 97 6048 98 6048 99 6047 97 6047 98 6047 99
6A 10 A 13 A 16 A 20 A 25 A 32 A 40 A 50 A 63 A
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4-pole - 400 V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
±
C curve
In
Number of modules
6048 47 6048 48 6048 50 6048 51 6048 52 6048 53 6048 54 6048 55 6048 56
6A 10 A 16 A 20 A 25 A 32 A 40 A 50 A 63 A
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
(1) Neutral on right-hand side Red catalogue numbers: New products
218
NEW
LRTM RCD
LRTM
AC and A types
technical characteristics
■ MCBs Technical characteristics • Maximun AC voltage : 230 - 400 V • Maximun DC voltage : 80 V per pole • Insulation voltage : 500 V • Dielectric : 2 500 V • Curves : B and C • Rating : 6 to 63 A • Pole : 1 P, 1 P + N, 2 P, 3 P, 3 P + N, 4 P • Conform to IEC 60898 Mechanical characteristics Endurance : 20 000 mechanical switching operation 10 000 on load switching operation at cos ϕ 0.9 Connection cross section (in mm2) : 252 flexible cables 352 rigid cables Applied connection torque : 2.5 Nm Agrements VDE, ANCE
±
= ± ±
6021 93
6021 53
Dimensions (p. 237) Conform to IEC 61008-1 Pack
Cat.Nos AC type
A type
2-pole - 230 V 30 mA Nominal rating (A)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
±
Number of modules
6021 36 6021 37 6021 93 6021 38
25 40 63 100 mA
2 2 2
6021 39 6021 40
25 40 300 mA
2 2
6021 42 6021 43 6021 44
25 40 63
2 2 2
■ RCD Technical characteristics • Type : AC and A • Sensitivity : 30 mA, 100 mA, 300 mA • Pole : 2 P and 4 P • Rating : 25, 40, 63 A • conform to IEC/EN 61008-1 Mechanical characteristics Endurance : 20 000 mechanical switching operation 10 000 on load switching operation at cos ϕ 0.9 2 000 via test 2 000 by fault current Connection cross section (in mm2) : 252 flexible cables 352 rigid cables
±
4-pole(1) - 400 V AC type
A type
30 mA Nominal rating (A)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Number of modules
6021 46 6021 47 6021 94 6021 95
25 40 63 100 mA
4 4 4
6021 49 6021 50
25 40 300 mA
4 4
6021 52 6021 53
25 40
4 4
(1) Neutral on right-hand side Red catalogue numbers: New products
219
]
Products and systems
[
LEXIC
Modular din-rail equipement Lexic, Legrand's modular wiring accessories for rails 2, give you the freedom to organise your distribution board as you please, and give you a complete and innovative choice of functions
Choice
220
MCB
isolating switch
RCD
RCBO
add-on module
signalling auxiliary
command auxiliary
motor MCB
voltage surge protector
fuse carrier
push-button, control switch
indicators
pulse operated latching relay
contactor
time-lag switch
time delay relay
light sensitive switch
programmable time switch
transformer
buzzer, bell
socket outlet
thermostat
power supply
dimmer, remote dimmer
Imocad
analogue energy metering device
digital energy metering device
measuring central unit
LEXIC FREEDOM OF INSTALLATION
LEXIC SIMPLICITY OF INSTALLATION
LEXIC OPERATIONAL SAFETY • Standardised information marking Nominal Rating
Cat.No Breaking capacity
Curve
• Busbar attachment • Distribution via busbar
• The auxiliaries common to MCBS, isolating switches and RCDs, are mounted to the left of the devices • Add-on modules are mounted to the right of MCBS • Each device can be renoved independently, without unscrewing
• Organisation of rows • Alignment quality of rows
Class
• Labelling using integrated label-holder on the device
• IP 2x screw terminals
FOR MORE INFORMATION Come and be trained at Innoval
Consult the E-Catalogue: Instructions, technical data sheets, etc.
Agent export
221
LEXIC
DX-E 6 000 - 6 kA thermal magnetic MCBs from 6 to 63 A B and C curves
032 70
034 33
DXTM 6 000 , 6 kA
Protection, identification and information feedback
033 28
Dimensions (p. 237) Technical characteristics (p. 76 and p. 77) Breaking capacity 6 000 - IEC 60898 - 400 V 6 kA - IEC 60947-2 - 400 V
AA
Pack
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Cat.Nos
±
Single pole - 230/400 V
B curve
C curve
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
032 66 032 68 032 69 032 70 032 71 032 72 032 73 032 74 032 75 032 76
033 82 033 84 033 85 033 86 033 87 033 88 033 89 033 90 033 91 033 92
6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B curve
C curve
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
033 08 033 10 033 11 033 12 033 13 033 14 033 15 033 16 033 17 033 18
034 29 034 31 034 32 034 33 034 34 034 35 034 36 034 37 034 38 034 39
6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
B curve
C curve
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
033 22 033 24 033 25 033 26 033 27 033 28 033 29 033 30 033 31 033 32
034 47 034 49 034 50 034 51 034 52 034 53 034 54 034 55 034 56 034 57
6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
B curve
C curve
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
033 68 033 70 033 71 033 72 033 73 033 74 033 75 033 76 033 77 033 78
034 89 034 91 034 92 034 93 034 94 034 95 034 96 034 97 034 98 034 99
6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
2-pole - 400 V 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
3-pole - 400 V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4-pole - 400 V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
±
±
±
Auxiliaries and accessories for MCBs (p. 232) Residual current devices (p. 224)
222
>>>
> Protection devices in consumer units should always be identifiable to allow immediate intervention. > The DXTM 6 000 has a label-holder, ensuring that the protected circuit is immediately identifiable, and provides information feedback via its auxiliairies.
DXTM - IS isolating switches visible load break
073 61
023 58
043 22
043 26
043 74
Dimensions (p. 237) Technical characteristics (p. 76 and p. 77)
4
Mounting on rail EN 60715 Breaking capacity AC 22 A according to IEC 60947 - 3 Double break contacts Pack
Cat.Nos
NEW
Remote trip head isolating switches Visual indication of the actual state of the contacts: • Closed position or fault (red Led-I) • Open position (green Led) on handle In the event of a fault on opening, the red position indicator signals the faulty pole, the handle in the central position Red handle (head device) Common auxiliaries to DX (p. 122) 2 P - 400 V
±
Nominal rating (A)
2 2 2 2
023 56 023 57 023 58 023 59
1 1 1 1
023 76 023 77 023 78 023 79
Number of modules
40 63 100 125 4 P - 400 V 40 63 100 125
2 2 2 2
±
Pack
Cat.Nos
±
3 P - 400 V Nominal rating (A)
5 5 3 3 3 3
043 42 043 45 043 47 043 50 043 54 043 58
5 5 2 2 2 2
043 62 043 65 043 67 043 70 043 74 043 78
±
10 10 10 10 10 10
043 01 043 02 043 05 043 07 043 10 043 14
10
043 03
10 10 10 5 5 5 5
043 21 043 22 043 25 043 27 043 30 043 34 043 38
Number of modules
16 20 32 40 63 100 1 P with indicator - 250 V Supplied with lamp
1 1 1 1 1 1
1
10 10
1 1 1 2 2 2 2
± 1 1
Command auxiliaries Mounting on isolating switch with release Shunt releases 12 to 45 V / 110 to 415 V 110 to 125 V Minimum voltage trip adjustable from 0 to 300 ms 24 V / 48 V / 230 V Signalling auxiliaries Mounting on all isolating switches DX-IS Auxiliary changeover switch 6 A - 250 V - 3 auxilliaries max. Auxiliary changeover switch + fault signalling switch (6 A - 250 V ) Can be modified to 2 auxiliary changeover switches
± ±= =
Number of modules
073 60 073 61
1 1 1
073 65 073 66 073 68
1
073 50
1
073 54
2
044 42 Support for Ø 4 mm and Ø 6 mm padlock
±
2 P - 400 V 16 20 32 40 63 100 125 2 P with indicator - 250 V Supplied with lamp 043 23 20 043 26 32
2 2 4 4 4 4
1 1
±
20
2 2 3 3 3 3
Auxiliaries
Isolating switches Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
20 32 40 63 100 125 4 P - 400 V 20 32 40 63 100 125
±
4 4 4 4
1 P - 250 V
Isolating switches (continued)
± ± == ±
± ±
1 1
1 1 1
1 1
Accessories 1/3
044 43 Padlock Ø 4 mm
1
227 97 Padlock Ø 6 mm
2
044 44 Sealable screw cover (4 separate poles)
6
044 47 Insulating shield
Screw cover
Insulating shield
For three-phase version, please consult us Bold pack quantities: Minimum quantities to be ordered Red catalogue numbers: New products
223
LEXIC
DXTM - RCDs residual current devices AC, A and Hpi types
S 086 95
090 53
090 74
091 47
Dimensions (p. 237) Technical characteristics (p. 76 and p. 77) Conform to IEC 61008 - 1 Pack
Cat.Nos
AC type
Pack
Cat.Nos
±
Detect AC component faults 2-pole - 230 V
4-pole - 400 V Neutral on left-hand side
±
Sensitivity
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
089 06 089 09 089 10 089 11 089 12 089 15 089 16 089 17 089 18 089 27 089 28 089 29 089 30
Nominal rating (A)
10 mA 16 30 mA 25 30 mA 40 30 mA 63 30 mA 80 100 mA 25 100 mA 40 100 mA 63 100 mA 80 300 mA 25 300 mA 40 300 mA 63 300 mA 80 4-pole - 400 V Neutral on left-hand side 30 mA 25 30 mA 40 30 mA 63 Neutral on right-hand side 30 mA 25 30 mA 40 30 mA 63 30 mA 80 100 mA 25 100 mA 40 100 mA 63 100 mA 80 300 mA 25 300 mA 40 300 mA 63 300 mA 80 300 mA (s) 40 300 mA (s) 63 500 mA 25 500 mA 40 500 mA 63 500 mA 80
Number of modules
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
±
1 1 1
086 93 086 94 086 95
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
089 93 089 94 089 95 089 96 089 99 090 00 090 01 090 02 090 11 090 12 090 13 090 14 090 18 090 19 090 23 090 24 090 25 090 26
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
A type Detect AC and DC component faults 2-pole - 230 V
±
Sensitivity
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
090 53 090 56 090 57 090 58 090 59 090 74 090 75 090 76 090 77
10 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA
A type (continued)
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
16 25 40 63 80 25 40 63 80
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Sensitivity
1 1 1
090 98 090 99 091 00
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
091 40 091 41 091 42 091 43 091 44(1) 091 46 091 47 091 48 091 49 091 50(1) 091 58 091 59 091 60 091 61 091 62(1) 091 65 091 66 091 71 091 72 091 73 091 74(1)
Nominal rating (A)
30 mA 25 30 mA 40 30 mA 63 Neutral on right-hand side 30 mA 25 30 mA 40 30 mA 63 30 mA 80 30 mA 100 100 mA 25 100 mA 40 100 mA 63 100 mA 80 100 mA 100 300 mA 25 300 mA 40 300 mA 63 300 mA 80 300 mA 100 300 mA (s) 40 300 mA (s) 63 500 mA 40 500 mA 63 500 mA 80 500 mA 100
Number of modules
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Hpi type (High immunity) NEW
Enhanced immunity to unwanted tripping in disturbed environments Detect AC and DC component faults (A type) 2-pole - 230 V
±
Sensitivity
1 1 1
Nominal rating (A)
088 22 088 23 088 24
30 mA 25 30 mA 40 30 mA 63 4-pole - 400 V Neutral on right-hand side 6021 08 30 mA 25 6021 09 30 mA 40 6021 10 30 mA 63
Number of modules
2 2 2
±
1 1 1
4 4 4
Auxiliary changeover switch for 2 pole RCD Clips on the left-hand side of the residual current device Allows insertion of the supply busbar at the top Indicates the position of the switches Compulsory if mounting other auxiliaries 1
±
073 52 6 A - 250 V
Number of modules
0.5
Auxiliaries and accessories (p. 232) (1) Available on September 2005 Red catalogue numbers: New products
224
DXTM - IS isolating switches
performance of circuit breakers and RCDs
■ DX isolating switches - IS
■ Connection cross-section in mm2
Approvals: NF USE, VDE, KEMA, BBJ (in process) Electrical characteristics Thermal rating (Hh) Connection
16 - 32 A flexible
1.5 to 16
mm2
rigid 250 - 400 V
Isolating voltage (Hi) Impulse withstand voltage (vimp)
±
4 kV AC 22
Operating category
A(1)
40 - 63 A
100 - 125 A
1.5 to 25 mm2
6 to 35 mm2
1.5 to 35 mm2
±
250 - 400 V
A(1)
4 kV AC 22
A(1)
1 700 A
2 500 A
Breaking capacity in short-circuit (Icm)
1 500 A
3 000 A
3 700 A
> 30 000
> 30 000
> 30 000
IP 2x wired
IP 2x (> 25 mm2)
IP 2x wired (1) test conditions according to IEC 60947-3 AC 22 A: combined motor/resistor breaking
25
±
750 A
Protection index
flexible
35
4 to 50 mm2
Permissible nominal current (Icw)
No. of electrical operations
Connection at top and bottom
rigid
250 - 400 V
4 kV AC 22
Cable
RCDs
Operation of DX - IS remote trip head isolating switches • DX-IS contacts in open position:
■ AC type
■ A type
• DX-IS contacts in closed position:
- handle's contact in closed position (I-ON), red Led - red indicator (I-ON)
- Specific applications: dedicated lines
In addition to the characteristics of AC type RCDs, A type RCDs also detect DC residual currents They are used whenever fault currents are not sinusoidal They are particularrly suitable for the following specific applications (dedicated lines) or materials may produce DC fault currents, speed drives with frequency inverters, etc.
■ Hpi type - handle in open position (O-OFF), green Led - no signal from the indicator
- Standard applications
AC type RCDs detect AC residual currents In the majority of cases (standard applications), they are used for AC current detection at 50/60 Hz
- Special applications
Type Hpi RCDs are devices which offer additional immunity to unwanted tripping which significantly exceeds the level required by the standard They are also able to detect AC and DC residual currents (A type) Operation between - 25 °C and + 40 °C They are used in special applications where: • Loss of information is potentially damaging, e.g. power supply lines for computer equipment (banks, equipment on military bases, flight reservation centres, etc.) • Loss of operation is potentially damaging (automated machinery, medical equipment, freezer cable, etc.) They are also used: • On sites where there is an increased risk of lightning strikes (see p. 127) • On sites where cables are subject to high levels of interference (use of fluorescents, etc.) • On sites where very long cables are used
• DX-IS contacts in open position, with one faulty pole:
- handle in central position - red position indicator signals the faulty pole (I-ON) - immediate identification of the faulty pole for direct intervention
225
LEXIC
DXTM 6 000 - 10 kA thermal magnetic MCBs from 0.5 to 63 A B and C curves
064 91
064 68
065 66
Dimensions (p. 237) Technical characteristics (p. 76 and p. 77) Breaking capacity 6 000 A - IEC 60898 - 400 V 10 kA - IEC 60947-2 - 400 V
AA
Pack
1 1 1 1 1 10 10 1 1 10 1 1 1 1
Cat.Nos
±
Single pole - 230/400 V
B curve
C curve
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
061 52 061 53 061 54 061 55 061 56 061 58 061 60 061 61 061 62 061 63 061 64 061 65 061 66
063 68 063 69 063 70 063 71 063 72 063 74 063 76 063 77 063 78 063 79 063 80 063 81 063 82
1 2 3 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Pack
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cat.Nos
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
062 77 062 78 062 79 062 80 062 81 062 83 062 85 062 86 062 87 062 88 062 89 062 90 062 91
064 80 064 81 064 82 064 83 064 84 064 86 064 88 064 89 064 90 064 91 064 92 064 93 064 94
1 2 3 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
±
±
3-pole + neutral - 400 V
1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 1 1 1 1
C curve
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
061 89 061 95 061 96 061 97 061 98 062 00 062 02 062 03 062 04 062 05 062 06
064 01 064 03 064 04 064 05 064 06 064 07 064 09 064 12 064 13 064 14 064 15 064 16
0.5 1 2 3 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2-pole - 400 V 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1
NEW
Neutral on right-hand side
B curve
±
B curve
C curve
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
062 57 062 58 062 59 062 60 062 61 062 63 062 65 062 66 062 67 062 68 062 69 062 70 062 71
064 60 064 61 064 62 064 63 064 64 064 66 064 68 064 69 064 70 064 71 064 72 064 73 064 74
1 2 3 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Neutral on right-hand side
B curve
C curve
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
063 31 063 34 063 36 063 37 063 38 063 39 063 40 063 41 063 42
065 39 065 41 065 43 065 44 065 45 065 46 065 47 065 48 065 49
6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4-pole - 400 V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Red catalogue numbers: New products
226
±
C curve
Single pole + neutral - 230 V NEW
3-pole - 400 V
B curve
±
C curve
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
065 55 065 56 065 57 065 58 065 59 065 61 065 63 065 64 065 65 065 66 065 67 065 68 065 69
1 2 3 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
DXTM 6 000 - 10 kA RCBO up to 63 A AC and A types
6064 00
078 86
079 19
079 80
Dimensions (p. 237) Technical characteristics (p. 76 and p. 77) Breaking capacity: - 6 000 A - IEC 61009-1, 10 kA - IEC 60947-2 (except for single pole and single pole + neutral - 6 kA) C curve Pack
Cat.Nos
NEW
AC type
6064 00 6064 01 6064 02 6064 03 6064 04 6064 05
078 79 078 81 078 83 078 84 078 86 078 87 078 88 078 89 078 90 078 94 078 95 078 97 078 98 078 99 079 00 079 01
±
Sensitivity
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
30 mA 10 30 mA 16 30 mA 20 30 mA 25 30 mA 32 30 mA 45 Single pole + neutral - 230 V Neutral on right-hand side 10 mA 16 30 mA 3 30 mA 6 30 mA 10 30 mA 16 30 mA 20 30 mA 25 30 mA 32 30 mA 40 300 mA 6 300 mA 10 300 mA 16 300 mA 20 300 mA 25 300 mA 32 300 mA 40 2-pole - 230/400 V 10 mA 10 10 mA 16 10 mA 20 30 mA 10 30 mA 16 30 mA 20 30 mA 25 30 mA 32 30 mA 40 30 mA 50 30 mA 63 300 mA 10 300 mA 16 300 mA 20 300 mA 25 300 mA 32 300 mA 40 300 mA 50 300 mA 63
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
±
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
077 45 077 46 077 47 079 11 079 19 079 20 079 21 079 22 079 29 079 30 079 31 079 44 079 46 079 47 079 48 079 49 079 50 079 51 079 52
AC type (continued) 4-pole - 400 V
±
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cat.Nos
±
Sensitivity
1 1 1 1 1 1
Pack
Detect AC component faults Single pole - 230 V
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
079 62 079 64 079 65 079 66 079 67 080 13 080 14 080 15 079 75 079 77 079 78 079 79 079 80 080 31 080 32 080 33
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
4 4 4 4 4 7 7 7 4 4 4 4 4 7 7 7
30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA
A type Detect AC and DC component faults Single pole + neutral - 230 V Neutral on right-hand side
±
Sensitivity
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
085 75 085 79 085 85 085 87 085 88 085 89 085 90 085 91
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
080 75 080 76 080 77 080 78 080 79 080 84 080 85 080 86 080 87 080 88
10 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 4-pole - 400 V 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
3 6 10 16 20 25 32 40
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10 16 20 25 32 10 16 20 25 32
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
±
Red catalogue numbers: New products
227
LEXIC
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA thermal magnetic MCBs high breaking capacity from 2 to 125 A B and C curves
068 60
069 20
064 76
067 83
070 00
Dimensions (p. 237) Technical characteristics (p. 76 and p. 77) Conform to IEC 60898 Breaking capacity 10 000 IEC 60898 - 400 V 25 kA to 12.5 kA - IEC 60947-2 - 400 V
A
A
Pack
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cat.Nos
±
Single pole - 230/400 V
B curve
C curve
Nominal rating (A)
066 92 066 93 066 95 066 97 066 98 067 00 067 01 067 02 067 03 067 04 067 05 067 06
068 53 068 54 068 56 068 58 068 59 068 60 068 61 068 62 068 63 068 64 068 65 068 66 063 83 063 84 063 85
2 3 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Pack
Number of modules
Breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 230 V/400 V
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 20 15 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cat.Nos B curve
C curve
Nominal rating (A)
067 73 067 74 067 76 067 78 067 79 067 80 067 81 067 82 067 83 067 84 067 85 067 86
069 33 069 34 069 36 069 38 069 39 069 40 069 41 069 42 069 43 069 44 069 45 069 46 064 95 064 96 064 97
2 3 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
±
1 51 1 51 1 1 1 1 1 1
Neutral on right-hand side C curve
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
Breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 230 V
067 36 067 38 067 39 067 40 067 41 067 42 067 43 067 44 067 45 067 46
068 96 068 98 068 99 069 00 069 01 069 02 069 03 069 04 069 05 069 06
6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
25 25 25 25 25 20 15 15 12.5 12.5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
C curve
Number of modules
069 13 069 14 069 16 069 18 069 19 069 20 069 21 069 22 069 23 069 24 069 25 069 26 064 75 064 76 064 77
2 3 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
C curve
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
068 16 068 18 068 19 068 20 068 21 068 22 068 23 068 24 068 25 068 26
069 76 069 78 069 79 069 80 069 81 069 82 069 83 069 84 069 85 069 86
6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4-pole - 400 V Breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 400 V 230 V
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 25 20 20 15 15 16 16 16
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 25 25 25 25 25
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Z curve, please consult us Red catalogue numbers: New products
228
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 20 15 15 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 25 25 16 16 16
Neutral on right-hand side
B curve
±
Nominal rating (A)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4.5 4.5 4.5
Breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 400 V 230 V
3-pole + neutral - 400 V NEW
B curve
2-pole - 400 V
±
Number of modules
±
Single pole + neutral - 230 V NEW
3-pole - 400 V
Breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 400 V 230 V
25 25 25 25 25 20 15 15 12.5 12.5
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 25 25
±
C curve
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
069 93 069 94 069 96 069 98 069 99 070 00 070 01 070 02 070 03 070 04 070 05 070 06 065 70 065 71 065 72
2 3 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 6
Breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 400 V 230 V
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 20 15 15 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 25 25 16 16 16
Auxiliaries and accessories (p. 232) Add-on modules (p. 230)
DXTM 6 000 -15 kA thermal magnetic MCBs from 1 to 125 A D curve
066 36
065 89
066 62
066 71
Dimensions (p. 237) Technical characteristics (p. 76 and p. 77) Breaking capacity 6 000 - IEC 60898 up to 63 A - 400 V 10 000 - IEC 60898 80 A to 125 A 15 kA - IEC 60947-2 up to 32 A - 400 V 10 kA - IEC 60947-2 40 A to 125 A - 400 V Magnetic adjusted between 10 and 14 In
A AA
Pack
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cat.Nos
±
Single pole - 230/400 V
D curve
Number of modules
Breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 230 - 400 V
065 75 065 76 065 77 065 79 065 81 065 82 065 83 065 84 065 85 065 86 065 87 065 88 065 89
1 2 3 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 10 10 10
2-pole - 400 V
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
±
D curve
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
066 25 066 26 066 27 066 29 066 31 066 32 066 33 066 34 066 35 066 36 066 37 066 38 066 39 066 40 066 41 066 42
1 2 3 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
3-pole - 400 V
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Pack
Nominal rating (A)
Cat.Nos
±
4-pole - 400 V
D curve
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
066 65 066 66 066 67 066 68 066 69 066 71 066 73 066 74 066 75 066 76 066 77 066 78 066 79 066 80 066 81 066 82
1 2 3 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 6
Breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 400 V 230 V
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 10 10 10 10 10 10
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 20 20 20 16 16 16
Breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 400 V 230 V
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 10 10 10 10 10 10
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 20 20 20 16 16 16
±
D curve
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
066 45 066 46 066 47 066 49 066 51 066 52 066 53 066 54 066 55 066 56 066 57 066 58 066 59 066 60 066 61 066 62
1 2 3 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4.5 4.5 4.5
Breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 400 V 230 V
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 10 10 10 10 10 10
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 20 20 20 16 16 16
229
LEXIC
DXTM add-on modules for DX, DX-H AC, A and Hpi types
S
074 01
074 63
075 64
Dimensions (p. 237) Technical characteristics (p. 76 and p. 77) Conform to 61009-1 Mounted on the right-hand side of the MCBs For DX, DX-H (except Cat.Nos 032 66 to 034 99 and Cat.Nos 6048 02 to 6049 41 MCB LR 6 000 ) Pack
Cat.Nos
AC type
Pack
Cat.Nos
4-pole - 400 V Sensitivity
±
Sensitivity
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
074 01 074 02 074 03 074 07 074 08 074 09 074 11 074 23
Maximum rating (A)
30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA (s) 1 A (s) 3-pole - 400 V 30 mA 30 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA 4-pole - 400 V 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA (s) 300 mA (s) 1 A (s) 1 A (s)
32 63 80 to 125 32 63 80 to 125 63 63
Number of modules
2 2 4 2 2 4 2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
075 37 075 38 075 39 075 43 075 44 075 45 075 47
074 28 074 29 074 34 074 35 074 36 074 38
32 63 32 63 80 to 125 63
3 3 3 3 6 3
074 55 074 56 074 57 074 61 074 62 074 63 074 65 074 66 074 77 074 78
32 63 80 to 125 32 63 80 to 125 63 80 to 125 63 80 to 125
3 3 6 3 3 6 3 6 3 6
Detect AC and DC component faults 2-pole - 230/400 V
±
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
074 83 074 84 074 85 074 89 074 90 074 91 074 93
1 1 1 1
075 11 075 17 075 18 075 20
Maximum rating (A)
30 mA 32 30 mA 63 30 mA 80 to 125 300 mA 32 300 mA 63 300 mA 80 to 125 300 mA (s) 63 3-pole - 400 V 30 mA 32 300 mA 63 300 mA 80 to 125 300 mA (s) 63
Number of modules
2 2 4 2 2 4 2
±
230
32 63 80 to 125 32 63 80 to 125 63
3 3 6 3 3 6 3
±
Sensitivity
1
Maximum rating (A)
075 64
30 mA 63 3-pole - 400 V 075 68 30 mA 63 075 69 30 mA 80 to 125 4-pole - 400 V 075 74 300 mA (s) 63
Number of modules
2
±
A type
Sensitivity
Number of modules
Enhanced immunity to unwanted tripping in disturbed environments Detect AC and DC component faults (A type) 2-pole - 230/400 V
±
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA 300 mA (s)
Maximum rating (A)
Hpi type (High immunity)
±
1 1 1 1 1 1
A type (continued)
±
Detect AC component faults 2-pole - 230/400 V
3 3 6 3
1 1
3 6
±
1
3
Auxiliaries and accessories for MCBs (p. 232)
Residual current devices (p. 224)
DX-L 50 kA thermal magnetic MCBs high breaking capacity from 10 to 63 A add on modules
071 14
071 44
Designed as a veritable digital workshop, XL PRO2 software significantly boosts distribution panel administration
Breaking capacity 50 kA - IEC 60947-2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cat.Nos
2-pole - 400 V
C curve
Number of modules
071 12 071 14 071 15 071 16 071 17 071 18 071 19 071 20
10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4-pole - 400 V
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
±
Nominal rating (A)
>>>
The software for distribution panel designers
Dimensions (p. 237) Technical characteristics (p. 76 and p. 77)
Pack
XL PRO2
Breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 400 V 230 V
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
±
C curve
Nominal rating (A)
Number of modules
071 42 071 44 071 45 071 46 071 47 071 48 071 49 071 50
10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 400 V 230 V
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
Add on modules Hpi type (High immunity) Conform to standard IEC 61009-1 Mounted on the right-hand side of the MCBs DX-L Enhanced immunity to unwanted tripping in disturbed environments Detect DC component faults (A type) 2-pole - 230/400 V
±
Sensitivity
1 1 1 1
075 76 075 77 075 78 075 79
1 1 1 1
075 84 075 85 075 86 075 87
Number of modules
30 mA 300 mA 300 mA (s) 1 A (s) 4-pole - 400 V 30 mA 300 mA 300 mA (s) 1 A (s)
2 2 2 2
> Select the required products > Calculate the corresponding types of enclosures > View the layout of the products in the enclosures
± 3 3 3 3
> Automatically generate the wiring diagram for your installation > Work out the cost
231
LEXIC
DXTM exemple : xxxxxxx pour auxiliaries, remote control and accessories xxxxxxxx for MCBs, RCDs and RCBOs
073 50
Pack
073 54
Cat.Nos
073 60
073 68
073 73
Auxiliaries
Pack
3)(1)
1
073 50
1
073 51
1
073 53
1
073 54
1 1
1 1 1
073 60 073 61
073 65 073 66 073 68
Clip on the left-hand side (maximum Allow insertion of the supply busbar at the top Auxiliaries common to: - DX, DX-H, DX-L - RCD with auxiliary switch Cat.No 073 52 Number of Signalling auxiliaries modules Auxiliary changeover switch 6 A - 250 V 0.5 Indicates the position of the MCB or RCD Fault signalling changeover switch 0.5 6 A - 250 V Indicates tripping of the MCB at a fault Auxiliary changeover switch 6 A - 250 V 0.5 Can be modified to a fault signalling changeover switch Auxiliary changeover switch 6 A - 250 V 1 + fault signalling switch Can be modified to 2 auxiliary changeover switches Command auxiliaries Shunt releases Enable the MCB to be tripped from a remote location 12 to 48 V and 1 110 to 415 V 1 110 to 125 V Undervoltage releases Time delay adjustable from 0 to 300 ms 24 V 1 48 V 1 230 V 1
±
2
1/3 1 2
±
±
2
1 6
=
± =
5
Cat.Nos
Accessories
Padlocking 044 42 Support for Ø 4 mm or Ø 6 mm padlock for DX, DX-H, DX-L MCBs and 2 P RCDs 044 43 Padlock Ø 4 mm 227 97 Padlock Ø 6 mm Sealable screw cover 044 44 For DX up to 63 A DX-H MCBs, RCBOs and RCDs (4 separable poles)
044 48 For MCBs from 80 A to 125 A and DX-L (4 separable poles)
Terminal shields 044 39 Single pole for DX MCBs from 80 A to 125 A and DX-L 044 47 Insulating shields for DX MCBs DX-H and DX-L Spacing unit 044 41 1 module
= = ±
Remote control(2) Clip on the left-hand side of the MCBs Equipped with: - Auxiliary changeover switch - Fault signalling switch 2 A - 230 V Can be padlocked in open position (Ø 4 mm) Motor-driven control modules Can be used to open and close DX, DX-H, and DX D curve, (2, 3 and 4-pole ≤ 63 A) and RCDs, Number of RCBOs remotely modules
±
1 1 1
1
232
± ± ±
3 3 3
±
2
073 70 24 V 073 71 48 V 073 73 230 V Automatic resetting Gives automatically an order of resetting Can be used to send a reclosing command automatically Can be connected to motor-driven control modules For use in installations which are not monitored or staffed (transmission relays, pump stations etc.) in order to meet service/operational continuity requirements 073 83 230 V
(1) Two auxiliary signalling devices max., with only one 1/2 module auxiliary One auxiliary control device can be connected and up to 2 auxiliary signalling devices max. which are installed between the RCD and the auxiliary control device with only one 1/2 module auxiliary (2) Controlled by a volt-free contact or push button (not illuminated) Not compatible with RCDs with 1.5 modules per pole (DX-H 80 to 125 A, DX-L), single module phase + neutral RCD (DX), 2 modules phase/neutral RCBOs (DX) and RCDs
Bold pack quantities: Minimum quantities to be ordered Red catalogue numbers: New products
performance of MCBs and auxiliaries
■ Breaking capacity in IT neutral earthing system
■ Curves for B, C, D, Z MCBs
1-pole (alone) breaking capacity of MCB at 400 V according to IEC 60947-2
t (time)
DX single pole
• Thermal release for a temperature of 30 °C
1.5 kA
+ neutral(1) B and C curves DX (2) B and C curves ≤ 63 A
3
Thermal (low overvoltage: slow release)
kA
DX-H B and C curves ≤ 20 A
6
kA
25 A
5
kA
32 et 40 A
4
kA
50 et 63 A
3
80 et 125 A
4
1h
DX-L C curve 10 to 63 A
6
kA
kA
≤ 32 A
4
kA
kA
40 to 125 A
3
kA
DX D curve
(1) Subject to meeting the requirements of section 431-2-2 of NFC 15-100, i.e.: - either the neutral conductor(s) in question are considered to be effectively protected against short-circuits by a protective device placed upstream - or the circuit(s) in question are protected by a residual current device In this case, the conductors must be the same cross-section and protected by MCBs with the same rated current and same trip characteristic (type B, C or D) (2) Single, double, triple + neutral or four-pole
Z B
C
D
Magnetic (high overvoltage: fast release)
0.01 s
■ Breaking capacity in the event of a short-circuit to earth and insulation voltage DX Single pole + Neutral Icn 1 Ui
DX B, C and D curves < 63 A
4 500 A 250 V
6 kA 500 V
DX D curve, DX-H B and C curves 80 to 125 A 10 kA
2 3 4 5 1 10 20 30 50 100 200 1.3 B C D x In (rating) 1.45 Thermal release for an ambient temperature = 30 °C
DX-L C curve
Curves
25 kA
500 V
500 V
Icn 1: Breaking capacity on 1 pole for multi-pole MCBs in the event of a short-circuit to earth Ui: rated insulation voltage
■ Connection cross-section for screw terminals (in mm2) Max. cable rigid flexible • DX single pole + N, with or without earth leakage module
16
10
• DX, DX D curve earth leakage modules ≤ 63 A DX-L earth leakage modules
35
25
• DX-H, earth leakage modules 80, 100, 125 A, DX-L
70
50
• Auxiliaries
2.5
2.5
Magnetic threshold setting 2.4 to 3,6 In
Z(1) B
3 to 5 In
C
5 to 10 In
D
10 to 14 In (10 to 20 depending on standard)
(1) Z curve, please consult us
■ Technical characteristics of DX auxiliaries - Max. connection cross-section: 2.5 mm2 - Operating temperature: - 5 à + 50 °C • Current shunt releases Ph
C1
nominal voltage (Un) - 12 to 48 V and - 110 to 415 V 110 to 125 V Fitted with automatic breaking contact
12
±± =
U N C2
=
Min. and max. voltage: from 0.7 to 1.1 V Tripping time: < to 20 ms Power consumption: at 1.1 x 48 V = 121 VA at 1.1 x 415 V = 127 VA Impedance : 12 to 48 V = 23 Ω 110 to 415 V = 1 640 Ω Consumption
U min.
U max.
12 to 48 V 110 to 415 V
522 mA 69 mA
2 610 mA 259 mA
• Undervoltage releases Ph/+
D1
N/-
D2
nominal voltage (Un) 24 V 48 V 230 V
U
== ±
Pull-in voltage: ≥ 0.55 Un Tripping time: from 100 to 400 ms ± 10% (adjustable) Power consumption: 24 V 0.1 VA 48 V 0.2 VA 230 V 1 VA
== =
233
LEXIC
performance of MCBs and auxiliaries (continued)
■ Protection of DC circuits
=
Lexic DX and DX-H MCBs (1P/2P/3P/4P - In ≤ 63 A) designed for use in 230/400 V , supplies, can also be used in DC circuits In this case, the following deratings and precautions must be taken into account 1 - Protection against short-circuits Max. magnetic tripping threshold: multiplied by 1.4 Example: For a C curve MCB for which the AC tripping threshold is between 5 and 10 In, the DC tripping threshold will be between 7 and 14 In 2 - Protection against overloads The time/current thermal tripping curve is the same as for AC 3 - Operating voltage Max. operating voltage: 80 V per pole (60 V for single-pole + N MCBs) For voltages higher than this value, several poles must be wired in series
±
Example: circuit earthed via the negative polarity / U = 110 V / Icc = 10 kA / In = 32 A Protect the positive polarity using an MCB capable of breaking 10 kA at 110 V (DX-H 2 P 32 A with 2 poles on the positive polarity) For isolation, use a DX-H 3P 32 A with 2 poles on the positive polarity and one pole on the negative polarity DX-H LEXIC
voltage
single-pole
2P
Acc. to
48 V
10 kA
10 kA
IEC 60947.2 Icu
110 V
= per pole)
+
15 kA If isolation required +
+
DX-H 32 A 3P
-
+ U-Isc max.
(1)
At other voltages, the breaking capacities are as follows: +
10 kA
• Network earthed via a middle point: Place on each polarity the number of poles necessary for max. Isc breaking at half voltage
4 - Breaking capacity 4 000 A for a single pole MCB at max. voltage (80 V
+
10 kA
4P
230 V
DX-H 32 A 2P
Example: for a 110 V voltage, use a 2-pole MCB and connect the 2 poles in series
3P
U/2 +
U/2-Isc max.
U/2 (1)
U/2-Isc max. (1) MCB
DX
voltage
single-pole
Acc. to
48 V
6 kA
IEC 60947.2 Icu
110 V
2P
3P
Ics(1)
4P
6 kA 6 kA
6 kA
230 V 48 V
-
10 kA 100 %
110 V
100 % 100 %
100 %
230 V
(U/2-Isc max.)
=
Example: circuit earthed via a middle point / U = 230 V / Icc = 6 kA / In = 10 A Protect each polarity using an MCB capable of breaking 6 kA at half voltage, i.e. 115 V (DX 4P 10 A with 2 poles on each polarity) DX LEXIC
voltage
single-pole
2P
Acc. to
48 V
6 kA
6 kA
3P
IEC 60947.2 Icu
110 V
6 kA
6 kA
230 V
100 %
4P
10 kA
+ DX-H
voltage
single-pole
2P
Acc. to
48 V
10 kA
10 kA
IEC 60947.2 Icu
110 V
10 kA
3P
10 kA
230 V 48 V Ics(1)
110 V 230 V
4P
15 kA 100 %
-
100 % 100 %
100 % 100 %
5 - Distribution of breaking poles To choose the MCB and determine the pole distribution necessary for breaking on each of the polarities, it is necessary to know how the installation is earthed • Supply with one polarity earthed: Place all the poles necessary for breaking on the other polarity If isolation is required, an additional pole must be added on the earthed polarity +
DX 10 A 4P
• Isolated earth supply: Distribute the poles necessary for breaking over the 2 polarities to provide protection in the event of a double earth fault (particularly if there are a number of circuits in parallel) (1)
+
U-Isc max.
U
(1)
U-Isc max.
MCB (U-Isc max.) (1) MCB
U-Isc max U
(1) Only
(1)
U=0
if isolation required
(U-Isc max.)
=
Example: isolated earth circuit / U = 48 V / Icc = 4,5 kA / In = 40 A Protect the installation with an MCB capable of breaking 4.5 kA at 48 V and protect each polarity (DX MCB 2 P 40 A with one pole on each polarity) DX LEXIC
voltage
single-pole
2P
Acc. to
48 V
6 kA
6 kA
IEC 60947.2 Icu
110 V 230 V
+
DX 40 A 2P
(1) As a % of Icu
234
1st earth fault : I = O 2sd earth fault : U and I ≤ Isc max.
6 kA
3P
4P
6 kA 10 kA
■ Specific case of continuity of service
■ Withstand to short-circuits: MCBs and RCDs (in kA)
On some unmanned sites which need to be monitored specifically for continuity of service, untimely tripping of RCDs will not be permitted For example: isolated telephone/TV or radio-type relay sites, pump stations Optimum continuity of service can be achieved by using an Hpi RCCB in conjunction with a motor-driven control and an automatic reclosing control device (see p. 232)
Caution: it is advisable to provide overload protection for the RCD
Downstream RCD 2P 230 V
N L
N
L1
L0
L
L
N
08
05
L1
4P 230/400 V
B1 B2
DX (B and C curves) 1P+ 2 P, 3 P neutral and 4 P
MCB upstream DX-H (B and C curves) 80 to 63 A 125 A
≤ 63 A
≤ 125 A 6
6
10
10
6
6
25 A
6
10
10
6
6
6
40 A
6
10
10
6
6
6
63 A
6
10
10
6
6
6
80 A
6
10
10
6
6
6
25 A
1.5(1)
10
20
20
50
25
40 A
1.5(1)
10
15
20
50
25
10
12.5
12.5
50
25
12.5
12.5
80 A
C
DPX 125
16 A
63 A
11 12 14 95 96 98
DX-L
25
± on 1 pole in IT earthing system
(1) Icn 1 at 400 V
S
Motor-driven control Cat.Nos 073 70/71/73
■ Withstand to short-circuits: fuse cartridges and RCDs (in kA)
Automatic reclosing control device Cat.No 073 83
Special case of continuity of service In certain locations, where there are no personnel, in which particular care is required to ensure continuity of service, false tripping of MCBs is not permissible (isolated telephone/TV/radio relay stations, pumping stations, etc.) The combination of an Hpi type RCBO with motor-driven control and a recloser provides optimum continuity of service (p. 122)
Caution: it is advisable to provide overload protection for the RCD Downstream RCDs 2P 230 V 16 to 80 A
±
4P 230/400 V 25 to 80 A
±
gG fuse cartridges upstream 16 A
25 A
40 A
63 A
80 A
100
100
30
10
6
-
100
100
50
15
■ RCD tripping curves • Average RCD operating curves
■ Residual current breaking capacity of DX RCBOs
1 t(s)
I∆m according to EN 61009-1
0.5
Adaptable earth leakage modules - DX 6 000 , DX-H 10mA
30mA
300mA
6 000 A 30 000 A
- DX-L 1A RCBOs -P+N
3 000 A
- 2 P (4 modules)
6 000 A
- 4 P 10 to 32 A (4 modules)
4 500 A
- 4 P 40 to 63 A (7 modules)
6 000 A
0.1
A, AC or Hpi type selective (s)
0.05
Hpi type A or AC type instantaneous
0.01 10 0
10 1
10 2
10 3
4 I (mA) 10
For more information on the basic rules of protection, come and be trained at Innoval www.legrandelectric.com
235
LEXIC
motor MCBs
motor MCBs
thermal magnetic
technical characteristics
■ Technical characteristics Selection of circuit breaker depending on the motor Cat.Nos 029 26 029 27 029 28 029 29 029 30 029 31 029 32 029 33 029 34
Use: for local control and protection of three-phase electric motors with a power rating less than or equal to 11 kW This device is used instead of an overcurrent release combined with an aM fuse cartridge
029 29
Provide localised control and protection of 3-phase electrical motors Conform to IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1 Ultimate breaking capacity at 400/415 V - Icu 15 kA (14 to 25 A) Compensated thermal adjustment on front panel from - 20 °C to + 60 °C Factory set fixed magnetic between 10 and 12 In Electrical endurance AC3: 100 000 operations Service category: 25 OC/hour Connection (max.): • flexible/rigids 2 x 6 mm2 • flexible with glands: 2 x 4 mm2 Padlockable in "OFF" position (Ø 4 mm padlock) Cat.No 044 43
A
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cat.Nos
Derating the Ics standard breaking capacity depending on the voltage Voltage Rating 0.16 to 1.6 2.5 to 10 A 14 to 18 A 23 to 25 A
Triple pole MCBs
Depth 71 mm
Nominal rating (A)
029 21 029 22 029 23 029 24 029 25 029 26 029 27 029 28 029 29 029 30 029 31 029 32 029 33 029 34
0.16 0.25 0.40 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 25
Thermal adjustment range
0.10 0.16 0.25 0.40 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6 9 13 17 20
to to to to to to to to to to to to to to
0.16 0.25 0.40 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 25
Number of modules
A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
±
±
±
230 V
400 V
690 V
unlimited unlimited unlimited 50 kA
unlimited unlimited 7.5 kA 6 kA
unlimited 2.25 kA 2.25 kA 2.25 kA
■ Dimensions
Single-phase motor connection
IP 55 box
L
2 4 6 84
4 holes Ø 16
93
U V M
IP 55 box 1
029 41 For motor MCB with an auxiliary contact (Cat.No 029 49 or 029 48) and/or a trip (Cat.No 029 37 or 029 38)
■ Thermal-magnetic tripping curve 10 000
Auxiliary contacts Contact
029 48
Capacity
±
1
N/O Signal contact 2 contacts max. 029 49 NC + NO
1 1
Undervoltage trip To be fitted to right of motor MCB Trip operation: • Trip between 0.7 and 0.35 x Un • Hold between 0.85 and 1.1 x Un 029 37 230 V 1.4 VA 029 38 400 V 1.4 VA
± ±
6 A - 230 V
±±
6 A - 230 V 2.5 A - 230 V
Number of modules
0.5
0.5
1 1
Average operating time at 20° (seconds)
1 000
Failure contact 1
100 10
3 po
1
044 43
in h
ot s ta
te
0.01 0.001
1
1.5
10 Current in multiples of the selting current
Ø 4 mm
Bold pack quantities: Minimum quantities to be ordered
236
les
0.1
Padlock 1/3
N
1 3 5 147
Pack
Auxiliary contacts Clip on to left-hand side of the circuit-breaker Maximum 2: 1 auxiliary failure contact (Cat.No 029 48 and 1 auxiliary signal contact (Cat.No 029 49), or two auxiliary signal contacts (Cat.No 029 49) The auxiliary failure contact is always attached to the circuit-breaker
130
029 29 + 029 41
Standard motor power for 3 phase operation 230 V (kW) 400 V (kW) 0.37 0.37 0.75 0.75 1.5 1.1 2.2 2.2 4 3 5.5 4 7.5 5.5 9 5.5 11
ln (A) 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 25
100
dimensions of LEXIC modular din-rail equipment
■ DX-DX-H, DX-L, RCDs, fuse carriers
■ Other mechanisms
Switches, push-buttons, contactors, pulse operated latching relays, relays, thermostats, remote control dimmers, bells, timers, socket outlets
Programmable time switches, light sensitive switches, voltmeters,
A
A and C E
45
D
G D
45
E
C F
B
B
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
1-pole 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole +N Thermal-magnetic MCBs LR, DX, DX-H up to 63 A DX-L, DX D curve, DX-H from 80 to 125 A
70
70
17.7
26.7
35.6
53.4
53.4
71.2
80.1 106.8
60
83 44
76
60
83 44
76
89
60
89 44
77
89
44.5
Earth leakage modules up to 63 A
70
35.6
53.4
60
93 44
76
99
70
71.1
107.2 107.2
60
88 44
76
89
71.2
124.6
60
83 44
76
94
RCBOs 4-pole RCBOs with 4 modules RCDs (LR, DX) 2-pole
70
17.7
35.6
70
71.2
70
35.6
60 60
83 44
76 76
94
71.2
60
83 44
77.5 94
60
83 44
73
94
8.7
60
83 44
76
83
70
17.7
60
83 44
76
83
70
17.7
60
83 44
76
83
Remote control
80.5
54
DX - IS 20 - 32 A
68
17.7
17.7
35.6
53.4
60
83 44
74
94
68
17.7
35.6
53.4
71.2
60
83 44
74
94
Fuse carrier
67
Auxiliary contacts Cat.Nos 073 50/51/52/53
70
Auxiliary contact Cat.No 073 54 Control auxiliaries
63 - 100 - 125 A Changeover switches 043 82/85/88 043 83/86
17.7
17.7
35.6
53.4
B
C
D
E
F
037 00
60
17.8
60
83
44
66
60
17.8
60
86
37.5
66
037 52/53/55
60
53
60
89
44
66
047 61/63/71
60
35.6
60
90
44
66
037 10
60
106.5
60
89
44
66
Light sensitive switches Cat.No 037 21
60
35.6
60
90
44
66
Voltmeters - Ammeters
60
70
60
83
44
66
Contactors - 1 module 20 A
62
17.8
60
83
44
67.5
Contactors 40 and 63 A - 2 modules
60
35.6
61
80
44
67
- 3 modules
60
54
61
80
44
67
60
9
60
83
44
66
042 20/25
60
35.8
60
83.5
44
66
042 31/41/51/52
60
71.5
60
83.5
44
66
042 53/54
60
89
60
95
44
66
042 28
60
54
60
83.5
44
66
035 02
64
126
64
90
44
66
035 06
64
72
64
90
44
66
035 08/10/24/39
61
18
61
90
44
66
035 09
61
36
61
90
44
66
94
71.2
4-pole
71.5
83 44
A
037 30/40/42/43/44
94
71
53.4
Description Programmables time switches
Motor MCBs
from 80 to 125 A
F
Auxiliaries for contactors and pulse operated latching relays Transformers
80.5 83 44
80.5 89
68
17.7
60
83 44
74
94
68
35.6
60
83 44
74
94
Imocad
Push-buttons/push-button switches with indicators
68
Pulse operated latching relays
63.5
60
83 44
69
94
035 24/30/31/33/36/37/39
64
72
64
90
44
66
Time delay relays
70
17.8
60
81 44
76
80
035 34
64
144
64
90
44
66
Light sensitive switches 1 function 037 23
60
35.6
60
85 37.5 66
70
035 90/18
60
106
60
90
44
66
60
88
60
84 37.5 66
70
Thermostat 038 40
60
35.6
60
85 37.5 66
70
Electrical energy metering 046 73/74
60
72
60
81
44
66
Socket outlets
60
44.5
60
83 44
66
92
046 81/72
60
35.5
60
89
44
66
Buzzers/bells
60
17.5
60
76 44
66
85
Time lag switch 047 02
60
17.8
60
94 44
66
94
Central measuring unit 046 65
64
64
89.5
44
69
Residual current relay 260 88
60
60
89
44
66
4 functions 037 25
Remote control dimmers 036 64 036 70 Voltage surge protectors 039 20 to 23
17.7 17.8
60
17.8
35.6
83 44
74
94
60
17.8
60
94 44
66
90
66
72
60
88 44
72
90
60
17.7
35.6
53.4
71.2
60
86 44
68
91
039 30 to 38
60
17.7
35.6
53.4
71.2
60
86 44
68
91
039 40/41/43
60
17.7
35.6
71.2
60
86 44
68
91
105 35.5
237
PROTECTION OF INSTALLATIONS
>>>
pour exemple voltage surge protectors : xxxxxxx class 1, B xxxxxxxx class 2, C (H,I,S)
Voltage surge protector: 039 21
essential protection The voltage surge protector has become essential in installations because it behaves like a real short-circuit, shunting most of the energy resulting from the impulse voltage (Uimp) generated by the lightning strike
039 33
Technical characteristics (p. 128) Lexic voltage surge protectors for distribution boards or consumer units Conform to standard EN 61643-11, class 1 and class 2 with 4 capacities Fitted with built-in thermal protection Consist of a bracket and a plug-in replacement module with indicator Green: surge protector operational Orange: module needs replacing Can be fitted with a signalling auxiliary to transfer surge protector status For 230/400 V supply Frequency : 50/60 Hz
±
Pack
Cat.Nos
Modular lighting conductor High protection - H For neutral earthing systems: TT, TN, IT, Uc = 440 V Class 1: I imp = 10 kA (impulse discharge current 10/350 µs) Class 2: In = 20 kA; Up = 2 kV (protection level) I max = 70 kA (impulse discharge capacity 8/20 µs wave)
1 1 1 1
039 20 039 21 039 22 039 23
Associated protection(1)
Number of modules
068 64 069 24 069 44 070 04
1 2 3 4
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole Increased protection - I
For neutral earthing systems: TT, TN, IT, Uc = 440 V Class 2: In = 15 kA; Up = 1.8 kV I max = 40 kA ((impulse discharge current 8/20 µs) 1 1 1 1
039 30 039 31 039 32 039 33
Associated protection(1)
Number of modules
063 77 064 69 064 89 065 64
1 2 3 4
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole Standard protection - S
For neutral earthing systems: TT, TN, Uc = 320 V Class 2: In = 5 kA; Up = 1.2 kV I max = 15 kA ((impulse discharge current 8/20 µs)
1
> Just as important as an MCB for protecting sensitive equipment, the voltage surge protector forms an integral part of the the installation
1 1
039 40 1-pole 039 41 2-pole 039 43 4-pole
Associated protection(1)
Number of modules
063 77 064 69 065 64
1 2 4
Lighting resistor For neutral earthing systems: TT, TN, IT, Uc = 440 V Protection of buildings equipped with a lighting conductor (LPS system) Not plugable Class 1: Imp = 12.5 kA; In = 20 kA; Up = 1.8 kV
1
039 10 1-pole
Associated protection(1)
Number of modules
068 64
2
(1) Minimum protection for Icc max.:10 kA
238
LEXIC
voltage surge protectors
voltage surge protectors for telephone lines
equipment
039 34
039 58
038 28
038 29
Technical characteristics (p. 128)
039 62
Pack
039 63
Cat.Nos
Replacement modules Plug-in replacement modules With indicator Green: surge protector operational Orange: module needs replacing
5 5 5 5
039 28 039 34 039 39 039 44
I imp (kA)
I max (kA)
UP (kV)
10 -
70 40 40 15
2.0 1.8 1.4 1.2
For surge protector
039 20/21/22/23 039 30/31/32/33 039 35/36/38 039 40/41/43
For protection of: telephone, fax, modem, etc., connected on the internal telephone line, against overvoltages of atmospheric origin Installed in a distribution cabinet, especially the ELV/signal cabinet Cat.No 011 95 (please consult us), or terminal shield boxes Ekinoxe "S" 1 module (p. 191) Connected in series on the telephone line Mechanical indication of operation: • green: surge protector operational • orange: surge protector needs replacing Conform to standard EN 61643-21 Pack
1 1
Cat.Nos
Voltage surge protector for telephone lines
038 28 Analogue 038 29 Digital
Signalling auxiliaries With changeover microswitch 2 A - 250 V Clip onto the base of the surge protector For 1-pole module For 2-pole module For 3-pole module For 4-pole module
±
1 1 1 1
039 55 039 56 039 57 039 58
Decoupling inductors
1 1
For coordination of 2 voltage surge protectors within less than 2 m distance in the same installation, espacially when type 1 and type 2 v.s.p. are installed in the same board For multipole voltage surge protectors, each conductor must be equipped Number with one decoupling inductor of modules 039 62 35 A - 500 V 2 039 63 63 A - 500 V 4
± ±
239
isolating supports for busbars in XL3 and Altis cabinets and enclosures "standard" distribution
373 10
Pack
10
374 14
Cat.Nos
373 98
10
374 37
5
373 96
1
374 32
1
374 36
Universal supports
1
1
373 21
Pack
1 bar per pole ≤ 280 A Single pole support for bars 12 x 2 or 14 x 4 mm Single pole support for bars 15 x 4, 18 x 4 or 25 x 4 mm Set of 2 four pole supports for bars 12 x 2 or 12 x 4 mm Set of 2 four pole supports for bars 15 x 4 or 18 x 4 mm Set of 2 four pole supports for bars 25 x 4 mm
Supports for 1
095 67
374 19 + 373 11
Cat.Nos
Copper bars Flat rigid Cross Permissible Threaded holes section (mm) I (A) Ø mm Pitch
10 10 10
373 88 373 89 374 33
12 x 2 12 x 4 15 x 4
110 160 200
M5 M5 M6
18 18 18
Length (mm)
Cross I (A) Threaded Length section (mm) IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 holes (mm)
XL3
1 bar per pole ≤ 400 A 373 15 Support for copper bars 18 x 4, 25 x 5 and 32 x 5 mm, in flat position For mounting in XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures 373 10 Support for copper bars 18 x 4, 25 x 4, 25 x 5 and 32 x 5 mm, in sloping position to create a vertical busbar For mounting: - in XL3 400, in the cable sleeves - in XL3 800, in the internal cable sleeves - on plate 1 bar per pole ≤ 800 A Support for copper bars 25 x 5, 32 x 5, 50 x 5, 63 x 5 mm in slopping position 373 20 For creating a vertical busbar by direct mounting in XL3 800 external cable sleeve
18
990 990 990
10 10
374 34 374 38
18 x 4 25 x 4
245 280
200 250
M6 M6
990 990
4 4
374 18 374 19
25 x 5 32 x 5
330 450
270 400
M6 M6
1 750 1 750
1 1 1 1 1
374 40 374 41 374 59 374 43 374 46
50 x 5 700 63 x 5 800 75 x 5 950 80 x 5 1 000 100 x 5 1 250
630 700 850 900 1 050
-
1 750 1 750 1 750 1 750 1 750
4
18
5
25
5
12.5
Flexible For connection of devices to busbars, length 2 m Shaping before drilling and connection Cross section (mm)
I (A) IP ≤ 30 IP > 30
13 x 3 20 x 5 24 x 4 32 x 5 50 x 5 50 x 10
200 160 400 250 400 250 630 400 850 630 1 250 1 000
1 1 1 1 1 1
374 10 374 67 374 11 374 12 374 57 374 58
1
373 11 Isolating protection for 18 x 4, 25 x 4, 25 x 5 and 32 x 5 mm copper bars Supplied with fixing clips, length 1 m 374 03 Connector with 3 outgoing terminals 200 A (1 x 6 mm2 and 2 x 16 mm2) Fixed onto rigid plat copper bars 374 05 Connector with 7 outgoing terminals 400 A (4 x 6 mm2 and 3 x 16 mm2) Fixed onto rigid plat copper bars
Supports for Altis Direct mounting in Altis 400, use crosspiece Cat.No 095 67 in Altis 600, and crosspiece Cat.No 095 68 in Altis 800 (except Cat.No 374 54) 1
1
1
1
1 bar per pole ≤ 800 A 374 14 For creating a lateral busbars or at the back of enclosure 1 bar per pole ≤ 1 000 A 373 21 Support for copper bars 50 x 5, 63 x 5, 75 x 5, and 80 x 5 mm in ragged position For creating a lateral busbars 1 or 2 bars per pole ≤ 1 600 A 374 53 Support for copper bars 50 x 5, 63 x 5, 75 x 5, 80 x 5, and 100 x 5 mm in aligned position For creating an horizontal lateral busbars or at the back of enclosure 1 or 4 bars per pole ≤ 4 000 A 374 54 Direct mounting in Altis 600, and Altis 800 in lateral or horizontal busbars Support for copper bars 50 x 5, 63 x 5, 75 x 5, 80 x 5, 100 x 5, 125 x 5, 80 x 10, 100 x 10, 120 x 10 mm, in aligned position
Accessories
10
5
Fixing supports
1 1
095 67 095 68
50 50 50
347 48 347 49 367 75
Red catalogue numbers: New products
240
25
Zinc plated steel crosspieces Set of 2 For depth 600 For depth 800 Fixing accessories Clip nuts for M6 screws Clip nuts for M8 screws M6-10 HF screws with contact washer
25
pour selectexemple your bars XXXXXXxxxxxx for busbars supports xxxxxxxx "standard" distribution
≤ 800 A
≤ 400 A Busbars supports
Cat.No 373 15
1 flat bar per pole
Position of bars Rigid copper bars
Cat.No 373 20 (XL3) Cat.No 374 14 (Altis)
Cat.No 373 10
Cat.Nos
Section (mm)
IP ≤ 30
I (A) IP > 30
I (A)
374 34
18 x 4
245
200
374 38
25 x 4
-
374 18
25 x 5
330
374 19
32 x 5
450
374 40
50 x 5
374 41
63 x 5
I (A)
IP ≤ 30
IP > 30
IP ≤ 30
IP > 30
-
280
250
270
330
400
450
270
330
270
400
450
-
-
400
-
-
700
630
-
-
-
-
800
700
≤ 1 600 A
≤ 1 000 A Busbars supports
Cat.No 373 21 (Altis)
Cat.No 374 53 (Altis)
1 flat bar per pole
1 or 2 flat bar(s) per pole
Position of bars
Rigid copper bars
I (A)
I (A) 2 bars/pole
I (A)
Section (mm)
IP ≤ 30
IP > 30
374 40
50 x 5
700
630
700
630
1 150
1 000
430
350
650
510
374 41
63 x 5
800
700
800
700
1 350
1 150
500
400
770
590
374 59
75 x 5
950
850
950
850
1 500
1 300
600
475
890
700
374 43
80 x 5
1 050
900
1 000
900
1 650
1 450
630
500
940
740
374 46
100 x 5
1 250
1 050
1 900
1 600
750
580
1 120
900
Cat.Nos
1 bar/pole
1 bar/pole
2 bars/pole
IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30
≤ 4 000 A Busbars supports
Cat.No 374 54 (Altis)
Position of bars
1 to 4 flat bar(s) per pole (th. 5 mm) - 1 to 3 flat bar(s) per pole (th. 10 mm)
Rigid copper bars 1 bar
I (A)
2 bars
I (A)
I (A)
3 bars
I (A)
I (A)
4 bars
I (A)
I (A)
I (A)
Cat.Nos
Section (mm)
374 40
50 x 5
700
630
500
420 1 180 1 020 750
630 1 600 1 380 1 000 900 2 020 1 720 1 120 1 000
374 41
63 x 5
800
700
600
500 1 380 1 180 750
630 1 900 1 600 1 100 1 000 2 350 1 950 1 350 1 200
374 59
75 x 5
950
850
700
600 1 600 1 400 1 000 850 2 200 1 900 1 250 1 100 2 700 2 300 1 600 1 400
IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30 IP ≤ 30 IP > 30
374 43
80 x 5
1 000 900
750
630 1 700 1 480 1 050 900 2 350 2 000 1 300 1 150 2 850 2 400 1 650 1 450
374 46
100 x 5
1 250 1 050 850
700 2 050 1 800 1 200 1 050 2 900 2 450 1 600 1 400 3 500 2 900 1 900 1 650
125 x 5
1 450 1 270 1 000 800 2 500 2 150 1 450 1 250 3 450 2 900 1 800 1 600 4 150 3 450 2 150 1 950
80 x 10
1 460 1 270 1 150 950 2 500 2 150 1 700 1 500 3 450 2 900 2 500 2 000
-
-
-
-
100 x 10
1 750 1 500 1 350 1 150 3 050 2 550 2 000 1 650 4 150 3 500 2 900 2 400
-
-
-
-
120 x 10
2 000 1 750 1 650 1 450 3 600 2 920 2 500 2 000 4 800 4 000 3 500 3 000
-
-
-
-
Red catalogue numbers: New products
241
selecting busbar supports for Altis "standard" distribution
ALTIS ENCLOSURES 400 UP TO 1 600 A Set of horizontal busbars
374 53
Set of lateral busbars
Set of busbars at back of enclosure and cable sleeve
374 53 374 14
374 53
+ 373 21 Width = 600 Width = 800
095 67 095 68
400 mm
374 14
W 400 / 600 / 800 mm
ALTIS ENCLOSURES 600/800 UP TO 1 600 A Set of horizontal busbars
+ 374 53
Depth = 600 Depth = 800
095 67 095 68
Set of lateral busbars Set of busbars at back of enclosure and cable sleeve
374 53 374 14
374 53
374 14
+
Width = 600 Width = 800
373 21
+
095 67 095 68
W 400 / 600 / 800 mm
600 or 800 mm
Depth = 600 Depth = 800
ALTIS ENCLOSURES 600/800 UP TO 4 000 A
Set of horizontal busbars
374 54
Set of lateral busbars
600 or 800 mm
Options for physical mounting subject to heat balance
Red catalogue numbers: New products
242
374 54
095 67 095 68
selecting busbar supports for XL3 "standard" distribution
DISTRIBUTION CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES XL3 400 IP 43 up to 400 A
IP 55 up to 250 A
Set of busbars at the back of the cable sleeve
Set of busbars at the back of the enclosure
373 15
373 10
Set of busbars at the back of enclosure
373 15
205 mm
175 mm
CABLE SLEEVES XL3 800 Internal cable sleeve - 400 A
910
230 mm
External cable sleeve - 800 A
Set of busbars at the back of the cable sleeve
Set of busbars at the back of the cable sleeve
373 10
373 20
660
460
230 mm
Red catalogue numbers: New products
243
supports and busbars technical characteristicsxxxx ■ Peak current Ipk The distance between the busbar supports depends on the electrodynamic forces generated when there is a short-circuit, these being directly proportional to the peak value of the short-circuit current (Ipk). Two methods can be used to determine the peak current value according to data that is generally available: Using the limiting capacity of the protective devices. The limitation curves of the protective devices (DX and DPX) give the limited peak current according to the prospective short-circuit current. The "Non-limited peak Isc" curve corresponds to no protection. The table opposite gives the limited peak value (Ipk) for a maximum prospective short-circuit value equal to the breaking capacity (Icu) of the device. For lower prospective short-circuit values, reading the curves will provide an optimised value.
The peak value is much higher if there are no limiting protective devices. This value is calculated by applying a coefficient of asymmetry (n) to the prospective rms value shown in the table opposite.
Rating (A) 16-25
Isc peak Max. (kA) 11.9
DPX 125
40-63
15
DPX 125
100-125
DPX 160
25
DPX 160
40 to 160
20
DPX 250 ER 100 to 250
22
DPX 125
17
All
27
DPX-H 250
All
34
DPX 630
All
34
DPX-H 630
All
42
DPX 1600
All
85
DPX-H 1600
All
110
Isc RMS. prospective Isc
n 1.5
5 < I < 10
1.7
10 < I < 20 20 < I < 50
2
50 < I
ak pe ted i im n-l no Isc
Isc limited peak
14.3
DPX 250
Isc prospective RMS (kA) 63 A
with modular equipment
DPX 160
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical
with modular equipment
DPX 250 ER
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical
with modular equipment
DPX-IS 250
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical
with modular equipment
FIXING ON PLATE DPX 125 (Combination possible with DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER)
DPX 160 (Combination possible with DPX 125 and DPX 250 ER)
DPX 250 ER (Combination possible with DPX 125 and DPX 160 ER) DPX-IS 250
vertical Cabinet or enclosure horizontal Cable sleeve
vertical vertical
Cabinet or enclosure horizontal Cable sleeve
vertical vertical
Cabinet or enclosure horizontal Cable sleeve
vertical
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical
vertical Cabinet or enclosure DPX 250 horizontal Cable sleeve
vertical
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical
Cable sleeve
vertical
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical
DPX 630
DPX-IS 630
(1) With window adaptor, to be ordered separately, Cat.Nos below: 203 67: adaptor for DPX 125 earth leakage module 203 68: adaptor for DPX 160 earth leakage module 203 69: adaptor for DPX 250 ER earth leakage module
256
no e.l.c.bs with e.l.c.bs with or without e.l.c.bs no e.l.c.bs with e.l.c.bs no e.l.c.bs with e.l.c.bs with or without e.l.c.bs no e.l.c.bs with e.l.c.bs no e.l.c.bs with e.l.c.bs with or without e.l.c.bs no e.l.c.bs with e.l.c.bs device only centred 1 to 2 dev, no e.l.c.bs device only centred 1 to 2 dev, with e.l.c.bs with centred e.l.c.bs with or without e.l.c.bs device only with e.l.c.bs 1 to 2 dev, no e.l.c.bs device only centred downstream 1 to 2 dev, with e.l.c.bs with centred e.l.c.bs device only with e.l.c.bs device only
NEW
Fixing device
Fixing plate
202 00 202 01 202 03 202 00 202 01 202 03 202 00 202 01
-
Device faceplate Height (mm)
Metal
Plastic
150
203 00
203 50
-
150
203 03
203 53
200
203 01
203 51
-
200
203 04
200
203 01
203 51
202 00
262 08
200
203 01
203 51
202 00
262 09
300
203 10
203 60
202 00
262 09
300
203 10
203 60
202 00
262 39
300
203 10
203 60
-
202 10 202 12 202 14 202 18 202 19 202 10 202 12 202 14 202 18 202 19 202 10 202 12 202 16 202 18 202 19 202 05 202 20 202 21 202 22 202 23 202 24 202 28 202 29 202 20 202 21 202 22 202 23 202 28 202 29 202 07
300 400 200 300 400 300 400 200 300 400 300 400 200 300 400 300 400 400 600 600 200 400 800 400 400 600 600 400 800 400
203 10 203 12(1) 203 14 203 18 203 19(1) 203 10 203 12(1) 203 15 203 18 203 19(1) 203 10 203 12(1) 203 16 203 18 203 19(1) 203 10 203 20 203 21 203 22 203 23 203 24 203 28 203 29 203 20 203 21 203 22 203 23 203 28 203 29 203 07
203 60 203 62(1) 203 64(1) 203 60 203 62(1) 203 64(1) 203 60 203 62(1) 203 64(1) 203 60 203 70 203 71 203 72 203 73 203 74 203 70 203 71 203 72 203 73 -
Red catalogue numbers : New products
257
NEW
XL3example: for 400 xxxxxxx xxxxxxxx cabinets, enclosures and cable sleeves distribution
201 19
201 77
201 57
201 39
201 05
201 25
Dimensions (p. 267) Take devices up to 400 A Fireproof to 750 °C/5 s in accordance with IEC 60 695-2 for installation in public buildings (up to 100 kVA for class II cabinets) Capacity: 24 modules per row RAL 7035 Door to be ordered separately Supplied flat with functional uprights fitted on the back, adjustable cable entry plate and joining accessories (horizontal and vertical) Pack
Cat.Nos
Metal cabinets
Pack
Cat.Nos
IP 43 - IK 08 with kit and door IP 40 - IK 08 with door IP 30 - IK 07 without door Height (mm)
1 1 1 1 1 1
201 03 201 04 201 05 201 06 201 07 201 08
600 750 900 1 050 1 200 1 500
Faceplate height (mm)
550 700 850 1 000 1 150 1 450
Width (mm) total usable
Depth (mm)
575 575 575 575 575 575
175 175 175 175 175 175
515 515 515 515 515 515
Height (mm)
1 1 1 1 1 1
201 23 201 24 201 25 201 26 201 27 201 28
600 750 900 1 050 1 200 1 500
Faceplate height (mm)
550 700 850 1 000 1 150 1 450
IP 43 - IK 07 with kit and door IP 40 - IK 07 with door IP 30 - IK 04 without door Cabinets made of insulating material Supplied with active backplate which takes the C-section busbar distribution system, Height (mm)
1 1 1 1 1
Cable sleeves for metal cabinets Width (mm) total usable
Depth (mm)
310 310 310 310 310 310
175 175 175 175 175 175
250 250 250 250 250 250
Class II cabinets
201 53 201 54 201 55 201 56 201 57
600 750 900 1 050 1 200
Faceplate height (mm)
550 700 850 1 000 1 150
Width (mm) total usable
Depth (mm)
575 575 575 575 575
175 175 175 175 175
Cable sleeves class II Height (mm)
1 1 1 1 1
201 73 201 74 201 75 201 76 201 77
600 750 900 1 050 1 200
Faceplate height (mm)
550 700 850 1 000 1 150
Width (mm) total usable
Depth (mm)
310 310 310 310 310
175 175 175 175 175
Metal enclosures Supplied with plinth, height 100 mm Height (mm)
1 1
201 18 201 19
1 600 1 900
Faceplate height (mm)
1 450 1 750
Width (mm) total usable
Depth (mm)
575 575
175 175
515 515
Cable sleeves for metal enclosures Supplied with plinth, height 100 mm Height (mm)
1 1
201 38 201 39
1 600 1 900
Faceplate height (mm)
1 450 1 750
Width (mm) total usable
Depth (mm)
310 310
175 175
250 250
Red catalogue numbers : New products
258
515 515 515 515 515
Distribution equipment and faceplates (p. 261 to 264) Wiring accessories (p. 265)
250 250 250 250 250
NEW
XL3 400 doors and accessories
202 55
202 65
201 95
202 83
202 73 Pack
Cat.Nos
202 59
Doors
202 69 Pack
Supplied with handle Interchangeable key barrels to be ordered separately
1
Curved Metal
Transparent
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
202 53 202 54 202 55 202 56 202 57 202 58 202 59
202 63 202 64 202 65 202 66 202 67 202 68 202 69
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
202 73 202 74 202 75 202 76 202 77 202 78 202 79
202 83 202 84 202 85 202 86 202 87 202 88 202 89
Metal
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
201 63 201 64 201 65 201 66 201 67 201 68 201 69
For cabinet/enclosure Height (mm)
600 750 900 1 050 1 200 1 500/1 600 1 900 Flat 600 750 900 1 050 1 200 1 500/1 600 1 900 Cable sleeves 600 750 900 1 050 1 200 1 500/1 600 1 900
Cabinet/door distance Metal Transparent
57 57 57 57 57 57 57
53 53 53 53 53 53 53
38 38 38 38 38 38 38
34 34 34 34 34 34 34
38 38 38 38 38 38 38
Accessories for doors
1 1 1 1 1
202 91 202 92 202 93 202 94 202 96
10 1
097 99 365 82
1 1
1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
Cat.Nos
201 50
Accessories for cabinets, enclosures and sleeves
Seal for IP 43 protection 201 30 Supplied ready to use Cable fixing supports For fixing clamps for holding cables in place on entry to the cabinet 201 35 For cabinets and enclosures 201 37 For cable sleeves Plinths Height 100 mm 201 10 For cabinets and enclosures 201 12 For cable sleeves Universal support for cable sleeves For mounting terminal blocks, earth terminals, etc. 201 95 Set of 3 metal supports Divider for horizontal compartmentalisation 201 90 Metal divider Cable entry plates 201 20 Additional adjustable plate for XL3 400 metal Wall mounting lugs 201 00 Set of 4 metal lugs for XL3 400 metal cabinet 201 50 Set of 4 plastic lugs for XL3 400 insulated cabinet Horizontal joining strengthening bar 201 51 Set of 2 metal bars for additional strength when joining 2 XL3 400 insulated cabinets
Distribution equipment and faceplates (p. 261 to 264) Wiring accessories (p. 265)
Key barrels and knockout for metal or transparent doors Supplied with a set of 2 keys Type 405 Type 455 Type 1242E Type 2433A Double bar knockout Self-adhesive document holders for plans Flexible plastic - A4 Rigid plastic closed - IP 50 324 x 120 x 18 mm Catalogue Nos. in bold: Products currently on sale and normally in stock at distribution outlets Red catalogue numbers : New products
259
NEW 3 XL 400
XL3 400 IP 55 distribution cabinets and accessories
IP 55 distribution cabinets and accessories
Installation principle
201 82
201 85
IP 55 - IK 08 One-piece metal enclosure Supplied with reversible solid door fitted with handle, interchangeable key barrels to be ordered separately (see p. 259) and wall-mounting lugs Capacity: 24 modules per row Removable chassis Fireproof to 750 °C/5 s in accordance with IEC 60695-2-1 for installation in public buildings RAL 7035 Can take devices up to 250 A Pack
1 1 1 1
Cat.Nos
201 82 201 83 201 84 201 85
Dimensions
IP 55 cabinets Height (mm)
Faceplate height (mm)
515 715 915 1 115
400 600 800 1 000
Width (mm) external usable
655 655 655 655
515 515 515 515
Depth (mm)
215 215 215 215
H
Accessories 1
1 1
CabstopTM cable entry plates 364 97 Plate 28 entries Ø 5 to 14 2 entries Ø 14 to 24 2 spare 100 mm Cable fixing support For fixing clamps for holding cables in place on entry to the cabinet 201 35 For IP 55 cabinets Divider for horizontal compartmentalisation 201 90 For IP 55 cabinets
Distribution equipment and faceplates (p. 261 to 264)
Cat. Nos 201 82 201 83 201 84 201 85
655
With flat door 655
189
260
Catalogue Nos. in bold: Products currently on sale and normally in stock at distribution outlets Red catalogue numbers : New products
215
Wiring accessories (p. 265)
H (mm) 515 715 915 1115
XL3 400
2
NEW 3 XL 400
distribution equipment and faceplates for devices on rail DPX-IS 250, DPX 125, DPX 160, DPX 250 ER and Lexic devices
fixing devices on rail
2
Principle for installation of aluminium rail Cat.No 202 00 202 01
2
Adjustable device: upper position for Lexic device and lower position for DPX No screws required for installation
202 00
DPX
Lexic
203 50
203 00
DPX
Lexic
203 01
203 51
Lower position Pack
1
Cat.Nos
2
Rail for modular devices and Vistop up to 160 A
2
202 01 Comprises a rail and 2 fixing brackets Fits onto functional uprights Takes wire guides Cat.No 200 94 DPX only
2
Aluminium rail for modular devices, Vistop up to 160 A, DPX-IS 250, DPX 125, 160 and 250 ER 1
202 00 Comprises an aluminium profile rail, and 2 x 2-position fixing brackets For mounting DPX using the plates below Fits onto functional uprights Takes XL-Part 100 and 125 row distribution blocks Plates for mounting DPX For mounting DPX on aluminium profile rail Cat.No 202 00 262 08 For DPX 125 262 09 For DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER 262 39 For DPX-IS 250 Rail height spacer 262 99 Designed to enable modular equipment and DPX 125, DPX 160, DPX 250 ER and DPX-IS 250 to be mounted together on device Cat.No 202 00 using the above plates For 20 modules
1 1
1 1
For modular devices 203 00 Metal 203 50 Plastic For Vistop 160 A and DPX 125 203 01 Metal 203 51 Plastic For 1 to 3 DPX 125, 160 or 250 ER, 1 to 3 DPX-IS 250, and Vistop 160 203 10 Metal 203 60 Plastic
300
1 1
1/4
200
1/4 turn fastening and sealable faceplates
For Lexic devices
150
1
DPX + spacer for Lexic devices
1/4 turn fastening and sealable faceplates
2
1 1 1
Upper position
Red catalogue numbers : New products
261
NEW
XL3 400 distribution equipment and faceplates for devices on plate, DPX-IS 250, DPX 125, DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER
XL3 400 fixing devices on plate
Installation principle Plates attached and fitted directly on functional uprights
202 10
202 14
1/4
203 10
203 14
Device only Pack
Cat.Nos
Plate for fixed version devices with front terminals
2
1 1 1
202 05 202 10 202 12
1
202 14
1
202 16
An additional rail can be installed Fit onto functional uprights Devices in vertical position For mounting and combining 1 to 3 devices For 1 DPX-IS 250 For 1 to 3 DPX 125, DPX 160 or DPX 250 ER For 1 to 3 DPX 125, DPX 160 or DPX 250 ER with downstream earth leakage module Devices in horizontal position For 1 DPX 125 or DPX 160 with or without downstream earth leakage module For 1 DPX 250 ER with or without downstream earth leakage module
300
1/4 turn fastening and sealable faceplates
Metal
Plastic
1
203 14 203 64(1)
1
203 15 203 64(1)
1
203 16 203 64(1)
1
203 67
1
203 68
1
203 69
300
Window adaptor 400
203 12(1) 203 62(1)
Devices in vertical position For 1 to 3 DPX 125, 160 or 250 ER or 1 DPX-IS 250 For 1 to 3 DPX 125, DPX 160 or DPX 250 ER with downstream earth leakage module Devices on plate in horizontal position For DPX 125 with or without earth leakage module, height 200 mm For DPX 160 with or without earth leakage module, height 200 mm For DPX 250 ER with or without earth leakage module, height 200 mm
200
Plastic
203 60
200
1
Metal
203 10
200
1
Window adaptors For DPX 125 with downstream earth leakage module For DPX 160 with downstream earth leakage module For DPX 250 ER with downstream earth leakage module
Universal plates (p. 265)
(1) With window adaptor, to be ordered separately Red catalogue numbers : New products
262
Cat.No 203 67 for DPX 125 Cat.No 203 68 for DPX 160 Cat.No 203 69 for DPX 250 ER
NEW 3 XL 400
XL3 400 distribution equipment and faceplates for devices on plate, DPX-IS 630(1), DPX 250 and DPX 630(1)
mounting devices in horizontal position
Installation principle Plates attached and fitted directly on functional uprights
202 24
202 20
1/4
203 20
203 24
Pack
Cat.Nos
Plate for fixed version devices with front terminals
2
1 1
202 07 202 20
1
202 21
1
202 22
1
202 23
1
202 24
An additional rail can be installed Fit onto functional uprights Devices in vertical position For 1 DPX-IS 630(1) For 1 to 2 DPX 250 or 1 DPX 630(1) and 1 DPX 250 or 1 DPX 630 or 1 DPX 250 with 1 distribution block Cat.No. 374 00 (which takes up the space of one device) For 1 DPX 250 or 1 DPX 630(1) fixed version in central position For 1 to 2 DPX 250 earth leakage modules or 1 DPX 630(1) earth leakage module and 1 DPX 250 earth leakage module or 1 DPX 630(1) earth leakage module or 1 DPX 250 earth leakage module with 1 distribution block Cat.No 374 00 (which takes up the space of one device) For 1 DPX 250 or DPX 630(1) with earth leakage module in central position
Device with earth leakage module
200
Device in horizontal position For 1 DPX 250 with or without earth leakage module
1/4 turn fastening and sealable faceplates Metal
Plastic Devices in vertical position 203 70 For 1 to 2 DPX 250 or 630(1)
203 20
1
203 21
203 71 For 1 DPX 250 or 630(1) in central position
1
203 22
203 72 For 1 to 2 DPX 250 or 630(1) with earth leakage module
1
203 23
203 73 For 1 DPX 250 or 630(1) with earth leakage module, device centred
400
1
1
203 24
400 600 600
For DPX-IS 630(1)
300
203 07
300
Devices in horizontal position 203 74 For DPX 250 with or without earth leakage module, height 200 mm
200
1
Device with distribution block
(1) Limited to 400 A Red catalogue numbers : New products
263
NEW 3 XL 400
XL3 400 distribution equipment and faceplates for devices in cable sleeves
mounting devices in cable sleeves
Installation device Fixing on rail
202 03
2 (Cat.No 202 03)
203 03
200
202 18
Pack
1
203 18
Cat.Nos
Rail
2
For modular devices and Vistop up to 160 A 202 03 Comprises a rail and 2 fixing brackets Fits onto functional uprights Takes wire guides Cat.No 200 94 Capacity: 9 modules
Plates attached and fitted directly on functional uprights
2
1/4 turn fastening and sealable faceplates for devices on rail
2
1
For modular devices and Vistop up to 160 A 203 04 Metal
150
1 1
For modular devices 203 03 Metal 203 53 Plastic
200
1/4
Plate for fixed version devices with front terminals
1 1
202 18 202 19
1 1
202 28 202 29
Devices in vertical position Fit onto functional uprights For DPX 125, 160 and 250 ER For DPX 125, 160 and 250 ER, with downstream earth leakage module For DPX 250 or DPX 630(1) Plate for DPX 250 or DPX 630(1), with downstream earth leakage module
Mounting on plate (Cat.No 202 28)
1
203 18 For DPX 125, 160 and 250 ER
300
1/4 turn fastening and sealable faceplates for devices on metal plate
1
203 19
For DPX 125, 160 and 250 ER with downstream earth leakage module
400
400 (2)
203 28 For DPX 250 and 630
1
203 29 For DPX 250 and 630 with earth leakage module
1 1 1
203 67 For DPX 125 with downstream earth leakage module 203 68 For DPX 160 with downstream earth leakage module 203 69 For DPX 250 ER with downstream earth leakage module
800
400
1
Window adaptors
(1) Limited to 400 A (2) With window adaptor, to be ordered separately Red catalogue numbers : New products
264
NEW
XL3 400 accessories and solid faceplates
202 41
200 92
Pack
1 1 1
201 60
Cat.Nos
202 41 202 42 202 43
100 100
364 40 364 41
1
201 60
Perforated universal plates Fit directly onto functional uprights Height 200 mm for cabinets and enclosures Height 300 mm for cabinets and enclosures Height 300 mm for cable sleeves Clips nuts for perforated plates For M4 screws For M5 screws Finishing strip For a perfect finish at the join between DLP trunking and XL3 400 cabinets or enclosures RAL 7035
Universal rail 1
203 99
203 91
2
Comprising a rail and 2 adjustable fixing brackets Fits onto functional uprights 202 02 For XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures
Accessories 1
Pack
Cat.Nos
Insulating fixing support 200 90 Set of 2 supports, fits directly on functional uprights in XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures For creating an insulated earth with 12 x 4 mm copper bar (Cat.No 373 49) or flat bar 12 x 2 mm (Cat.No 048 19) and IP 2x terminal block Also takes universal rail Cat.No 202 04
201 48
1/4 turn fastening and sealable faceplates for cabinets and enclosures Solid faceplates
1 1 1 1 1
Metal
Plastic
Height (mm)
203 40 203 41 203 42 203 43 203 44
203 90 203 91 203 92 203 93 203 94
50 100 150 200 300
1/4 turn fastening and sealable faceplates for cable sleeves
2
202 04 Fits onto functional uprights Width 515 mm
Universal adjustable fixing device
1
201 45
Solid faceplates Metal
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Plastic
201 41 201 42 201 40
201 43 201 44 201 45 201 46 201 47 201 48 201 49
201 97 201 98 201 99
Height (mm)
50 100 200 300 400 550 700 850 1 000 1 150 1 450 1 750
Accessories
20 50
Clip nuts 1/4 fastening on front panel on functional uprights 200 92 Bag of 20 clip nuts for M6 screw 200 91 Bag of 50 x M6 screws
20 10
200 51 016 65
6
Aerosol paint spray 200 98 RAL 7035
10
203 99
Blanking plates RAL 7035 For metal or plastic faceplates 24 modules, smooth adjustable strip 18 modules, separable into modules or 1/2 modules Clip-on holder for adhesive labels Supplied with sheet of labels for marking rows on faceplate
Catalogue Nos. in bold: Products currently on sale and normally in stock at distribution outlets Red catalogue numbers : New products
265
XL3example: for 400 xxxxxxx xxxxxxxx wiring and connection accessories
201 70
Pack
2
201 93
Cat.Nos
2 x 393 99 + 1 x 373 01 mounted
Wiring
Pack
Lina 25TM ducting mounting support For mounting and adjusting the height of Lina 25 ducting - vertical: 40 x 60 or 40 x 80 - horizontal: 40 x 60 Supplied with plastic rivets 201 70 Set of 2 supports. Fits directly onto functional uprights integrated in XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures Lina 25TM ducting Length: 2 m W x H (mm)
48 40 100 10
10
362 07 40 x 60 362 08 40 x 80 Plastic rivet 366 46 For fixing ducting on support Cat.No 201 70 Wire guide 200 94 For horizontal wiring. Fits on rail Cat.No. 202 01 Takes bars with holes Cat.No 373 00 (p.199) or 373 01 and bar 12 x 4 with clamps Cat.No 373 02 201 93 For vertical wiring Fits directly onto functional uprights in XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures
2
Connection of protective conductors 10
1
Flat bar 12 x 2 for XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures 048 19 Length 1 metre. Takes IP 2x terminal blocks Fits onto functional uprights in XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures, or on isolating supports Cat.No 200 90 Bar with holes for protective conductors 373 01 Length 456 mm (24 modules) • 36 holes Ø 5.3 mm (1.5 to 10 mm2) • 2 holes Ø 9 mm (35 mm2) • 4 holes Ø 6.5 mm (2.5 to 16 mm2) Fits onto functional uprights in XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures, or on rail with wire guides Cat.No 200 94 Flat copper bar 12 x 4 with clamps 373 02 Supplied with clamp connectors (40 x 1.5 to 4 mm2, 4 x 6 to 16 mm2, 1 x 35 mm2) Fits onto functional uprights in XL3 400 cabinets and enclosures or on rail with wire guides Cat.No 200 94
20
Cat.Nos
Equipotential link conductor 373 85 Cross-section 6 mm2, ensures equipotential continuity when fitting auxiliaries on door (Signis signalling devices > 50 V) Non-perforated copper bar Cross-section (mm)
10 100 10 10
12 x 4 160 990 Connectors for bar 12 x 4 without holes 373 60 1.5 mm2 373 61 6 to 16 mm2 373 62 10 to 35 mm2 (supplied with M6 screws 5 mm) Copper bar with tapped holes Cross-sec. Permis. I (mm) (A)
10
100
10
373 89 12 x 4
160
Tapped holes Ø (mm) Pitch
M5
18
Length (mm)
990
Connectors for 12 x 4 mm bars with tapped holes 373 65 1 or 2 conductors from 1.5 to 10 mm2 (supplied with Ø 5 screws) Support end stop 393 99 For rail EN 60715 and symmetrical rail depth 15 mm Takes bars with holes Cat.No 373 00 (p. 199) or Cat.No 373 01, copper bar with clamps Cat.No 373 02, copper bars 12 x 4 Cat.Nos 373 49 or 373 89, flat bar 12 x 2 Cat.No 048 19
Red catalogue numbers : New products
266
Permis. I (A) Length (mm)
373 49
2
1
Connection of protective conductors (continued)
2
2
XL3 400 insulated, metal technical characteristics
Installation principle
Dimensions
Side panels can be removed individually Metal H
Cabinets Sleeves Cat. Nos Cat. Nos H (mm) 201 03 201 23 600 201 04 201 24 750 201 05 201 25 900 201 06 201 26 1050 201 07 201 27 1200 201 08 201 28 1500
H
575
310
Total accessibility H H
575
Enclosures Sleeves Cat. Nos Cat. Nos H (mm) 201 18 201 38 1600 201 19 201 39 1900
310
With flat door
175
198
Horizontal joining with no accessory required
310 (sleeves) 575 (cabinet or enclosure)
175
Possibility to add fixing strenghtening bar for mounting lugs
218
With curved door
575
267
XL3 800 cabinets and enclosures
[
XL 3
]
Products and systems
The new XL3 800 range provides extendable modular solutions up to 800 A It provides strong housing for distribution assemblies. The modular solution enables partial doors to be fitted
Freedom to choose the solution you want
Freedom to distribute how you wish
XL3 800 cabinets and enclosures are extendable They have: - A capacity of 24 or 36 modules per row - Height ranging from 1050 to 1950 mm which can house or be combined with cable sleeves
“Standard” distribution This is performed using busbar connections, terminal blocks, distribution blocks and flat busbars “Optimised” distribution Performed with:
IP 43 metal cabinets and enclosures • Take devices up to 800 A • 2 widths - 660 mm with 24 modules per row
- 910 mm with 36 or 24 modules (if internal cable sleeve) • Supplied flat with functional uprights and cable entry plates
IP 55 metal cabinets and enclosures
XL-PART, 250 A ROW DISTRIBUTION BLOCK • For power supply and distribution in rows up to 250 A • Takes power devices up to DPX 250 ER • Connects to the XL-Part 800 column chassis
• Take devices up to 630 A • 2 widths - 700 mm with 24 modules per row
- 950 mm with 36 or 24 modules (if internal cable sleeve) • Supplied with functional uprights and without side panels • Can be joined horizontally
Freedom to choose the finish FACEPLATES • 1/4 turn closing with sealable handle • Screw fastening • Wide area for labelling
DOORS • Metal or transparent To be ordered separately
268
Freedom to choose how you work The cabinets and enclosures give you total freedom to wire as you choose, thanks to:
FUNCTIONAL UPRIGHTS • Equipment can be fitted quickly: only 1 tool is needed
SEPARATE SIDE PANELS • Can be removed individually • Provide access from all sides
SIMPLIFIED JOINING • XL3 800 extendable enclosures are supplied with their joining accessories
FOR MORE INFORMATION See the on-line catalogue: instructions and technical data sheets, etc.
269
XL3 800 equipment selection
Device
Fixing
Position
Type of device
FIXING ON DIN-RAIL Lexic < 63 A Lexic > 63 A Vistop 63 to 160 A DPX 125 DPX 160 DPX 250 ER DPX-IS 250 FIXING ON PLATE
Cabinet or enclosure Cabinet or enclosure Cabinet or enclosure Cabinet or enclosure Cabinet or enclosure Cabinet or enclosure Cabinet or enclosure
vertical vertical vertical vertical vertical vertical vertical
with modular equipment with modular equipment with modular equipment with modular equipment
Cable sleeve
vertical
DPX-IS 630
Cabinet or enclosure
DPX 1600
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical vertical horizontal
no e.l.c.bs with e.l.c.bs with or without elcbs no e.l.c.bs with e.l.c.bs with or without e.l.c.bs no e.l.c.bs with e.l.c.bs with or without e.l.c.bs centred device only 1 or 2 devices no e.l.c.bs with e.l.c.bs with or without e.l.c.bs device only with e.l.c.bs no e.l.c.bs with e.l.c.bs with or without e.l.c.bs device only with e.l.c.bs device only device only device only
FIXING ON MODULAR RAIL Lexic < 63 A Lexic > 63 A Vistop 63 to 160 A DPX 125 DPX 160 DPX 250 ER DPX-IS 250 FIXING ON PLATE
Cabinet or enclosure Cabinet or enclosure Cabinet or enclosure Cabinet or enclosure Cabinet or enclosure Cabinet or enclosure Cabinet or enclosure
vertical vertical vertical vertical vertical vertical vertical
with modular equipment with modular equipment with modular equipment with modular equipment
(Combination possible with DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER)
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical with e.l.c.bs
DPX 160
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical
DPX 250 ER
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical
DPX-IS 250
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical
Cable sleeve
vertical
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical
DPX 125 (Combination possible with DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER)
Cabinet or enclosure
horizontal
DPX 160 (Combination possible with DPX 125 and DPX 250 ER)
vertical
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical horizontal
DPX 250 ER (Combination possible with DPX 125 and DPX 160)
Cabinet or enclosure
DPX-IS 250
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical horizontal
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical vertical horizontal
DPX 250 Cable sleeve
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical vertical horizontal
DPX 630
no e.l.c.bs
DPX 125
DPX 250
with e.l.c.bs
DPX 630 Cable sleeve
vertical
DPX-IS 630
Cabinet or enclosure
DPX 1600
Cabinet or enclosure
vertical vertical horizontal
no e.l.c.bs with e.l.c.bs no e.l.c.bs with e.l.c.bs 1 or 2 devices no e.l.c.bs with e.l.c.bs device only with e.l.c.bs no e.l.c.bs with e.l.c.bs device only with e.l.c.bs device only device only device only
(1) With window adaptor, to be ordered separately, Cat.No : 203 67: adaptor for DPX 125 earth leakage module 203 68: adaptor for DPX 160 earth leakage module 203 69: adaptor for DPX 250 ER earth leakage module - (2) Device for external cable sleeve - (3) Device for internal cable sleeve
270
NEW
Fixing device
Device faceplate
Fixing plate
Height (mm)
XL3 206 00 206 00 206 00 206 00 206 00 206 00 206 00 -
1/4 turn
Screw
209 00 209 01 209 01 209 01 209 10 209 10 209 10
800 - 24 modules
262 08 262 09 262 09 262 39
150 200 200 200 300 300 300
208 00 208 01 208 01 208 01 208 10 208 10 208 10
206 10 206 12 206 14 206 10 206 12 206 14 206 10 206 12 206 16 206 05 206 05 206 20 206 22 206 24 206 28(2) 206 29(2) 206 20 206 22 206 25 206 28(2) 206 29(2) 206 07 206 30 206 30
300 400 200 300 400 200 300 400 200 300 300 400 600 200 400 600 300 300 400 400
208 10 208 12(1) 208 14 208 10 208 12(1) 208 15 208 10 208 12(1) 208 16 208 10 208 06 208 20 208 22 208 24 208 20 208 22 208 25 208 07 208 30 208 34
209 10 209 12(1) 209 14(1) 209 10 209 12(1) 209 15(1) 209 10 209 12(1) 209 16(1) 209 10 209 06 209 20 209 22 209 24 209 20 209 22 209 25 209 07 209 30 209 34
XL3 800 - 36 modules 206 50 206 50 206 50 206 50 206 50 206 50 206 50
262 08 262 09 262 09 262 39
150 200 200 200 300 300 300
-
209 50 209 51 209 51 209 51 209 60 209 60 209 60
-
206 60
300
-
209 60
-
206 62
400
-
209 62(1)
-
206 60 206 62 206 60 206 62 206 55 206 70 206 72 206 78(3) 206 79(3) 206 70 206 72 206 78(3) 206 79(3) 206 57 206 80 206 80
300 400 300 400 300 400 600 400 600 400 400 400
-
209 60 209 62(1) 209 60 209 62(1) 209 60 209 70 209 72 209 70 209 72 209 57 209 80 209 84
Red catalogue numbers: New products
271
NEW
XL3 800 distribution cabinets and cable sleeves, doors
204 01
204 06
212 51
212 61
Dimensions (p. 281)
IP 43 - IK 08 with kit and door IP 40 - IK 08 with door IP 30 - IK 07 without door Metal enclosures Can take devices up to 800 A Fireproof to 750 °C/5 s in accordance with IEC 60695-2-1 for installation in public buildings Capacity: 24 and 36 modules per row RAL 7035 Supplied flat with functional uprights fitted on the back, adjustable cable entry plate and joining accessories (horizontal and vertical) Pack
Cat.Nos
Cabinets
Pack
Cat. Nos
Width 660 mm 24 modules per row Height (mm)
1 1
1 1
Faceplate height (mm)
Width (mm) external usable
204 01 204 02
Depth (mm)
1 050 1 000 660 600 1 250 1 200 660 600 Width 910 mm Can incorporate a cable sleeve 36 or 24 modules (if internal cable sleeve) 204 06 1 050 1 000 910 850 204 07 1 250 1 200 910 850
230 230
1 1
204 26 204 27 204 46 204 47
Transparent
212 51 212 52
212 61 212 62
1 1
212 56 212 57
212 66 212 67
230 230
Internal cable sleeves
1 1
Metal
1 1
Kits for 910 mm wide cabinets Kits comprising: upright and mounting accessories For creating a cable sleeve with a usable width of 250 mm, on the right or left-hand side inside 910 mm wide cabinets For cabinet height 1 050 mm, Cat.No 204 06 For cabinet height 1 250 mm, Cat.No 204 07 Solid faceplates with hinges and locks For cable sleeves height 1 050 mm For cable sleeves height 1 250 mm
Doors for cabinets Supplied with handle Interchangeable key barrels, to be ordered separately (p. 280) Width 660 mm For cabinet height 1 050 mm For cabinet height 1 250 mm Width 910 mm For cabinet height 1 050 mm For cabinet height 1 250 mm
IP 43 kit 1
201 30
1 1
204 10 204 11
For cabinets width 660 and 910 mm
Plinths For cabinets width 660 mm For cabinets width 910 mm
Divides pitch 50 mm 1 1
204 90 204 91
For horizontal compartmentalisation For cabinets, usable width 600 mm For cabinets, usable width 850 mm
Accessories 1
201 00
1
204 20
Red catalogue numbers: New products
272
Wall mounting lugs Set of 4 metal lugs Cable entry plates Additional adjustable plate
NEW
XL3 800 distribution enclosures, cable sleeves, doors
204 04
204 09
204 09 + 204 29
Dimensions (p. 281)
Pack
IP 43 - IK 08 with kit and door IP 40 - IK 08 with door IP 30 - IK 07 without door Metal enclosures RAL 7035 Can take devices up to 800 A Fireproof to 750 °C/5 s in accordance with IEC 60695-2-1 for installation in public buildings Capacity: 24 and 36 modules per row Supplied flat with functional uprights fitted on the back, adjustable cable entry plate and joining accessories (horizontal and vertical) Pack
Cat.Nos
Cat.Nos
Metal
Transparent
1 1
212 53 212 54
212 63 212 64
1 1
212 58 212 59
212 68 212 69
1 1 1
1 1 1
Height (mm)
Width (mm) external usable
Depth (mm)
204 03 1 550 1 400 660 600 204 04 1 950 1 800 660 600 204 90 Divider for horizontal compartmentalisation Width 910 mm Can incorporate a cable sleeve 36 or 24 modules (if internal cable sleeve) 204 08 1 550 1 400 910 850 204 09 1 950 1 800 910 850 204 91 Divider for horizontal compartmentalisation
230 230
230 230
Internal cable sleeves
1 1 1 1
1 1
Supplied with handle. Interchangeable key barrels, to be ordered separately (p. 280) Width 660 mm For enclosure height 1 550 mm For enclosure height 1 950 mm Width 910 mm For enclosure height 1 550 mm For enclosure height 1 950 mm
External cable sleeves
Supplied with plinth, height 100 mm Width 660 mm 24 modules per row Faceplate height (mm)
Doors for enclosures
Side cable sleeves Can be attached on the right or left Supplied with a plinth height 100 mm and joining accessories
Enclosures
Height (mm)
Kits for 910 mm wide enclosures Kits comprising: upright and mounting accessories For creating a cable sleeve with a usable width of 250 mm, on the right or left-hand side inside 910 mm wide enclosures 204 28 For enclosure height 1 550 mm, Cat.No 204 08 204 29 For enclosure height 1 950 mm, Cat.No 204 09 Fixing devices 206 78 For DPX 250 and 630 vertical 206 79 For DPX 250 and 630 vertical with earth leakage module Faceplates with hinges and locks With cut-outs for DPX 250 or 630 with or without earth leakage module 204 48 Height 1 400 mm 204 49 Height 1 800 mm
204 24
204 29
1 1
204 23 204 24
1 1
206 28 206 29
1 1
204 43 204 44
1 1
204 33 204 34
1
201 30
1 1 1
204 10 204 11 204 12
Faceplate height (mm)
Width (mm) external usable
Depth (mm)
1 550 1 400 460 400 230 1 950 1 800 460 400 230 Fixing devices For DPX 250 and 630 vertical For DPX 250 and 630 vertical with earth leakage module Faceplates with hinges and locks With cut-outs for DPX 250 or 630 with or without earth leakage module Height 1 400 mm Height 1 800 mm Doors For cable sleeve height 1 550 mm For cable sleeve height 1 950 mm
IP 43 kit For enclosures and cable sleeves
Plinths For enclosures width 660 mm For enclosures width 910 mm For enclosures cable sleeve, width: 660 mm
Accessories 1
201 00
1
204 20
Wall mounting lugs Set of 4 metal lugs Cable entry plates Additional adjustable plate, width 660 mm
Red catalogue numbers: New products
273
NEW
XL3example: for 800 xxxxxxx xxxxxxxx IP 55 distribution cabinets, doors and accessories
204 51
212 72
204 56
212 76
Dimensions (p. 281)
IP 55 - IK 08 with door Metal enclosures Can take devices up to 630 A Fireproof to 750 °C/5 s in accordance with IEC 60695-2-1 for installation in public buildings Capacity: 24 and 36 modules per row RAL 7035 Can be joined horizontally Pack
Cat.Nos
Cabinets
Pack
Cat.Nos
Supplied without side panels Width 700 mm 24 modules per row Height (mm)
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1
Faceplate height (mm)
Width (mm) external usable
Depth (mm)
204 51 1 095 1 000 700 600 225 204 52 1 295 1 200 700 600 225 204 90 Divider for horizontal compartmentalisation Width 950 mm Can incorporate a cable sleeve 36 or 24 modules (if integrated cable sleeve) 204 56 1 095 1 000 950 850 225 204 57 1 295 1 200 950 850 225 204 91 Divider for horizontal compartmentalisation Side panels Set of 2 side panels 204 66 For cabinet height 1 050 mm 204 67 For cabinet height 1 250 mm
Internal cable sleeves
1 1
204 26 204 27
1 1
204 46 204 47
Metal
Transparent
1 1
212 71 212 72
212 81 212 82
1 1
212 76 212 77
212 86 212 87
Supplied with handle Interchangeable key barrels, to be ordered separately (p. 281) Width 700 mm For cabinet height 1 050 mm For cabinet height 1 250 mm Width 950 mm For cabinet height 1 050 mm For cabinet height 1 250 mm
Plinths 1 1
204 60 204 61
For cabinets width 700 mm For cabinets width 950 mm
1
205 85
1 1
204 86 204 82
Sealing kit for use when joining cabinets together Joining kit Lifting rings Set of 2
Accessories
Kits for 950 mm wide cabinets Kits comprising: upright and mounting accessories For creating a cable sleeve with a usable width of 250 mm, on the right or left-hand side inside 950 mm wide cabinets For cabinet height 1 050 mm, Cat.No 204 56 For cabinet height 1 250 mm, Cat.No 204 57 Faceplates with hinges and locks Height 1 050 mm Height 1 250 mm
Red catalogue numbers: New products
274
Doors for cabinets
Distribution equipment and faceplates (p. 276 to 279)
NEW
XL3 800
IP 55 distribution enclosures, doors, cable sleeves and accessories
204 54
204 59
204 74
Dimensions (p. 281)
IP 55 - IK 08 with door Metal enclosures Can take devices up to 630 A Fireproof to 750 °C/5 s in accordance with IEC 60695-2-1 for installation in public buildings Capacity: 24 and 36 modules per row RAL 7035 Can be joined horizontally Pack
Cat.Nos
Enclosures Supplied with plinth, height 100 mm Supplied without side panels Width 700 mm 24 modules per row Height (mm)
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1
Faceplate height (mm)
Width (mm) external usable
Pack
Cat.Nos
Metal
Transparent
1 1
212 73 212 74
212 83 212 84
1 1
212 78 212 79
212 88 212 89
Side cable sleeves Can be attached on the right or left Supplied with a plinth height 100 mm and joining accessories
Depth (mm)
Height (mm)
1 1
204 73 204 74
1 1
206 28 206 29
1 1
204 43 204 44
1 1
204 83 204 84
1 1 1
204 60 204 61 204 62
1
205 85
1 1
204 86 204 82
Internal cable sleeves
204 28 204 29
1 1
206 78 206 79
Kits for 950 mm wide enclosures Kits comprising: divider, upright and mounting accessories For creating a cable sleeve with a usable width of 250 mm, on the right or left-hand side inside 950 mm wide enclosures (see opposite) For enclosure height 1 550 mm, Cat.No 204 58 For enclosure height 1 950 mm, Cat.No 204 59 Fixing devices For DPX 250 and 630 vertical For DPX 250 and 630 vertical with earth leakage module Faceplates with hinges and locks With cut-outs for DPX 250 or 630 with or without earth leakage module
Faceplate height (mm)
Width (mm) external usable
Depth (mm)
1 550 1 400 500 400 225 1 950 1 800 500 400 225 Fixing devices For DPX 250 and 630 vertical For DPX 250 and 630 vertical with earth leakage module Faceplates with hinges and locks With cut-outs for DPX 250 or 630 with or without earth leakage module Height 1 400 mm Height 1 800 mm Doors Height 1 400 mm Height 1 800 mm
Plinths For enclosures width 700 mm For enclosures width 950 mm For enclosures cable sleeve, width 500 mm
Accessories
Solid
1 1
Supplied with handle Interchangeable key barrels, to be ordered separately (p. 280) Width 700 mm For enclosure height 1 550 mm For enclosure height 1 950 mm Width 950 mm For enclosure height 1 550 mm For enclosure height 1 950 mm
External cable sleeves
204 53 1 595 1 400 700 600 225 204 54 1 995 1 800 700 600 225 204 90 Divider for horizontal compartmentalisation Width 950 mm Can incorporate a cable sleeve 36 or 24 modules (if integrated cable sleeve) 204 58 1 550 1 400 950 850 225 204 59 1 950 1 800 950 850 225 204 91 Divider for horizontal compartmentalisation Side panels Set of 2 side panels 204 68 For enclosure height 1 550 mm 204 69 For enclosure height 1 950 mm
1 1
Doors for enclosures
Sealing kit for use when joining cabinets together Joining kit Lifting rings. Set of 2
204 48 Height 1 400 mm 204 49 Height 1 800 mm
Red catalogue numbers: New products
275
XL3 800
NEW 3 XL 800
2
distribution equipment and faceplates for devices on rail , DPX-IS 250, Vistop up to 160 A, DPX 125, DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER
mounting devices on rail
2
Principle for installation of aluminium rail Cat. No 206 00/50
2
Adjustable device: upper position for Lexic device and lower position for DPX No screws required for installation
206 00
DPX
Lexic
DPX
208 10
Lexic
Lower position
209 10
Pack
DPX only
Cat.Nos
Upper position
DPX + spacer for Lexic devices
For Lexic devices
2
Rail for modular devices, Vistop up to 160 A, DPX-IS 250, DPX 125, DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER
Comprise an aluminium profile rail and 2 x 2-position fixing brackets 206 00 206 50 Fit onto functional uprights Take XL-Part 100 and 125 row distribution blocks For mounting DPX using the plates below Fixing plates For mounting DPX on rails Cat.Nos 206 00 and 206 50 262 08 For DPX 125 262 09 For DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER 262 39 For DPX-IS 250 Rail height spacer 262 99 Designed to enable modular equipment and DPX 125, DPX 160, DPX 250 ER and DPX-IS 250 to be mounted together on rail Cat.No 206 00 or Cat.No 206 00 using the plates above For 20 modules No. of modules 24 36
1
1 1 1 1
Metal faceplates 1/4 turn fastening and sealable
1/4
208 00 209 00
1 1
208 01 209 01
1 1
208 10 209 10
Captive screw
200
1 1
300
Height 150 mm For Lexic device 1/4 turn(1) 209 50 With captive screws Height 200 mm For Lexic devices and DPX 125 1/4 turn(1) 209 51 With captive screws(2) Height 300 mm For DPX 125,160 and 250 ER 1/4 turn(1) 209 60 With captive screws(2)
150
Metal faceplates No. of modules 24 36
(1) For fastening and sealing (2) Hinges Cat.No 209 59 available as an option Red catalogue numbers: New products
276
NEW 3 XL 800
XL3 800 distribution equipment and faceplates for devices on plate DPX-IS 250, DPX-IS 630
mounting DPX-IS 250, DPX-IS 630
Installation principe Attaching and fitting plates directly on functional uprights
206 05
1/4
208 10
Mounting DPX-IS 250
300
209 10
Pack
Cat.Nos
300
Plates for devices
Direct fixing on functional uprights DPX-IS 206 55 For 1 or 2 DPX-IS 250 206 57 For 1 or 2 DPX-IS 630
No of modules 24 36
1 1
206 05 206 07
Metal faceplates 208 10 209 10
For 1 DPX-IS 250 centred 1/4 turn(1) 209 60 With captive screws(2)
1 1
208 06 209 06
For 2 DPX-IS 250 1/4 turn(1) 209 60 With captive screws(2)
Selection of faceplates and plates for DPX-IS 300
300
1 1
300
No of modules 24 36
Cabinets enclosures width
1 1
208 07 209 07
For DPX-IS 630 1/4 turn(1) 209 57 With captive screws(2)
300
300
660 mm
910 mm
Plates 206 05 206 05 206 07 206 55 206 55 206 57
DPX-IS DPX-IS 250 DPX-IS 250 DPX-IS 630 DPX-IS 250 DPX-IS 250 DPX-IS 630
x1 x2 x1 x1 x2 x1
Faceplates 1/4 turn Screw fastening 208 10 209 10 208 06 209 06 208 07 209 07 209 60 209 60 209 57
Faceplate height (mm) 300 300 300 300 300 300
(1) For fastening and sealing (2) Hinges Cat.No 209 59 available as an option Red catalogue numbers: New products
277
NEW 3 XL 800
XL3 800 distribution equipment and faceplates for devices on plate DPX 125, DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER
mounting DPX 125, 160 and 250 ER
n Installation Installationprinciple principe Attaching and fitting plates directly on functional uprights Device in vertical position
206 10 206 16
1/4
Device in vertical position
208 14 Pack
Plates for fixed version devices, with front terminals
Cat.Nos
Device in vertical position For 1 to 3 DPX only 206 60 For 1 to 3 DPX 125, DPX 160 or DPX 250 ER 206 62 For 1 to 3 DPX 125, DPX 160 or DPX 250 ER with downstream earth leakage module Devices in horizontal position For 1 DPX 125 or DPX 160 with or without downstream earth leakage module For 1 DPX 250 ER with or without downstream earth leakage module
No of modules 24
36
1 1
206 10 206 12
1
206 14
1
206 16
24 modules
1 1
206 64 206 66
300
Plates for supply inverters
Device in horizontal position
Manual device in vertical position For 2 DPX 160 For 2 DPX 250 ER
Device in horizontal position
Metal faceplates Device in vertical position For 1 to 3 DPX only 1/4 turn(1) 209 60 With captive screws(2) For 1 to 3 DPX with downstream earth leakage module, positioned using window adaptors below 1/4 turn(1) 209 62 With captive screws(2) Device in horizontal position For 1 DPX 125 with or without downstream earth leakage module 1/4 turn(1) With captive screws(2) For 1 DPX 160 with or without downstream earth leakage module 1/4 turn(1) With screws(2) For 1 DPX 250 ER with or without downstream earth leakage module 1/4 turn(1) With captive screws(2) Supply inverter in vertical position For 2 DPX 160 or 2 DPX 250 ER with screws(2)
208 14 209 14
1 1
208 15 209 15
1 1
208 16 209 16
1
208 10
Window adaptors 1
203 67
1
203 68
1
203 69
For DPX 125 with or without downstream earth leakage module For DPX 160 with or without downstream earth leakage module For DPX 250 ER with or without downstream earth leakage module (1) For fastening and sealing (2) Hinges Cat.No 209 59 available as an option Red catalogue numbers: New products
278
200
400 200
1 1
200
208 12 209 12
200
1 1
208 10 209 10
300
1 1
300
No of modules 24 36
200
NEW 3 XL 800
XL3 800 distribution equipment and faceplates for devices on plate DPX 250, DPX 630 and DPX 1 250/1 600
mounting DPX 250, DPX 630 and DPX 1 250/1 600
Installation principle Attaching and fitting plates directly on functional uprights
206 20
1/4 206 25
Device in vertical position
400 208 34
Pack
Cat.Nos No of modules 24 36
1 1
206 20 206 22
206 70 206 72
1
206 30
206 80
1
206 24
1
206 25
1
206 30
206 80
Plates for fixed version devices, with front terminals Direct fixing on functional uprights Devices in vertical position For 1 to 3 DPX 250 or DPX 630 For 1 to 3 DPX 250 or DPX 630 with earth leakage module For 1 DPX 1 250/1 600 Devices in horizontal position For 1 DPX 250 with or without earth leakage module For 1 DPX 630 with or without earth leakage module For 1 DPX 1 250/1 600
Devices in horizontal position
Metal faceplates
208 20 209 20
Device in vertical position For 1 to 3 DPX 250 and630 only 1/4 turn(1) 209 70 With captive screws(2)
1 1
208 22 209 22
For 1 to 3 DPX 250 and 630 with downstream e.l.c.bs 1/4 turn(1) 209 72 With captive screws(2)
1 1
208 30 209 30
For 1 DPX 1 250/1 600 1/4 turn(1) 209 80 With captive screws(2)
200
400
600
200
1 1
208 25 209 25
For 1 DPX 630 with or without earth leakage module 1/4 turn(1) With captive screws(2)
1 1
208 34 209 34
For 1 DPX 1 250/1 600 1/4 turn(1) 209 84 With captive screws(2)
400
1 1
300
208 24 209 24
Device in horizontal position For 1 DPX 250 with or without earth leakage module 1/4 turn(1) With captive screws(2)
200
1 1
400
No of modules 24 36
(1) For fastening and sealing (2) Hinges Cat.No 209 59 available as an option Red catalogue numbers: New products
279
NEW
XL3 800 distribution equipment and accessories
200 92
206 42
Pack
209 59
206 02
Cat.Nos
1 1
206 41 206 42
1 1 1
206 43 206 44 206 45
1
206 46
Universal plates
Pack
Fit onto functional uprights Perforated plates width 600 mm Height 200 mm Height 400 mm Plain plates width 600 mm Height 200 mm Height 400 mm Height 600 mm Plain plates width 850 mm Height 400 mm
Universal rails
209 45
Cat.Nos No of modules 24
208 40 208 41 208 42 208 43 208 44 208 45 208 46
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2
No of modules 24 36
1 1
Fit onto functional uprights 206 04 Width 600 mm 206 54 Width 850 mm
1 1
Comprising a rail and 2 adjustable fixing brackets Fit onto functional uprights 206 02 For 24 modules cabinets and enclosures 206 52 For 36 modules cabinets and enclosures
Universal adjustable fixing devices
2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
209 40 209 41 209 42 209 43 209 44 209 45 209 46
1
W
362 07 362 08 362 12 362 13
100
366 46
1 1 1
204 35 204 36 204 37
x
H (mm)
40 x 60 40 x 80 60 x 60 60 x 80 Plastic rivet For fixing Lina 25 ducting on supports Cable fixing supports For 660 mm wide cabinets For 910 mm wide cabinets For horizontal external cable sleeve
1
209 49
Height (mm)
50 100 150 200 300 400 600
Assist natural ventilation Screw mounting 209 99 Height 200 mm
1
209 59
20 10
200 51 016 65
10
203 99
20 20
200 92 200 91
6
200 98
Hinges Set of 2 hinges Fit on screw mounting faceplates Blanking plates For metal or plastic faceplates 24 modules, smooth adjustable strip 18 modules, separable into modules or 1/2 modules Clip-on holder for adhesive labels Supplied with a sheet of labels for marking rows on faceplate Clip nuts Mounting on front panel by 1/4 turn fastening on functional uprights Bag of 20 clip nuts for M6 screw Bag of 50 x M6 screws Aerosol paint spray RAL 7035
Key barrels 1 1 1 1 1
Red catalogue numbers: New products
280
50 100 150 200 300 400 600 Screw mounting Captive screws Hinges Cat.No 209 59 available as an option
Accessories
Lina 25™ ducting mounting supports For horizontal and vertical mounting and height adjustment of Lina 25 ducting Supplied with plastic rivets Fit directly on functional uprights 204 70 Set of 2 for XL3 800 36 modules cabinets and enclosures 205 70 Set of 2 for XL3 800 24 modules cabinets and enclosures Lina 25™ ducting Length: 2 m
48 40 32 32
Height (mm)
No of modules 24 36
Wiring
1 1
1/4 turn For fastening and sealing
Ventilating faceplates
Universal supports for external cable sleeve For mounting terminal blocks, earth terminals, etc. 201 95 Set of 3 metal supports
209 90 209 91 209 92 209 93 209 94 209 95 209 96
Solid metal faceplates
202 91 202 92 202 93 202 94 202 96
Supplied with a set of 2 keys Type 405 Type 455 Type 1242E Type 2433A Double bar knockout
XL3 800 technical characteristics IP 30-43, IP 55
■ Installation principle IP 43
■ Dimensions IP 43 and IP 55
Side panels can be removed individually
Cabinets
Total accessibility
Cabinets with internal cable sleeve
H
H
(1)
250 D
W
(1)
600
W
D
Enclosures external cable sleeves
Enclosures with internal cable sleeve
H
H
Horizontal and vertical joining
(1)
250 D
W
(1)
600 D
W
(1) Usable width
IP 43 Cat.Nos
■ Installation principle IP 55
Cabinets 204 01 204 02 204 06 204 07 Enclosures 204 03 204 04 204 08 204 09 Ext. cable sleeves 204 23 204 24
IP 55 External dimensions (mm) W H D 660 660 910 910
1 050 1 250 1 050 1 250
230 230 230 230
660 660 910 910
1 550 1 950 1 550 1 950
230 230 230 230
460 460
1 550 1 950
230 230
Cat.Nos Cabinets 204 51 204 52 204 56 204 57 Enclosures 204 53 204 54 204 58 204 59 Ext. cable sleeves 204 73 204 74
External dimensions (mm) W H D 700 700 950 950
1 095 1 295 1 095 1 295
225 225 225 225
700 700 950 950
1 550 1 950 1 550 1 950
225 225 225 225
500 500
1 550 1 950
225 225
230
273
IP 43 with curved door
660 / 910
IP 55 with flat door 225
250
Horizontal joining
700 / 950
281